HomeMy WebLinkAbout08-1984
V
1
i
f
15.4. upon seven (7) days' written notice to CONTRACTOR and ENGI-
NEER, OkINER may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right
or remedy, elect to abandon the Project and terminate the Agreement.
In such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid for all Work executed and any
expense sustained plus a reasonable profit.
Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate:
16.5. If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the Work is
suspended for G period of more than ninety (90) days by OWNER or under
an order of court or other public authority, or ENGINEER fails to act
` on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is
I submitted, or OWNER fails to pay CONTRACTOR any sum approved by ENGINEER
or awarded by arbitrators within thirty (30) days of ics approval and
presentation, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven (7) days' written notice
' t to OWNER and ENGINEER, terminate the Agreement and recover from OWNER
pa meat for all Work executed and any expense sustained plus a reason-
able profit. In addition and in lieu of terminating the Agreement,
r, if ENGINEER has failed to act on an Application for Payment or OWNER
has failed to make any payment as aforesaid, CONTRACTOR may upon seven
(7) days' notice to OWNER and ENGINEER stop the Work until he has been
paid all amounts then due.
I~
ARTICLE 16 - ARBITRATION
16.1. All claims, disputes and other matters in question arising
out of, or relating to, this Agreement or the breach thereof except
for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final
payment as provided by paragraph 14.15, shall be submitted to arbitra-
tion at the request of either party to the dispute, The parties may -
agree upon one arbiter, otherwise, there shall be three, one named
f' in writina by each party, and the third chosen by the two arbiters
so selected; or if the arbiters fail to select a third within ten (10)
days, he shall be chosen by a District Judge serving the County in
which the major portion of the Project is located, unless otherwise
specified, Should the party demanding arbitration fail to name an
arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate
shall lapse, and the decision of the ENGINEER shall be final and binding
r on him. Should the other party -Pail to choose an arbiter within ten
(10) days, the ENGINEER shall appoint such arbiter. Should either
party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or in-
formation demanded in writing, the arbiters are empowered by both
parties to take ex parte proceedings. The arbiters shall act with
promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties
on sub-
to the contract.
under decision thisf cothe ntract arbiters shall upon a a condition
mitted to arbitration
P&N-78 GC-31
i
- L .
precedent to any r !ht of legal action, The decision of the arbiter
or arbiters may be filed in court to carry it into effect. The arbiters, ~C
if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party
whose contention is sustained, such sums as they deem proper For the
time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal, and if the appeal
was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for any
delay occasioned thereby. The arbiters shall fix their own compensation,
unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the cost and
j charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties, The award
of the arbiters must be made in writing.
16,2, CONTRACTOR will carry on the Work and maintain the progress
schedule during any arbitration proceedings, unless otherwise agreed
by him and OWNER in writing.
ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS
Giving Notice:
17.1, Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires
the giving of written notice it shall be deemed to have been validly
given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the
firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or
if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage pre-
paid, to the last business address known to him who gives the notice, ~I
Computation of Time;
17.2. When a period of time is referred to in the Contract Docu-
ments by days, it shall be computed to exclude the first and include
the last day of such period. If the last, day of any such period falls
on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law
of the applicable jurisdiction, such day shall be omitted from the
computation.
General
17.3. All Specifications, Drawings and copies thereof furnished
by ENGINEER shall remain his property. They shall not be used on another
Project, and, with the exception of those sets which have been signed
in connection with the execution of the Agreement, shall be returned
to him on request upon completion of the Project.
17.4, The duties and obligations imposed by these General Con-
ditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder, and, in particular
F&N-/8 GC-32
i
I
but without limitation, the warranties, guarantees and obligations
I imposed upon CONTRACTOR by paragraphs 6.28, 13.1, 13,10 and 14,3 and
the rights and remedies available to OWNER and ENGINEER thereunder,
' shall be in addition to, and shall not be construed in any way as a
limitation of, any rights and remedies available to them which are
otherwise imposed or available by law, by special guarantee or by other
provisions of the Contrast Documents,
17.5. The Contract Documents shall be governed by the law of
the place of the Project.
I
1
,
r
1
f
F&N-78 GC-33
I
I
t
41
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
1 1, PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, Subsurface exploration to ascertain the nature of
soi s, nc u8ing -he amount of rock, if any, is the responsibility of any
and all prospective bidders. It shall be the responsibility of the bidders
to make such subsurface investigations as he deems necessary to determine
the nature of the material to be encountered,
REFERENCE POINTS: The Engineer will provide at the site of the
2.
work or zon a control in the form of a base line or grid reference
points and vertical control in the form of bench marks. From the
controls established by the Engineer, the Contractor shall be res-
ponsihle for the complete layout of the work and for establishing lines
expense during construction. ntheTservices Contractor
of competent ,
A and furnish elevations at his own needed
r
personnel, equipment, including accurate surveying instruments, stakes,
templates, platforms, tools, and materials as may be required for laying '
out any and all parts of the work. The Engineer will be available for
assistance in an advisory capacity.
I
€ 3. INSURANCE: The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of
Paragrai 3:T- f the General Conditions and shall, at his own expense,
purchase, maintain and keep in force such insurance as will protect him
from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from his
operations under this Contract, whether such operations are by himself
y or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by
any of them or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
Immediately following the Performance Bond and Payment Bond forms,
the City of Denton insurance minimum requirements are described along with
Certificate of Insurance form. Separately from the bound executed copies
of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall furnish executed copies of
the Certificate of Insurance on forms provide.; by the City of Denton for
that purpose. The insurance coverage must be accepted by the City of
Denton before commencing any work under the contract applicable thereto.
3.1 Such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims
under statutory Workmen's Compensation laws, disability laws
or such other employee benefit laws as will fulfill the
requirements of the Jurisdiction in which the work is to be
performed. Such insurance will be amended to provide coverage
for multiple Jurisdictions and other such indicated coverages
(U.S. Longshoremens and Harbor Workers, Admiralty, etc.) as
may be applicable,
3.2 Such insurance as will protect the Contractor for damages
because of bodily injury, sickness, disease or death of his
employees apart from that imposed by Workmen's Compensation
a
v
r
00800-1
a
r
1
4'.
laws with such insurance having a minimum limit of liability
of not less than the City of Denton minimum requirements.
3.3 Such insurance as will protect the
Contractor from claims from
N t damages because of bodily injury, personal Injury, sickness,
i disease or death with minimum limits of liability of not less
than the City of Denton minimum requirements.
3.4 Such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims for
damages for injury to or destruction of tangible property of
others, including loss of use thereof. Such coverage shall
include Broad Form Property Damage and removal of XCU ex-
clusions where applicable. The limits of liability shall be not
less than the City of Denton minimum requirements.
3,5 Such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims for
damages arising out of the maintenance, operation, or use of
any owned, non-owned or hired vehicles. Minimum limits of
liability for bodily injury and property damage combined shall
be not less than that listed in the City of Denton minimum
req .I rements ,
3.6 Property insurance upon the entire work, including materials
not in place at the site to the full insurable value thereof.
All Risk Builder's Risk Insurance shall include the interests
of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractor and Sub-subcon-
tractors in the work and shall include, but not be limited to,
the perils of fire, lightning, flood, collapse, windstorm,
hail, explosion, riot, civil commotion, smoke, aircraft, land
vehicles, vandalism and malicious mischief. The Builder's
Risk Insurance shall be endorsed to permit occupancy prior to
completion of construction and prior to acceptance by the
Owner, A copy of the Builder's Risk Policy shall be filed
with the Owner and shall include a ten (10) day notice of
cancellation of policy provision.
3.7 Steam boiler and machinery insurance if such equipment is
operated for other than test purposes prior to final ac-
ceptance of the work by the Owner. This insurance shall
include the interests of the Sub-subcontractors in the work.
The insurance required by this Paragraph 3, Paragraphs 3.3 and 3.4 above
shall be amended to afford coverage for;
Products Liability and/or Completed Operations, Blanket Broad Form
Contractural Liability specifically covering the indemnification
assumed by the Contractor under this agreement. Watercraft or
7 aircraft liability, whether owned, non-owned or hired, shall be
included.
a
00800-2
T~
i
~ 1.
l 1
Such insurance as is required under this Paragraph 3 shall be written so
that the Owner will be notified in writing, in the event of cancella-
tion, restrictive amendment or non-renewal at least ten days prior to ,
such action. Certificates of Insurance on the form attached to this
is Section shall be approved by the Owner prior to the commencement of
work.
All insurance required under this Paragraph 3 shall be written with the
City of Denton as co-insured, and the City shall receive a duplicate copy
of every insurance policy required.
The stated limits of insurance required by this Paragraph 3 are MINIMUM
ONLY and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine what
limits are adequate. These minimum limits may be basic policy limits or
any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, the
Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting
from or connected with operations under this contract whether or not
said losses are covered by insurance. The Owner's acceptance and approval
i of Certificates of Insurance that in any respect do not comply with the
Contract requirements does not release the Contractor from compliance
herewith.
I The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other for damages 'I
caused by fire or other perils to the extent their interests are covered i
by insurance under this Section, except such rights as they may have to 1
the proceeds of such insurance when held by the Owner as trustee. The
Contractor shall require similar waivers by Subcontractors and Sub-sub-
contractors.
d. RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE; The Owner has rotained the
Engineer to provide a res de- pro ect representative during the
construction phase of this project. In general, the authority of the
resident project representative is as set forth in Attachment A which is
` included immediately following these Supplementary Conditions.
5. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO COMPLETE ON TIME,
The time of completion is the essence of this contract. For each
a calendar day that any work shall remain uncompleted after the time
specified in the proposal and the contract, or the increased time granted
by the Owner, are as equitably increased by additional work or materials
ordered after the contract is signed, the sum per day given in the
following schedule, unless otherwise specified in the special provisions,
shall be deducted from the monies due the Contractor;
i
l
F
eee r
t
00800-3
t
Amount of Contract Amount of Liquidated Damages
I Less than $ 50000.00 $ 60.00 Per Day ;
S 51000.00 $ 14,999.99 80.00 Per Day
15,000.00 to 24,999,99 100.00 Per Day
25,000,00 to 49,999.99 120.00 Per Day
50,000.00 to 999999.00 160.00 Per Day
100,000,00 to 1,000,000.00 240.00 Per Day
More than 1,000,000,00 500.00 Per Day
The sum of money thus deducted after the time stipulated in the contract
for completing the work. The said amounts are fixed and agreed upon by and
r between Owner and Contractor because of the impracticability and extreme ,
difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner in such Y
event would sustain; and said amounts are agreed to be the amounts of
damages which the Owner would sustain and which shall be retained from the
monies due, or that may become due, the Contractor under this contract, and
if said monies be insufficient to cover the amount owing, then the
Contractor or his surety shall pay any additional amounts due,
j
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
i
i
00800-4
n,
_ T
t
x
ATTACHMENT A
Duties, Responsibilities and Limitations of Authority
of Resident Project Representative
r A. Canard. - '
r )
F Resident Project Representative is ENGINEER's Agent, will act as directed by and under the supervision of F.NGI-
tj NEER, and will confer with ENGINEER regarding his actions. Resident Project Representative's dealings in matters
I 93 pertaining to the on-site Work shall in general he only with E,NGINF.ER and CONTRACTOR, and dealings with
F subcontractors shall only be through or with the full knowledge of CONTRACTOR. Written communication with
OWNER will be only through or as directed by ENGINEER. q
H. Dulles and Responsibilities,
Resident Project Representative will:
1. Schedules.- Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing submissions and schedule of values prepared
by CONTRACTOR and consult with ENGINEER concerning their acceplahrllty,
2. Conferences: Allond preconstruclion conferences. Arrange a schedule of progress meetings and otherjob conferences
as required in consultation with ENGINEER and notify those expected to attend In advance. Attend meetings, and
maintain and circulate copies of minutes thereof,
J. Valsonr
a, Serve as ENOINEER's Ifalson with CONTRACTOR, working principally through CONTRACTOR's superinlen• {
i dent and assist him in understanding the intent of the Conlrncl Documents, Assist ENGINEER in serving as O WNER's
liaison with CONTRACTOR when CONTRACTOR'S operations affect OWNER's on-site operations,
b. As requested by ENOINEE'R, assist in obtaining from OWNER additional details or Information, when required
at the Job site for proper execution of the Work.
i, Shop Drawings and Samples: t
a. Receive and record date of receipt of Shop Drawings and samples, receive samples which are furnished at the site
by CONTRACTOR, and notify ENGINEER of their availability for exandnalfon.
b. Advise ENOINEF,R and CONTRACTOR or its superintendent immediately of the commencement of any Work
requiring it Shop Drawing or sample submission if the submission has not been approved by ENGINEER,
5. Revew of Work, NeJecllon of Difecrire Work, InsperNorrs' and Trots: ~ J
a. Conduct on•skeobservations oftheWoikinprogress toassist 17NGINF.FRindetermining if[heWork isproceeding
!
h # In accordance with the Contract Documents and that completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents,
b, Report to ENOINEER whenever he believes that any Work is unsatisfactory, fauhy or defective or does not
conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements of any inspections, tests or approval required
F to be made or has been durnagcd prior to final payment and advise ENGINEER when he believes Work should be
corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval 1
c, Verify that tests, equipment and systems startups and operating and maintenance instructions are conducted as
required by the Contract Documents and in presence of the required personnel, and that CONTRACTOR maintains
adequate records Ihercoh observe, record and report to ENGINFIiR appioprilrte details relative to the test procedures
and sturtuns,
d. Accompany visiting inspectors representing puhlfc or other a'
the outcome of these inspections and report to ENGINEER t encies having ,jurisdiction aver the E4ojert record
1
- to 1979 by National Sociely of Professions) F oginccrs, 2029 K St.. N.W.. Washington, D.C. 20M
NSIT/AC'rC'ASCi[ Public,alion Nu. 1910•I•A
;i
;y 19791'ditinn
e
1
41
6. Imerpretallon ofContr'acl Doctfnlenis: Transmit to CONTRACTOR ENGINEER's clarifications and in(erpretations
of the Contract Documents.
7. Modiflcatlons: Consider and evaluate CONTRACTOR's suggestions for modifications in Drawings or Specifications
i
and report (hem with recommendations to ENGINEER.
8. Records:
y
E a. Maintain at the job site orderly riles for correspondence, reports of job conferences, Shop Drawings and samples
submissions, reproductions of original Contract Documents including all addenda, change orders, field orders, add[-
tlonal Drawings issued subsequent to the execution of the Contract, ENGINEER's clarifications and interpretations
of the Contract Documents, progress reports, and other Project related documents.
b. Keep a diary or log book, recording hours on the job site, weather conditions, data relative to questions of extras
or deductions, list of visiting officials and representatives of manufacturers. fabricators, suppliers and distributors,
daily activities, decisions, observations In general and specific observations in more detail as in the case of observing
test Procedures. Send copies to ENGINEER.
c. Record names, addresses and telephone numbers of all CONTRACTORS, subcontractors and major suppliers of
-materials and equipment.
4. Reports:
l a, Furnish ENO] NEER period le reports as required of progress of the Work and CONTR ACTOR's compliance wit h the
approved progress schedule and schedule of Shop Drawing submissions.
b, Consult with ENGINEER in advance of scheduled major tests, inspections or start of Important phases of the
work.
c. Report immediately to ENGINEER upon the occurrence of any accident.
10. Payment RequlslNonsr Review applications rot payment with CONTRACTOR for compliance with the established
procedure for their submission and forward them with recommendations to ENGINEER, noting particularly their
relation to the schedule of values, Work completed and materials and equipment delivered of the site but not incor-
porated in the Work.
11. Cerllfrcales, Maintenance and Operation hfernuals: During the course of the Work, verify that certificates, maintenance
and operation manuals and other dala required to be assembled and furnished by CONTRACTOR are applicable to
the Items actually installed; and deliver this material to ENGINEER for his review and forwarding to OWNER prior
to final acceptance of (he Work.
12. Completion:
gr a. Before ENGINEER issues a Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit to CONTRACTOR it list of observed 'r
items requiring completion or correction.
b. Conduct final Inspection in the company of ENGINEER, OWNER and CONTRACTOR and prepare a final list of
items to be completed or corrected.
l c. Verify that all items on final list have been completed or corrected and make recommendations to ENGINEER
concerning acceptance,
C. Limitations of Authority.
Except upon written Instructions of ENOINF.ER, Resident Project Representative:
1. Shall not authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or approve any substitute materials or equipment.
2. Shall not exceed limitations on ENOINEF.R's authority as set forth in the Contract Documents.
I J. Shall not undertakeanyoftheresponsibilitiesofCONTRACTOR,subconlraciorsorCONTRACTOR'ssuperintendent,
! or expedite the Work.
r ! 4. Shall not advise on or Issue directions relative to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures of construction unless such is specifically called for in the Contract Documents,
i
S. Shall not advise on or issue directions ;is to safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work.
6, Shall not authorize OWNER to occupy the Project in whole or in part.
7. Shall not participate in specialized field or laboratory tests.
heraerd by r nlinreK rwnl Conhacl Nk on tnn('nmmiIlet
tVbhsbeJM~nlly by Pr oft; uunrllnrmttn In l'nu,t huIi't. Apra( rtt dio,wn nl Ih!NMlooal Su alrof h,dn,onalIn pnte r,. Anxnnn Con,u9,nr l'npntet% ounnl Ama,(sn YK,(,I
ofeod rng, neon
l
j
i
DIVISIONS 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENT'S
2
1
4
j
r
y
2
1
01001 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
i
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK i
The work involved under this contract consists of the furnishing
of all materials, tools, equipment, transportation, services, and
all labor and superintendence necessary for the construction and
completion of the City of Denton High Service Pump Station addition.
1.02 MATERIALS FURNISHED BY OWNER
Under separate contract the Owner will furnish to the Contractor,
as shown in n detail vertical the turbine Appendixptogthist
motor contract controller Installation,
with this
document.
I The Contractor shall receive, unload, store and install the items '
complete for operation. The Contractor shall be responsible for
insure
checking sthe received -ims
required in the against h area delivered t and In good
material
condition.
1.03 EXCESS EARTH
Excess earth from the various excavations (earth not required for
backfill or embankment), shall be disposed of by the Contractor,
off the site, at no additional expense to the Owner.
1.04 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
Excavation will be unclassified. It shall be the responsibility
of the J as he deems
necessarydtordeto make termine sthe nature of mateerial to be excavated.
a
1.05 CORRECTION PERIOD
3. Nothing in the General Conditions Article 13 concerning the
a correction period shall establish a period of limitation with
respect to any other obligation which Contractor has under the
Contract Documents. The establishment of time periods relates
only to the specific obligations of Contractor to correct the
work, and has no relationship to the time within which his i
obligations under the Contract Documents may be sought to be
enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be i
1 commenced to establish his liability with respect to his obli-
gations other than to specifically correct the work. This
correction period shall be covered by the extension of the Per-
formance Bond.
i
x 01001-1
i1
1.06 CONNECTIONS TG EXISTING FACILITIES
3 It will be necessary, during the course of construction, to make
} several connections to the existing plant facilities. All work
involved in making connections which will require a shutdown of the
existing plant facilities shall be carefully planned and coordinated
with both the Engineer and the Owner so that 'down" time will be held
to a minimum. On occasions when the existing facilities are down
for purpose of making a connection, work shall proceed on a 24-hour
s schedule until the pumping facilities are back in operation.
s
1.07 WORKMANSHIP
These specifications contain detail instruct •s and descriptions
covering the major items of construction and workmanship necessary
for building and completing the various units or elements of the
project. The specifications are intended to be so written that 0.
only first class workmanship and finish of the best grade and
quality will result. The fact that these specifications may fail
to be so complete as to cover all details will not relieve the
Contractor of full responsibility for providing a completed
project of high quality first class finish and appearance and ~
satisfactory for operation, all within the apparent intent of the
plans and specifications.
1.08 FIELD OFFICE J
The Contractor shall not be required to furnish a field office on the
site for the Engineer's use. Field office space for the Contractor's
use, at Contractor's option may be in a mobile trailer or may be
contained in a construction office building. The Contractor, at his
expense, shall pay for all gas, water, and electricity required for
his field office space. The Contractor shall, at his expense,
provide phone service to his field office and shall pay for all phone
service fees which will be for his use.
1.09 SANITATION FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide portable toilet facilities
(Chem-cans) in sufficient number for the Contractor's use
throughout the course of the project and in accordance with OSHA
F requirements. Contractor's personnel will not be permitted to use
toilet facilities in the existing plant buildings.
1.10 SALVAGED MATERIAL I
During construction of the project any equipment or materials which
has been the property of the Owner and which is salvaged by the
Contractor shall remain the property of the Owner with delivery and
storage points on the site as designated by the Owner. Brick and
concrete vubble, and materials not to be retained by the Owner, shall
.
I .
i
01001-2
I
41
d
be the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of off the
plant site.
1.11 "ADD OR DEDUCT" BID ITEMS
Proposal Item for additional (or less) materials ara intended to be
used as a basis for payment for extra work which may be required
during the construction of the project. Payment will be made under
these items only for such quantities, if any, which the Engineer
authorizes as extra work, not shown on the Plans. These unit prices
may also be used to reduce the contract amount in the event
quantities are reduced from those shown on the Plans. Work
authorized under these items shall be in full compliance with Article
11.3.1 of the General Conditions.
1.12 MATERIALS
These specifications are intended to be so written that only
materials of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The
fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete
in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full respon-
sibility for roviding materials of high quality and protecting
' them adequately until incorporation in the structure. The
s, specifications for materials set out the minimum standard of
quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satis-
factory project. No substitutions will be permitted until the
Contractor has received written permission of the Engineer to make
a substitution for the material which has been specified,
Where the term "or equal", or "or approved equal" is used, it is
understood that if a material, product, or piece of equipment of
the specified naive and quality is furnished it will be approvable,
as the particular name was used for the purpose of establishing a
standard of quality acceptable to the Owner. If a product of any
other name is proposed for use, the Engineer's approval thereof
must be obtained before the. proposed substitute is procured by the
Contractor. Wherever the term "or equal" is used, it is under-
stood to mean "or approved equal".
1.13 COST BREAKDOWN
Within thirty (30) days after the execution of the Contract, and
not less than ten (10) days prior to the first monthly estimate,
the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a cost breakdown of
the work under this Contract. This breakdown is for use by the
Engineer in preparing the monthly estimates and for the Owner's
use in cost accounting for the project, The breakdown shall be in
a detail, itemizing all items of equipment and construction and
shall accurately reflect the cost of all work as included in the
bid prices. Cost breakdown shall be such that an overall cost of
the various elements of the project can be determined.
01001-3
1
d
1..14 PROGRESS SCHEDULES t,
Within 10 days prior to submission of the first application for
progress payment, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the
Engineer for approval six copies of the schedule in which the
Contractor proposes to carry on the work, the date of which he
will start the several major activities (including procurement of
` materials, plants, and equipment) and the contemplated dates for
f completing the same. The schedule shall be in the form of a
computerized critical path or PERT (Project Evaluation and Review)
schedule covering all work to be done on the project. The
schedule should be prepared by a person experienced in this field.
It is intended to accomplish the following,
r A. Gives early warning of delays and other problems in time for
correction.
B. Requires establishment of detailed plans in the form of
future activities and events in the sequential relationship.
I~ C. Establish inter-relationships of significant events. 1
D. Continuous currcot status information.
1
E. Rapid analysis of program.
1 ~
F. Permits new schedules when an existing schedule is unachiev-
able. i
G. Logs the progress as actually occurred.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, work accomplished falls behind
that scheduled, the Contractor shall take such action as necessary
to improve his progress. In addition, the Engineer may require
the Contractor to submit a revised schedule demonstrating his
program and proposed plan to make up lag in scheduled progress and
to insure completion of the work within the contract time. If the
Engineer finds the proposed plan not acceptable, he may require
the Contractor to increase the work force, the construction plant
and equipment, the number of work shifts or the overtime oper-
ations witho-t additional cost to the Owner.
Failure of the Contractor to comply with these requirements shall
be considered grounds for determination by the Engineer that the
Contractor is failing to prosecute the work with such diligence as
will insure its completion within the time specified.
1.15 PROJECT SIGN
The Contractor shall not be required to provide and maintain a
project identification sign at the location.
` 1111
1
01001-4
i
V
.
41
1.16 TESTS
In addition to the tests called for in the Specifications, the
Owner may have tests made of pipe and materials for conformity
with the Specifications by an independent testing laboratory.
Such independent laboratory will be selected and paid by the
Owner, The Owner may require the Contractor to furnish mill test
certificates on reinforcing steel or wire, cast iron pipe and +
fittings, and cement.
1.17 POWER FOR CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall provide at his own expense electrical power
for project construction.
1.18 FINAL TESTING AND OPERATION
Prior to presentation for final acceptance of the work under this r
contract, the Contractor shall have started and operated all units 1
h of the plant for a sufficient duration of time to permit the
I Engineer to observe overall performance of the respective units
and equipment. Such operation shall be properly coordinated with
the Owner's operating personnel.
1.19 SANITATION AND CLEANUP
During construction, the Contractor shall maintain the premises in an
orderly, neat, and presentable condition and keep interference with
l the Owner's operations to a minimum. Scraps and debris shall not be
left scattered around but shall be assembled in one place. When
construction under this Contract has been otherwise completed, the
Contractor shall remove all left over construction materials,
equipment, scraps, debris and rubbish, and leave the site in a neat,
well kept appearance.
At the completion of the work, all buildings and structures shalt be
broom clean. The Contractor shall clean the walls of all structures
of dirt, stains, or other materials and pipes shall be left free of
any and all foreign material. The Contractor shall remove all
marks, stains, dirt and soil from all finished surfaces and shall
thoroughly clean all floors, clean and polish all finished hardware
and other such devices.
1.20 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION
I The Contractor shall locate and verify existing pipe locations and
elevations at an early date so that the concrete pressure piping can
be fabricated to fit. The Plans were prepared using locations and
elevations from records; however, neither the Engineer nor Owner can
verify the exactness of existing locations and elevations, or
s
01001-5
t
1
} existing pipe joints. The Contractor shall provide fabricated
piping for connecting to the existing piping with very minimum shut
down times.
The sequence of construction must be such that the existing system is
never out of service, except for short-time shut-downs. When the
existing system is shut-down for connections, the Contractor shall
work on a continuous basis until the existing system is back in
service.
Sequence of construction of all other work on this project will be
~ at the Contractor's option unless otherwise requested by the Owner
in writing.
1.21 PROTECTING EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES
Where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and
utilities, the Contractor shall at his own expense carefully 1
support and protect all such structures and/or utilities so that
there will be no failure or settlement. Where it is necessary to
move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines or other obstructions,
the Contractor shall notify and cooperate with the utility owner.
In case damage to an existing structure or utility occurs, whether
failure or settlement, the Contractor shall restore the structure
oe utility to its original condition and position without compen-
sation from the Owner.
Contractor shall repair or replace all damaged structures to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and the Owner. Structures shall be
restored to a condition equal to or better than the original
condition and of a similar material and design. The costs of such
repair or replacement shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be 1
included in the Proposal prices.
The Engineer has shown all existing piping, valves, conduits, etc.,
as
best can be determined from available records. The Contractor shall
verify the type, size, and location of all existing piping and valves
in the construction area. All piping, valves, electrical conduit, '
etc. in the construction area shall be removed and/or relocated as
necessary in a manner acceptable to the Engineer, and no additional
compensation will be considered for relocating any of these items
whether shown on the plans or not.
1.22 REFERENCE STANDARDS
i
C Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, t
or association, or to codes of local and state authorities, shall
mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative
specification adopted and published at the date of taking bids,
unless specifically stated otherwise.
01001-6
' V
,11)
I
41
1.23 METHODS OF OPERATION
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in advance concerning his
plans for carrying on each part of the work, but the Contractor
3
alone shall be responsible for the safety, adequacy, and
efficiency of his plant, equipment, and methods.
4 Any method of
work su es d br or tin Eninee,
but not specified, shall be usedtat ttheerisk ands responsibilityrof
` a the Contractor, and the Consulting Engineer and Owner will assume
I no responsibility therefor.
Review by the Owner or Consulting Engineer of any plan or method
of work proposed by the Contractor shall not relieve the Con-
tractor of any responsibility therefor, and such review shall not
be considered as an assumption of any risk or liability by the
Owner or Consulting Engineer, or any officer, agent, or employee
i thereof. The Contractor shall have no claim on account of the
failure or inefficiency of any plan or method so reviewed.
The Owner and the Consulting Engineer will not be responsible for
any act or omission of the Contractor, or any subcontractor, or
any of their agents or employees, or any other persons performing
any of the work. The Owner and Consulting Engineer will not be
. responsible for any failure of the Contractor or his subcon-ors or ! withtthe requan other
ofrthescontractodocumentsrk in accordance
1.24 UNFAVORABLE CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS
During unfavorable weather, wet ground, or other unsuitable
construction conditions, the Contractor shall confine his oper-
ations to work which will not be affected adversely thereby. No
` portion of the work shall be constructed under conditions which
would affect adversely the quality or efficiency thereof, unless
special means or precautions are taken by the Contractor to
perform the work in a proper and satisfactory manner.
1.25 PUMPING AND DEWATERING OPERATIONS
Work to be performed will require drain•Ing, pumoing and de-
watering, and certain cleaning operations necessary to complete
the work as specified and as indicated on the drawings. It is the
intent of these specifications that such draining,
dewatering, and cleaning operations shall be the obligationaof the
} Contractor and that the Owner will aid in lowering the liquid
level in the structures involved only to the extent possible by
s operation of existing valves and facilities.
The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that structure,,
containing water are located adjacent to the site of the new
01001-7
3
i construction. The Contractor shall provide all necessary pumping, as
required by the excavation work specification, to remci:e all
surface water, ground water, leakage, and water from other sources
from excavations.
1.26 DEFINITIONS
r
Whenever the words, forms or phrases defined herein, or pronouns
used in their place occur in these specifications, or in any
document or instrument herein contemplated, the intent and meaning
shall be interpreted as follows:
BHP - Brake Horsepower
BIL - Basic Impulse Level
BTU -British Thermal Unit
1
EQUIPMENT IANUFACTURER OR VENDOR - A manufacturing company engaged
in the production oequipment omaterials purchased for use in
this project.
GPM or gpm - Gallons per Minute
HP - Horsepower
KPA - Kilovolt Amperes
KW - Kilowatt
MGD - Million Gallons per Day
NPSH - Net Positive Suction Head
PIV - Peak Inverse Voltage
PF - Power Factor
RPM.- Revolutions per Minute i~
1.27 STANDARDS
M
Reference to technical society, organization or body is made in 1
Specifications in accordance with the following abbreviations:
ACI American Concrete Institute
AGMA American Gear Manufacturer's Association 1
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ,
RISC American Institute of Steel Construction
ANSI American National Standard Institute
ASA American Standards Association
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers J
61001-8
1 ,
y ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
AWSC American Welding Society Code
AWWA American Water Works Association
CSI Construction Specification Institute
FIA Factory Insurance Association
FM Factory Manual
FS Federal Specification
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEC National Electric Code
OSHA Federal Occupational Safety & Health Act, 1970
UBC Uniform Building Code
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1,28 HANDLING MATERIALS NOT APPROVED
The Contractor shall remove from the site any materials found to
be damaged, and any materials not meeting the specifications,
These materials shall be removed promptly, unless the Engineer
i, will accept the materials after repairing. Materials found to be
damaged, or not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed.
ection before 4
1.29 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Off-site storage will only be acceptable if written permission is
obtained from Owner. All off-site storage, if authorized, shall
afford adequate and satisfactory security and protection. Off-site
storage facilities shall be accessible to Owner and Engineer,
On-site storage areas and methods of storage shall be approved by the
Owner and Engineer, The Contractor shalt be fully responsible for
a protection and handling the stored materials and equipment.
1.30 PROTECTION OF PIPE INTERIOR
The Contractor shall keep all foreign material such as dirt, debris,
animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the work, Ends of ~
installed pipe shall be capped or plugged in approved manner when
pipe laying is not in progress. In event the interior of pipe be- i
comes contaminated, in the opinion of the Owner's representative, the
Contractor shall thoroughly wash out the section before continuing,
Attention is called to Section 15079 regarding requirements to keep
potable water pipe interiors free from pollution.
1,31 BLASTING
No blasting will be allowed.
01001-9
ti
i~
N
r
r
1.32 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION
The contractor shall provide all water needed for construction,
including water required for mixing of concrete, getting, compaction,
etc.
1.33 WATER FOR STERILIZING AND PIPE FILLINGS
Water will be furnished to the Contractor without charge in the
amounts needed to fill, test and disinfect the reservoir, piping,
etc. The Owner reserves the right, however, to charge at prevailing
rates for water wasted through carelessness or neglect on the part of
the Contractor, The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner.
i IT
END OF SECTION
}
i
I
i
I
j
01001-10
,
01150 BASIS OF PAYMENT
i
1.00 GENERAL
The Lump Sum price bid for Item 1 as set forth in the Proposal shall
f include the furnishing of all labor, tools, material, machinery,
appliances, plant and equipment appurtenant to and necessary for the
construction and completion in a first class, workmanlike manner of
all work as herein specified in strict accordance with the seturbine
specifications and accompanying Plans; except, the vertical
pump with motor and motor controller are to be furnished by the Owner
and installed under this Contract. The "Lump Sum Price" shall also
include any and all kinds, amount or class of excavation,
backfilling, pumping or drainage, sheeting, shoring and bracing,
disposal of any kind and all surplus materials, permanent protection
of all overhead, surface or underground ellnestuappurtenancesaand
replacement of any poles, conduits, p p
connections, cleaning up, removing and disposal of debris and
structures where removal is required, overhead expense, bond, public
liability and compensation and property damage insurance, patent
fees, and royalties, risk due to the elements, and profits, unless
otherwise specified. {
The bid price shall also include all other incidentals not specs- J
l fically mentioned above that may be required to fully construct com
ace i
accordance I I
each ntentnandvmeaningmof theespecificati ns and accompanyingtPlansUe
It is the intent that the plans and specifications completely cover
the work to be done. No changes in locations, materials or equip-
however, nev(1~)lpercent,ithen
ment
the change y from
~ the change in Contract amount shall be adjusted upward, or downward,
as described in Section Article 11.3 of the General Conditions.
Items such as valves, pumps, electrical or instrumentation panel
units, or other items of equipment shall be treated in accordance ent for
with Section Article 11.3 of General Conditions. No0rader prepared i
extra work shall be allowed without approved
p ahead of the work.
1.01 1:14 CONCRETE
Where the Owner requests in writing, installation of 1;14 concrete, ,
no'c shown on the Plans, the Contractor will be allowed additional
payment at the unit price bid for the amount actually installed, ,
Owner. for 1;14 payment
homever the concrete beyondntheclimits shall by allowed
i
i? 01150-1
1.02 2,000 POUND CONCRETE
No separate payment above Lump Sum bid will be allowed for concrete
j thrust blocking, or cradle, or miscellaneous 2,000 psi concrete
IJ where shown on the Plans or required to meet specifications.
Additional 2,000 psi concrete, requested by the Owner in writing,
shall be paid for at the unit price bid for additional 2,000 psi
concrete.
` 1.03 3,000 POUND CONCRETE
No separate payment will be made for 3,000 psi concrete and 1
reinforcing steel where shown on the Plans or required by the 1
specifications.
Payment will be made for extra 3,000 psi concrete and reinforcing
not shown on the Plans or required by the specifications which may
be required through no fault of the Contractor's operation, but
which is directed by the Engineer to be installed. The extra
material, requested by the Engineer, shall be paid for at the
respective unit prices bid for the 3,000 psi concrete and
reinforcing steel,
1.04 PIPING CONNECTIONS
The lump sum bid price bid shall include all costs for connecting
to existing piping, including furnishing all material required for
complete connections as shown on the Plans and required in the
and
closurec The lump shall withnd
performing such work.
1.05 CROSSING EXISTING SERVICE LINES AND PIPES
The Contractor will be required to cross some existing pipes and
control wire service lines, some of which may be cut or damaged i I
r inadvertantly. Where such damage occurs, the Con- tractor shall
immediately notify the Owner and cooperate fully so that the repairs, I
or replacement across the ditch line, can be performed promptly to
the satisfaction of the Owner. The Owner will cooperate with the j
Contractor by endeavoring to locate any underground control service
lines that may conflict with con- struction. No additional payment
is to be allowed for any costs due to conflicts caused by the control
or pipe lines crossing the ditch line, or adjacent thereto. Damaged f
lines that require replacement across the ditch line shall be €
replaced with similar type material. The costs for repairs to
underground lines required during construction shall be included in
the lump sum price bid. {
' j
01150-2
1
tit
.yt
I
I
I z'
TECHNICAL 1
SPECIFICATIONS I
y i
13
$S
r
`g
a
i
I I
i
f
i
02201 EARTHWORK
I' 1.00 GENERAL
1,01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall perform all excavation and embankment as may
be necessary for the construction, to line and grade shown on the
Plans, of all structures, roadways, utilities, and incidentals
thereto, In making excavations, the Contractor shall do all
necessary shoring, bracing, sheeting, pumping and bailing. Where
necessary to determine the location of existing pipes, valves, or
other underground structures, the Contractor, after a careful
examination of available records, shall make all explorations and
excavations for such purpose. Temporary support, adequate
protection, and maintenance of all underground and surface pipes,
structures and other obstructions encountered in the progress of
the work shall be furnished by the Contractor at his own expense.
1.02 EXCAVATION
• A. STORAGE
All excavation shall be unclassified and shall include all
materials encountered regardless of their nature or manner in
which they are removed. {
Excavated material to be used for backfill may be deposited
by the Contractor in storage piles at points convenient for i
rehandling the material during the backfilling operations.
The location of storage piles shall be subject to the ap-
proval of the Engineer.
B. EXCESS EARTH
Excess earth from the various excavations, which is not
required for backfill on the plant site, shall be disposed of
by the Contractor at locations to be arranged for by the J
Contractor. I
2,00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. CONCRETE FOR BACKFILL, BLOCKING, CRADLING AND ENCASEMENT
i
All concrete used for these purposes shall be 1500 psi as
specified in Section 03300, CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE.
1
0'201-1
r
r
j B. SELECT MATERIAL
l E A non-expansive soil with sufficient permeability charac-
teristics to allow rapid elimination of seepage water shall
lie used to backfill against the walls of the structures
except as otherwise noted.
C. IMPERVIOUS CLAY
Impervious clay material shall have a liquid limit greater
than 30% and plasticity index greater than 15.
D. TOPSOIL
Organic weathered topsoil shall be cleaned of major root
systems, weeds, brush and debris.
E. GRANULAR 9ACKFILL MATERIAL
1. WATER AND SANITARY SEWER LINES
Granular backfill as required for backfilling under and
adjacent to structures and fur pipe embedment shall be
defined as free flowing sandy material which contains no
clay and is reasonably free of organic material. The
material shall have a plasticity index of 9.0 or less
and shall meet the following requirements:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
2 inch 90 - 1100
00
1 inch
No. 40 60 - 100
~
No. 100 0 _ 5
Granular embedment shall not form mud or muck when wet.
In addition to all other requirements, material fur-
nished for use as embedment for water mains shalt have a
resistivity of not less than 5,000 ohms/cm3. Material 1
supplied for water rmin embedment shall be subject to ,
testing for compliance with this requirement at the time
of delivery to the project. Any material so tested and
found to have a resistivity less than that required by
this specification shall be removed from the Project and t
disposed of at the Contractor's expense.:
3.00 EXECUTION
A. STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION
Excavation shall extend a sufficient distance from walls and
11t footings to allow for forms, installation of services and for
inspection, except where concrete for walls and footings is
.
02201-2
r
T .
,
1
authorized to be deposited directly against excavated sur-
faces. Where the excavation is made below the elevations
indicated on the Plans or required herein through the fault
of the Contractor, the excavation shall be restored to the
I ik proper elevation with lean (1500 psi) concrete at the expense
' of the Contractor.
In order that the Engineer, may Judge theadequacy of hemake
proposed foundation, the Contractor, required, soundings to determine the character of the subgrade mate-
rial. The maximum depth of such soundings will not be
required to exceed five feet below the proposed footing
grade.
The final elevation to which a foundation is to be con-
structed shall be as shown on the Plans or as raised or
lowered by written order from the Engineer when such alte-
rations are Judged proper to satisfactorily complyhwith the
design requirements for the structure. Should It found 4
necessary to change the depth of footings from that shown on
t; the Plans, the necessary alteration in the details of the
structure shall be accomplished in a manner as directed by
the Engineer, who shall have the right to substitute revised
details if required.
? When a structure is to rest on an excavated surface other
than rock, special care shall be taken not to disturb the
bottom of the excavation, and removal of the last material
required to reach foundation final grade shall not be per-
formed until just before the structure is to be placed.
j All rock or other hard foundation material shall be free from
M all loose material, cleaned, and cut to a firm surface I
~I whether level, stepped, or serrated, as required by the
All seams pland acedi.lled with
Plans. t
is
concrete at the time the structure
i
B. TRENCH EXCAVATION
Trench excavation comprises excavation for all water lines,
sludge lines, drain lines, sewer lines, miscellaneous lines,
and appurtenances for the various types
excavations shall be made by open cut to a minimum depth of
four (4") inches below bottom of pipes. No blasting will be
allowed. Sides of trenches shall be kept asriedsheetedtandl '
as possible, and if required, shall be properly
braced. I'venches be'not less
Inchesawiderlthanlthe outside
l nor more thh
of t'ne pipe to be laid therein and shall be excavat-
diameter of
ed true to line so that a clear space on each side of the
pipe is not less than six (6") inches for pipe fifteen (15")
02201-3
y
~1I
1
1r
I ~ •
Inches and smaller, nine (9") inches for pipe over fifteen
(15") inches up to and including thirty (30") inches and
twelve (12") inches for pipe over thirty (30") ir,.hes in
diameter. Bell holes shall be excavated to insure pipe
resting for its entire length on the granular material at the
bottom of the trench. Excavation for manholes and other
accessories shall be sufficient to leave at least twelve
` [I (12") inches in the clear between the outer surfaces and the
excavation. Except at locations where rock excavation forms
the bottoms of the trenches, care shall be taken not to
excavate below the required depths. Where rock excavation is
required, the rock shall be excavated a minimum clearance
depth of four (4") inches, (six (6") inches for water lines)
and backfilled to the required elevation with granular
material thoroughly tamped to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
If unstable foundation is encountered, it shall be removed
and replaced with crushed rock to an elevation of four (41
inches below bottom of pipe, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
3.02 BACKFILL
A. LEAN CONCRETE BACKFILL
Lean concrete backfill is to be used at the locations shown
on the Plans. Lean concrete shall be 1500 psi concrete as
specified in Section 03300, CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE.
B. CONCRETE BLOCKING, CRADLE AND ENCASEMENT
Concrete blocking, cradle and encasement shall be 1500 psi
concrete as specified in Section 03300, CAST IN PLACE
CONCRETE. Blocking shall be placed so as to rest against
firm undisturbed trench walls. The supporting area for each
K block shall be at least as great as that indicated on the
Plans and shall be sufficient to withstand the thrust,
including water hammer, which may develop. Each block shall
rest on a firm undisturbed foundation of trench sides and
bottom. Where pipes are placed below structures they shall j
he completely encased in 1500 psi concrete, which shall
extend up to bottom of structure as shown on the Plans.
C. EMBEDMENT INSTALLATION
All lines, except water lines, shall have a minimum of 4" 4
granular embedment below the pipe. Water lines shall have a -
minimum of six (6"} inches below the bottom of pipe. Gran-
ular embedment shall be as specified in paragraph 2.01E,
GRANULAR BACKFILL MATERIAL, of this specification. The
I ,
02201-4
d
initial layer of embedment placed to receive the pipe shall
be brought up to a grade slightly higher than that required
for the bottom of the pipe and the pipe shall be placed
thereon and brought to grade by tamping, or by removal of the
f slight excess amount of embedment under the pipe. Adjust-
ment to grade line shall be made by scraping away or filling
with embedment material. Wedging or blocking up of pipe will
not be permitted. Each pipe section shall have a uniform
bearing on the embedment for the length of the pipe, except
immediately at the joint.
Granular embedment shall be used for backfill in the pipe
zone and for a minimum depth of six (b") inches over the
pipe, Embedment shall be jetted or tamped to 95% Standard
Proctor Density.
D. BACKFILLING TRENCHES
1, Under Pavement and within Right-of-Way: All lines
located under paved surfaces or within dedicated street
right-of-way, shall be backfilled completely with gran-
ular embedment material to the top of the trench and
compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density.
2. Outside Paved Areas or Street Right-of-Way: After
sufficient time has elapsed for the free moisture to be
gone from the embedment material, the remaining backfill
may be either Tamped in layers not to exceed six (5")
inches in depth. Compaction of the backfill shall be to ,
90% Standard proctor Density, and density tests may be made
as deemed necessary by the Engineer, If such tests
determine that the backfill does not meet this required i
i density, the Contractor will be required to remove all the I
backfill to the point one (1'1 foot above the pipe or as I+
required by the Engineer and rebackfilled with suitable
material until the density required is obtained.
E. BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
After completion of foundation footings and walls and other
construction below the elevations of the final grades, all
forms shall be removed and the excavation cleaned of any
trash, debris or other objectionable matter prior to back-
filling.
Contractor shall secure the approval of the Engineer prior to
placing backfill around any of the structures. Contractor
' shall be responsible for settlement, and shall restore
surfaces should any settlement occur.
.6
' 02201-5
1
I
f
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the plans, select -
material meeting the requirements of paragraph 2.0113, SELECT
MATERIAL, of this specification shall be used to backfill
structures. The material shall be placed in layers approxi-
mately nine (91 inches in depth, properly moistened to
approximately optimum requirements, and each layer compacted
by machine tampers or other suitable equipment to a density
of 95% Standard Proctor Density. Where pipes, walks, or
other construction is to be placed on or in the backfilled
material, the backfilling shall be done in a thorough manner
to preclude after-settlement)
The select material backfill shall be brought up to eighteen ,
(18") inches below finished grade.
E A 1.0-foot layer of impervious clay (from eight (8") inches to
eighteen (18") inches below finished grade) shall be com-
pacted in place for the full width of the original excavation
from the side of the structure.
1
F. TOPSOIL
All areas which have been excavated but do not receive paved
surfaces shall receive eight (8") inches of ±opsoil unless
otherwise shown on the Plans. The Eight P") inches of topsoil
shall be dumped in separate piles and uniformly distributed by I
suitable equipment, TL;S011 shall not be placed when the ground 1
f is frozen or excessively wet. Each layer or layers shall be
compacted to a density approximately that of undisturbed topsoil
l adjacent to the site,
3.03 FINISHING AND CLEAN-UP
All areas which do not receive any type of paved surface, shall be
graded as shown on the Plans or to match adjacent surfaces and raked
smooth and even so that they will drain generally away from the
structures toward the roads and streets or the natural drainage I
" course. All clods of earth shall be broken up and no rocks, trash or
debris shalt remain on or near the surface of the finished grade,
3.04 GRAVEL OR CRUSHED ROCK ROAD
Where indicated on Plans, a gravel or crushed rock base material for
surfaced roadway shall be constructed as detailed on the Plans, and
as hereinafter specified. The base material shall be not less than
eight (8") inches compacted thickness, for additional areas and
replacement of damaged paved areas.
Gravel base material shall be locally obtained pit run material
complying with the following requirements,
i
02201-6
1
Retained on 1/4" Screen 30 - 75%
Retained on 40 Mesh Sieve 60 - 85%
i
t~ The minus 40 mesh sieve soil binder shall comply with the
following:
Liquid Limit not to exceed 35.
Plasticity Index - not less than 5 and not to excaerl 12,
Linear Shrinkage not to exceed 7%,
r r
Crushed stone base material may be used in lieu of k~p ii,el, i.
local gravel complying with these specifications is nom avaiiabic.
The material shall be placed on the prepared crown or subgrade and
wetted and compacted to the specified thickness. The roadway
shall be smoothly and uniformly finished true to indicated grade
and crown. Final rolling shall be done with a flat wheel or
pneumatic roller,
4.00 PAYMENT
` Payment for Earthwork, including Trench Excavation, Granular
Material, Backfill, Clean-up and incidentals complete in place,
shall be included in the lump sum bid for the complete Project,
which shall include all materials, equipment, labor, construction,
and clean-up as shown on the Plans and covered in the Speci-
fications.
Concrete cradle, blocking and encasement as shown on the Plans shall
be included in lump sum bid. Any additional concrete requested by
3 the Owner shall be paid for at the unit prices bid for such
additional items. {
i
END OF SECTION
1
E
f
i
E
i r
Yll
02201-7
;r
3
a
,
l
I
1.
( I
JJl
02513 HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
This item shall govern the design and construction of hot mix
asphaltic concrete (HMAC base course,
leveling-up course and
surface course or any combination of these courses as shown on the
k plans or as specified herein. The pavement shall be constructed
on the previously completed ant] approved subgrade, base material,
in accordance with the plans and these specifications.
1.02 GOVERNING STANDARDS
Hot mix asphaltic concrete (HMAC) pavement shall conform to the
requirements of the Department of Highways and Public Trans-
portation, Standard Specifications for "Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete ,
Pavement", Item 340, Class A, except as specified hereinafter.
Asphalt materials for pavement shall be asphalt cement AC-20
D conforming to Standard Specification for "Asphalts, Oils, and
;Emulsion, item 300.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 AGGREGATE
Aggregate for the mix shall conform to the Department of Highways
and Public Transporation, Standard Specification, Item 340.2,
Gradation for base course or leveling-up course 2-1/2" thick shall
comply with Type B listed as follows:
Percent
Type "B" (Fine Graded Bases or Leveling-Up Course); b Wy eight
F~
Passing 1 sieve.,....... 1.1.04,40 I 100
Passing 7/8" sieve ................................95 to 100
` Passing 7/8" sieve, retained on 3/8" sieve.,...... 20 to 50
Passing 3/8" sieve, retained on No. 4 sieve.,,,,,,10 to 40
Passing No. 4 sieve, retained on No. 10 sieve..,.. 5 to 25
Total rett,i,ied on No. 10 sieve.... 55 ..to 70
Passing No. 10 sieves, retained on No. 40 sieve,.. 0 to 30
Passing No. 40 sieve, retained on No. 80 sieve.... 4 to 20
Passing No, 80 sieve, retained on No. 200 sieve,.. 3 to 20
Passing No, 200 sieve 0 to 6
The asphaltic material shall form from 3.5 to 7 percent of the
mixture by weight unless otherwise approved by Owner,
y Gradation for surface course 1-1/2" thick shall comply with Type 0
listed as follows:
t
j '
02513-1
,
a.
~ Percent
Type "D" (Fine Graded Surface Course): by Weight
Passing 1/2" sieve 100
Passing 3/8" sieve ................................95 to 100
Passing 3/8" sieve, retained on No. 4 sieve 20 to 50
Passing No.5 sieve, retained on No. 10 sieve 10 to 30
Total rretained on No 10. sieve ...................50 to 70
Passing No. 10 sieve, retained on No, 40 sieve.... 0 to 30
" Passing No. 40 sieve, retained on No. 80 sieve,... 4 to 25
Passing No. 80 sieve, retained on No. 200 sieve... 3 to 25
Passing No. 200 sieve 0 to 6
2.02 ASPHALTIC MATERIALS
Asphaltic materials used in the mix shall comply with THD 1972
specifications, Item 300. In general, the grade of asphalt shall
be AC-20. Other grades of asphalt will be considered if weather
conditions or mix design appear to warrant a change.
Prime coat is to be applied to top of MC-30. base material
complying with THD Item 300, grade
prepared subgrade shall be given a uniform application of prime
coat asphaltic material, applied at rate of not less than 0.30
gallon per square yard of surface. All contact surfaces of
gutters, manholes, structures, etc. shall be given a thin uniform
coat of the prime coat material.
Tack coat shall be applied to surface of first asphalt course.
The surface of the asphalt base course shall be thoroughly cleaned +
and given a uniform application of tack coat material meeting the
requirements for cut-back asphalt RC-2 or Mc-2, ASTM 9-597-46, and
D598-46. Tack coat shall be applied using sprayer at rate not
exceeding 0.10 gallon per square yard of surface. Contact i
surfaces of curbs, gutters, etc. shall be painted with the tack i
coat material.
2.03 QUALITY CONTROL
4
This Contractor shall obtain the HMAC from a source that normally ,
furnishes materials that would comply with the Department of
Highways and Public Transportation, Standard Specification Item
340. Particular attention shall be given to density and stability
requirements.
s
The supplier shall furnish historical test data in and certifi-
cation of mix control to the Engineer in written form.
02513-2
l ,
I
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 TRANSPORTATION AND PLACING
Ilauling or transporting of the material to the project site,
placing, Department ofa Highways n and shaping Public shall Transportation, accordance Standardth the
Specification Item 340.6. After final compaction of the pavement,
no vehicular traffic of any kind shall be permitted until the
' pavement has coaled and hardened for at least six hours.
3.02 SURFACE REQUIREMENTS
' The finished surfaccourse, upon completion of final rolling, shall
be smooth and true to grade and cross section. When a 10-foot
E straightedge is laid on the surface parallel with the centerline,
the surface shall not vary more than 1/8 inch from the straight-
edge. When the 10-foot straight-edge is laid on the surface
centerline, the surface shall not vary more than 1/8
transverse to
Inch from the straightedge. Low or defective areas shall be 1
Immediately corrected by cutting out the faulty areas and re-
placing with fresh, hot mixture, and compacting area to conform to
the remainder of the pavement.
Existing asphaltic surface treatment that is removed for construc-
tion and/or damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be
replaced as specified. Where existing surface has been settled to
load conditions Caused by Contractor's operations, tack coat and
b
surface course may be used to bring surface to proper elevation.
END OF SECTION
,
t
i
I
i
j
l
0251- 3
q•
1
02612 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE, PLANT CONSTRUCTION
1.00 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install all concrete cylinder pipe
and fittings, including connections and appurtenances completely as
i` shown on the Plans and specified herein.
Concrete cylinder pipe of the various sizes shown on the Plans shall
be working pressure Class as hereinafter specified or Class 100 psi
minimum, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the
requirements of AWWA Standard C301 entitled, "Prestressed Concrete
Pressure Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type, for Water and Other Liquids" with
r additional requirements or modifications as described herein.
Fittings, specials and connections shall be same class as the
associated pipe unless otherwise indicated,
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop
drawings on the concrete cylinder pipe and fittings to the con-
sulting engineer in accordance with Article 6.21 of the General
Conditions. All of the drawings and data shall be complete and shall
include a complete description of the pipe offered, including cuts,
and all pertinent engineering data required for a complete evaluation
of the submittal. Submittal data shall be in such form and so
presented that the Consulting Engineer may readily review the data,
R Prior to delivery of the pipe to the project site, the manufacturer
shall furnish an affidavit certifying that all pipe, fittings, and
specials, and other products and materials furnished, comply with
the applicable provisions of this Specification.
0 2.00 PRODUCTS ~11
1
Pipe design and fabrication shall comply with the applicable re-
quirements of AWWA C301, with modifications and design criteria as
f described herein. The pipe shall be of lined cylinder type with core
composed of a steel cylinder lined with concrete and subsequently
wire wrapped directly on the steel cylinder and coated with mortar.
Pipe shall be designed for a combination of the designated internal
working pressure and designated depth of cover. Earth loads shall
be determined based on "Ordinary Class C" bedding as defined by
ASCE Manual of Engineering Practice No. 37, Rev. 1969, and with a
M positive projecting pipe condition. Live loads shall be at least
equal to AASHO H-20 loading.
Pipe on suction side of the pump station, between reservoirs and the
pump station, shall be designed for working pressures not less than
100 psi, The pump station discharge pipe shall be designed for
working pressure of 200 psi.
02612-1
wpm
r
Cement for use on inside and outside mortar coating shall be Type I
or 11 Portland Cement. Type II Portland cement shall rontain not
l more than five (5%) percent tricalcium aluminate 3CaO-A12031
E Flanges shall have ANSI Drilling of class equal to or greater than
I the pipe class, unless otherwise specified, and shall match class of
s valves or appurtenances which are attached.
The Contractor shall furnish and install dielectric insulation
gaskets and/or bushings at locations between dissimilar metals.
Where outlets, or taps, are threaded the Contractor shall furnish and
install bushings similar or equal to Mayco Dielectric Bushings as
made by the May Company, Galesburg, Illinois. Where flanges are to
be insulated, the Contractor shall furnish and install "Insulket"
flange gaskets, insulating sleeves and two plastic washers for each
bolt, as supplied by Plastic Equipment and Supply Co., Fort Worth,
t Texas.
Joint wrappers shall be furnished for each rubber gasket ,joint, and
delivered with the pipe. Wrappers shall consist of a burlap strip
of proper width and length for the pipe size, with a metal strip
hemmed into each edge of the wrapper. The burlap wrappers shall be
similar and equal to those manufactured by Mar-Mac Manufacturing
Company.
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. PIPE HANDLING
Pipe, fittings, valves and other accessories shall be
delivered to the site of the project and handled by the Con-
tractor; they shall at all times be handled with care to avoid
damage. Before lowering into the trench, each joint of pipe
l shall be inspected, and any damaged pipe shall be re,jectad.
The pipe shall be kept clean during the laying operation and
free of all sticks, dirt, and trash, and at the close of each
I operating day, the open end of the pipe shall be effectively
J sealed with gasket plug or cap, against the entrance of all
objects and especially water. No pipe shall be laid in water.
Attention is referred to Section 15079 regarding disinfection.
8. PIPE JOINTING f
1. General: Before laying each joint of pipe, the bell and
spigot rings shall be thoroughly cleaned by brushing and
wiping. If any damage to the protective coating on the
metal has occurred, it will be required of the Contractor
to repair such damage before the pipe is laid.
i~
02612.-2
. v
I
e± Sections of pipe shall be tightly fitted together and
care shall be exercised to secure true alignment and
grade. When a joint of pipe is being laid, the gasket
shall be placed on the spigot ring and the spigot end of
the pipe shall then be entered into the bell of the
adjoining pipe and forced into position. The gasket and
the inside surface of the bell shall be lubricated with
an approved lubricant (flax soap) which will facilitate
the telescoping of the joint. The inside joint recess
between ends of the pipe sections shall have a maximum
opening of seven eights (7/8") inch and minimum of one
quarter (1/4") inch. No "blocking up" of pipe or joints
will be permitted, and if the pipe is not uniformly
supported or the joint not made up properly, the joint
shall be removed and the trench shall be properly
H#g~ prepared.
For interior welded joints backfiling shall be completed
before welding. For exterior field welded joints, ade-
quate working room ;hall be provided under and beside the
pipe.
2. Exterior Joint: The exterior joint shall be made by
placing a burlap joint wrapper around the pipe which will
be held in place by means of two metal straps. The
0 burlap wrapper shall be nine (91 inches wide and hemmed
on each side. The burlap cloth shall be of such length
r that it will encircle the pipe, leaving enough opening
between ends to allow the mortar to he poured inside the
wrapper to the joint. The burlap wrappers shall be
similar and equal to those manufactured by Mar-Mac Manu-
facturing Company.
4 Unless otherwise indicated, pipe in trenches shall be
laid to the grade shown or an even grade from point to
point for which elevations are furnished.
Applicable requirements of the specifications under the
Section 02201, govern for the excavation and backfilling
of trenches for laying pipe, fittings and specials.
t The grout used for pouring the joint shall consist of one
k t part portland cement to two parts clean, fine, sharp sand,
A as specified for interior joints, and mixed to the
consistency of thick cream. The joint shall be filled with
this grout from one side in continuous operation until the
grout has flowed entirely around the pipe. During the
r• filling of the joint, the sides of the wrapper shall he
ij patted or manipulated as required to settle the mortar and
expel any entrapped air.
02612-3
t
3. Interior Joints: Upon completion of backfilling of the
pipe trench, the inside joint recess shall be filled with
a stiff cement mortar consisting of one part of cement to
two parts of sand by a qualified workman working inside
the pipe. Cement shall be ASTM C150, Type I or Type III
with the modification that the cement shall contain not
more than five (5%) percent tricalcium aluminate (OA).
Sand shall conform to ASTM Specification C144 (plaster
sand).
Prior to placing of mortar, any dirt, or trash which has
? collected in the joint shall be cleaned out and the
concrete surfaces of the joint space shall be moistened
by spraying or brushing with a wet brush. The stiff
mortar shall be rammed or packed into the joint space and
extreme care shall be taken to insure that no voids
C remain in the joint space.
After the joint has been filled, the surfaces of the
joint shall be leveled with the interior surfaces of the
pipe with a steel trowel so that the surface is smooth,
After grouting, the interior of the pipe shall be swept y
clean.
Interior joints of pipe smaller than 20 inches shall have
' the bottom of the bell buttered with mortar, prior to
inserting the spigot, such that when the spigot is pushed
into position it will extrude surplus mortar from the
joint. The surplus mortar shall be struck off flush with
the inside of the pipe by pulling a filled burlap bag or
an inflated ball through the pipe with a rope.
4. Welded Joints: Joints to be welded shall be telescoped
together with rubber gasket as specified above and
r aligned perfectly with the adjacent section of pipe.
Welding shall be accomplished by laying a filler rod
between the steel bell of one section and the steel
+ spigot of the other, and welding the bell to the outside
of the spigot. No less than three (3) complete passes
shall be used to make the weld which shall be watertight.
When the joint weld is completed the exterior joint shall
be poured with mortar as specified above. Sufficient
time shall elapse to allow the mortar to set-up before
skidding assembled sections into the casing. High early
strength cement may be used for this purpose if desired.
After all sections are in final position, the interior
joint shall be filled as specified above.
i
02612-4
i
i
1
C. PROTECTION OF EXPOSED METAL
All exposed ferrous metal shall be protected by a minimum of
one (I,) inch coating of Portland Cement mortar consisting of
one part cement, as specified for inside ,joints, and two parts
sand. Exposed surfaces such as, but not limited to, flanges,
bolts, caulked ,joints, threaded outlets, closures, etc., shall
' have coating reinforced with galvanized wire mesh.
ti The surface receiving a cement mortar coating shall be
thoroughly cleaned and wetted with water Just prior to placing
the cement mortar coating. After placing, care shall be taken
to prevent cement mortar from drying out too rapidly by
covering with damp earth or burlap. Cement mortar coating
shall not be applied during freezing weather.
D. P!;'NING
ssive patching of lining or coating will not be permitted.
Hc':.hing of lining or coating will be allowed where area to be )
repaired does not exceed 100 square inches and has no di-
mensions greater than 12 inches. In general, there shall not
be more than one patch on either the lining or the coating of
any one Joint of pipe.
_ ^t
Wherever necessary to patch the pipe, patch shall be made with
a mortar of one part Portland Cement and two parts clean sharp
sand; all measurements to be by weight. Pipe thus patched
shalt not be installed until the patch has been properly and
adequately cured and approved for laying by the Engineer.
E. PIPE BEDDING
Trench bottom shall be excavated below the pipe for installing
pipe bedding or cradle, as specified in Section 02201. Pipe
shall be laid on the bedding such that it is supported uni-
formly from end to end,
F. BACKFILLING
As soon as the pipe Joint has been complete, the joint mortar
has set-up and all concrete blocking completed, the back-
filling in the "pipe zone" to a point at least 12 inches above f
the pipe shall be done as specified under Section 02201.
3.02 HYDROSTATIC TEST
1
Hydrostatic tests for tightness of the pipe shall be made as des-
cribed in Section 02618. The Contractor may test the pipe in
t sections when all the pipe in the section is at least 28 days old.
02612-5
r
r
h
I
3.03 DISINFECTION
All pipe shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 16074.
4 ~
END OF SECTION E
F
I
I
E
f
i
E i
r ~
02612-6
i
• "11"
02618 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
OF PIPING
1.00 GENERAL
All newly installed water pipe shall be hydrostatically tested for
leakage after installation, as feasible. The pipe that can be
isolated with valves shall be subjected to test pressures as herein
rt specified. Water lines to handle potable water shall be filled J
with potable water furnished by the Owner at point, or points, 1
selected by the Owner, at times acceptable to the Owner. The
q, Contractor shall be fully responsible for providing any piping,
pumps, gages, weter, valves, plugs, etc, that may be needed for
filling the new pipe and pressurizing for the tests.
t '
Pipe on suction side of the pump station, between reservoirs and
the pump station, shall be tested at 75 psi internal pressure,
Pipe on discharge side of pumps shall be tested at pressure of 200
psi internal pressure,
2.00 EXECUTION
After the pipe or section to be tested has been installed complete
" with valves, thrust blocking, air valves, backfilled etc, the Con-
tractor shall proceed with filling with water and hydrostatic 111
testing for leakage. The Contractor shall verify that all valves
and taps are closed and any air valves are ready for operation
before filling operation is started. The pipe shall be slowly
filled with water so as to avoid damage. During the filling and
pressurizing period, plugs, blowoffs, taps, air valves, etc. shall
be checked and examined for appearance of leaks. The Contractor i
shall completely fill the pipe with water with all air expelled
through any valves or taps provided for that purpose and then the I
pipe shall remain under sufficient pressure to keep it filled for
not less than 24 hours before performing the pressure test. After
the pipe is considered ready for the hydrostatic pressure test
water shall be forced slowly into the pipeline so as to obtain the
pressure designated for the test and when the pipe appears to be
substantially water-tight the actual pressure testing may begin.
The duration of the pressure test shall be four (4) hours, during
which period water shall be injected into the pipe by pumping and
carefully measured so that calculations can determine the actual l
amount of leakage.
i
3,00 PERMISSIBLE LEAKAGE
The maximum permissible leakage during the last two (2) hours of
the hydrostatic test shall be within the limits acceptable to the
Engineer.
Leakage is defined as the net quantity of water to be supplied into
the newly laid pipe, or section being tested, necessary to maintain
11 the specified test pressure during the test period.
i~
02618-1
tl
,
i
Should the section of pipe being tested disclose leakage greater
than the allowable acceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor
shall, at his own expense, locate and repair the defective joints,
or pipe, until the leakage is within the accepted allowance.
f` s
The water for hydrostatic testing shall remain in the pipeline
until the sterilization is to start, whereby the water is to be
drained out of the pipe at convenient points.
Sterilization shall be in accordance with Section 15079, i
DISINFECTION.
END OF SECTION i
1
+1 ~I
f
l ~
r;
i
1
0'1618-2
i
f
~•T
1
/ T
a 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
The work covered by this item consists of furnishing all material
and labor required for forming, tieing, bracing and supporting the
wet concrete, the reinforcing steel and all embedded items until
the concrete has developed sufficient strength to permit form
removal.
1 '8
1.02 GOVERNING STANDARDS
All forming materials, accessories and their use shall conform to
J the requirements of;
k' ACI-347 Concrete Formwork
American Concrei•,) Institute,
P. 0. Box 19160, Redford Station
Detroit, Michigan 48219
AISC Manual of Steel Construction
American Institute of Steel Construction
' 400 North Michigan Avenue
Chicago, Illinois 60611 E
AISI Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual
r American Iron and Steel Institute
New York, New York
2.00 PRODUCTS
M 2.01 MATEPIALS t
A. LUMBER
All lumber for forms and falsework shall be properly seasoned
and of good quality. It shall be free from loose or unsound
knots, knot holes, twists, shakes, decay, splits, and other
imperfections which would affects its strength or impair the
finished surface of the concrete. The lumber used for facing
or sheathing shall be surfaced on at least one side and two +
edges, and shall be sized to uniform thickness. Lumber of
I nominal one-inch thickness or plywood of 3/4--inch thickness +
will be permitted for general use on structure if backed by a
? sufficient number of studs and wales.
z
i B. FORM LINING {
Timber forms for exposed concrete surfaces which are to be
given a rubbed finish, shall be facelined with an approved
type of form lining material. If plywood is used for form
03100-1
c:
'i .
J 1
V
.
l1
lining, it shall be made with water-proof adhesive, shall
have a minimum thickness of one-fourth inch, and preferably
shall be oiled at the mill and then re-oiled or lacquered on
the job before using. If fiber board
Is used it shall be 1
tempered Masonite Concrete Form Presdwood, having a minimum
J1 thickness of three-sixteenths inch and shall be thoroughly
wet with water at least 12 hours before using. The water
shall be applied to the screen side of the board and the 1
boards shall be stacked screen side to screen side. The
smooth hard face shall be used as the contact surface of the
form.
I
If desired by the Contractor, such surfaces may be formed
with three-fourths inch thick plywood made with water-proof
adhesive backed with adequate studs and wales, keeping in
mind that the greatest strength of the outer plies should be '
at right angles to the studding, and in this case, form
lining will not be required.
Edges and faces of adjacent panels shall be carefully aligned
and the Joints between panels shall be filled with patching
plaster or cold water putty to prevent leakage, and sanded
lightly with No. U sandpaper to make the points smooth.
Forms which are being reused shall have all unused form tie
holes filled and smoothed as described above so as to be
perfectly smooth.
C. SPECIAL FORM LUMBER
1. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall
be made of redwood, cypress, or pine materials of such
grade that will not. split when nailed and which can be
maintained to a true line without warping. The molding
shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. Where
shown on the plans, forms shall be filleted at sharp
corners, both inside and outside, and at edges, with
triangular chamfer strips. The strips shall be of sizes
indicated. All chamfer strips shall be thoroughly oiled
before installation on forms.
2. Forms for railings and ornamental work shall be con-
structed to standards equivalent to first class mill
work. All moldings, panel work, and bevel strips shall
be straight and true with neatly mitered Joints and of
such design that the finished work shall be true, sharp,
and clean-cut.
D, METAL FORMS
i
The foregoing specifications for "Forms" as regards design,
mortar-tightness, filleted corners, beveled projections,
k bracing, alignment, removal, re-use, oiling, and wetting
1
i
03100-2
f
shall apply equally to metal forms. The metal used for forms
shall be o, such thickness that the forms will remain true to
shape. All bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall
be countersunk, Clamps, pins, or other connecting devices
shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to
allow removal without injury to the concrete, Metal forms
which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly
f shall not be used. Special care shall be exercised to keep
~r metal free from rust, grease, or other foreign material such
as will tend to discolor the concrete.
E. PAN/SLIP FORMS
Pan/Slip Forms, when required, shall meet all of the appli- I
cable portions of this specification.
F. FORM TIES
Metal form ties of a type approved by the Engineer shall be
used to hold forms in place. Such ties shall have provision
r to permit ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter speci-
fied. The use of wire form ties will not be permitted except 1
by approva o e n9 neer, All metal appliances used
inside of the forms to hold them in correct alignment shall
surface removed of the a codepth ncrete of
anat least d shall be one-half aconstructed that
metal may be removed without undue injury to `.he surface from
chipping or spalling. Such devices, when ren !ed, shall
leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface not larger
than seven-eighths inch in diameter. Burning off of rods,
bolts, or ties will not be permitted. Metal ties shall be
held in place by devices attached to wales. Each device
shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie.
Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms
shall be wired to top of form and shall be entirely removed
as the concrete is being placed. Where wire ties are l
permitted, all wires shall be cut back at least one-half inch
from the face of the concrete with a sharp chisel or nippers.
The use of metal form ties of a type that are encased in r
paper or other material to allow the removal of complete tie,
leaving a hole through the concrete structure, will not be
permitted in the construction of basement or water bearing
walls,
G. FORM OIL 1
The oil used for this purpose shall be a light clear oil
which will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the
a concrete surface or delay or impair curing operations.
M,
1 03100-3
a
g
,
i
2.02 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS
A. DESIGN LOADS
Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid
weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot, The rate of placing the
concrete, temperature of the concrete, and whether the
concrete is vibrated or not, shall be taken into conside-
ration in determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. An
additional live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be
allowed on horizontal surfaces. The maximum unit stresses
shall not exceed 125 percent of the allowable stresses used
for the design of structures.
B. ALIGNMENT CONTROL
f:
True alignment of walls and other vertical surfaces having
straight lines or rectangular shapes shall be controlled by
the following procedure; Forming shall be arranged with
provisions for adjusting the horizontal alignment of a form
after the form has been filled with concrete to grade, using
wedges, turnbuckles, or other approved adjustment methods.
The general procedure will be to establish a transit line or
F other approved reference such that adjustments can be made to
f` t an established line while the concrete in the top of tha form
is still plastic. Adjusting facilities shall be at intervals
which will permit adjustments to a straight line. The
Contractor shall be responsible for this alignment check, and
shall furnish his own personnel for such checking and adjust-
ment. Tolerance for the adjustment shall be subject to the
Engineer's approval. No forms will be approved for pouring f
until adequate adjusting facilities are in place. {
C. F'ALSEWORK
All falsework shall be designed and constructed so that no
excessive settlement or deformation will occur, and so that
the necessary rigidity will be provided.
All timber used in falsework centering shall be sound, in
good condition, and free from defects which will impair its
strength. Steel members shall be of adequate strength and of
such shape as to be suitable for the purpose intended. 1
Timber piling may be of any species of wood which will
withstand driving satisfactorily and which will adequately
support the superimposed load.
Where sills or timber grillages are used to support falsework
columns, such sills and grillages, unless founded on solid
rock, shale or other hard materials shall be placed in
r excavated pits and backfilled to prevent the softening of the
supporting material by drip from the forms or by rains that
i
03100-4
.
i
may occur during the construction process. Sills or grill-
ages shall be of ample size to support the superimposed load
without settlement. Falsework which cannot be founded on a
satisfactory spread footing shall be supported on piling
which shall be driven to a bearing capacity sufficient to
support the superimposed load without settlement.
~E
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. FORM WORK
Forms shall be built mortar-tight and of material sufficient
in strength to prevent bulging between supports. They shall
be set and maintained to the lines designated until the
concrete is sufficiently hardened to permit form removal.
During the elapsed time between the building of the forms and
the placing of the concrete, the forms shall be maintained in
P a manner to eliminate warping and shrinking. If, at an
' stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagg-
ing, that portion of the concrete causing such condition
shall be immediately removed, if necessary, and the forms
shall be reset and securely braced against further movement.
Forms or form lumber to be reused shall be maintained clean d
and in good condition as to accuracy, shape, strength,
rigidity, tightness, and smoothness of surface. All forms i
shall be so constructed as to permit removal without damage 11
to the concrete. Particular and special care must be
exercised in framing forms for copings, offsets, railing, and
1
all ornamental work, so that there will be no damage to, or
marring of, the concrete when the forms are removed. When-
ever practicable, forms shall be erected complete before the
reinforcement is placed. For narrow walls and other loca-
w tions where access to the bottom of the forms is not other-
wise readily attainable, adequate cleanout openings shall be
provided,
M B. EMBEDDED ITEMS
Before placing concrete, care shall be taken to determine
that all embedded items are firmly and securely fastened in
place as indicated in the drawings or required by the Engi-
neer. All embedded items shall be thoroughly clean and free
of oil and other foreign material. Anchor bolts shall be set
to exact locations by the use of suitable anchor bolt tem-
plates, or as otherwise shown on the plans,
r C. PLACING REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcement in concrete structures shall be carefully and
accurately placed and rigidly supported as provided in the
Item "Concrete Reinforcement".
03100-5
? D. WETTING AND OILING FORMS
a
,
The facing of all forms shall be treated with a suitable form
oil before concrete is placed. In hot weather, both sides of ? i
the face forms may be required to be treated with oil to
prevent warping and to secure tight joints. The oil shall be
applied before the reinforcement is placed. In general, all
surfaces of forms which will come in contact with the con-
crete shall be wetted immediately before the concrete is
placed. ,
,
E. CLEANING FORMS
At the time of placing concrete, the forms shall be clean and
entirely free from all chips, dirt, sawdust, and other ex-
traneous matter. Forms for slab, beam and girder construc-
tion shall not have tie wire cuttings, nails, matches or any
other matter whatsoever which would mar the appearance of the r
finished construction. All forms shall be cleaned to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, and kept free of foreign matter
of all kinds during concrete placing.
F. ENGINEERS APPROVAL
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer upon completion of
varic,s portions of the work required for placing concrete so
that inspection may be made as early as is practicable.
When all items have been found to be in order, the Engineer
will authorize the contractor to proceed with the placement.
,1 J
3.02 REMOVAL OF FORMS
Forms shall be removed in such a manner that the underlying
concrete surface is not marred or damaged in any way. Forms may
r be removed in not 'less than the number of curing days set forth in
the following table,
Forms and falsework under slabs, beams and girders
where deflections due to dead load moment may exist
7 days
For..,s for walls, columns, sides of piers, massive
structural components and other memhers not re-
sisting a bending moment during curing 1 day
Forms for concrete of minor structural load
carrying importance 1 day
` ENO OF SECTION
03100-6
mop
V
,
1
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
The work covered by this item consists of furnishing all the
reinforcing materials and labor required for cutting, bending,
tieing, splicing, placing and supporting the reinforcement in the
material grades, sizes, quantities and locations as shown on the 1
plans. 1
A 1.02 GOVERNING STANDARDS
All reinforcing materials and the cutting, bending, tieing,
splicing, placing and supporting of same shall be in compliance
with the following listed standards unless otherwise noted in the
Contract Documents. The publications listed below are from:
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race St.,
Philadelphia, Pa. 19103.
ACI - American Concrete Institute, P.O. Box 19150, Redford
i Station, Detroit, Michigan 48219.
CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 180 N. LaSalle
St., Chicago, 111, 60601.
AWS - American Welding Society, Inc., 550 N.W. LeJeune, P. 0. Box 1
351040, Miami, Fla, 33135.
I
Other specifications and proprietary items are as noted. 1
The Contractor shall maintain one (1) copy of each of the ap-
plicable standards at the construction field uffice or Job site.
ASTM-A82 Standard Specification for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM-A185 Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM-A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-
Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ACI-315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structures , Ti i
ACI-318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete !
AWS-D1.4 Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel I
CRSI Manual of Standard Practice 1
l
03200-1
I
. 1
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING -
A. STORAGE
Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the
ground upon platform skids, or other supports and shall be
protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and
surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions
producing rust. When placed in the work, it shall be free
from dirt, scale, dust, paint, oil and other foreign mate-
rial. All steel reinforcement shall be tagged and stored for
ease of correlation with shop drawings.
l
2.00 PRODUCTS +
2.01 MATERIALS {
A. BARS
i
All bar reinforcement shall conform to Deformed Billet-Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, ASTM Designation A-615.
Unless otherwise specified, bars shall be Grade 60 with a
minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi,
B. WIRE FABRIC
Wire for fabric reinforcement shall be Cold-Drawn steel wire
conforming to the requirements for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for
Concrete Reinforcement, ASTM Designation A-82, and Fabricated
in accordance with ASTM Designation A-185.
C. SUPPORTS
Bar supports r chairs shall be furnished in accordance with
the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Standard s
Practice. Bar supports which will be used in slabs or beams
0 which will have a rubbed finish on the bottom side shall have
uniform high density polyethylene tips on the legs. The tips
shall be aoproximately 1/4-inch thick between the ends of the
chair legs and the form, and shall be as manufactured by
I Plastichair or equal.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. BENDING
The reinforcement shall be bent cold by machine to shapes
I indicated on the Plans. Bends shall be true to shapes {
I indicated, and irregularities in bending shall be cause for
rejection. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, all Hook and
Bend Details and Tolerances shall conform to the requirements
of AGI.315 and ACI-318.
f
03200-2
A
B. SHOP DK,iNGS
The Contractor or the Supplier shall prepare and suhmit
i detailed shop drawing's for each detail of the general plans
requiring the use of reinforcing steel. Each sheet shall
have a title, The shop drawings shall be submitted in
` duplicate for the review of the Consulting Engineer. After
review and making any necessary corrections, six (6) copies
of the shop drawings shall be submitted for final approval.
The approved shop drawings will be distributed as follows:
2 - Consulting Engineer I - Supplier
1 - Contractor 2 - Owners
The Shop Drawings shall conform to the recommendations of
ACI-315.
( 3.00 EXECUTION 1
3.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. APPROVAL BY THE. ENGINEER
No concrete shall be deposited until the Engineer has in-
spected and approved the placing of the reinforcing steel and
given permission to place concrete. Exposed reinforcing
steel intended for bonding with future extensions shall be
effectively protected from corrosion.
B. SPLICES
1. Lap Splices: No splicing of bars, except when shown on
the Plans, will be permitted without the written
approval of the Engineer. Approval of bar bending I
schedules or of placing drawings will constitute written
approval. Lap splices which are permitted shall have a
lap in accordance with the table of Tension Bar-Laps and
Embedment lengths as shown on the Plans. The bars shall
be rigidly clamped or wired at all splices in a manner
approved by the Engineer. Sheets of wire fabric shall
overlap each other sufficiently to maintain a uniform
strength and shall be securely fastened.
2. Welded Splices: Welding of reinforcing steel is not
permitted without the written approval of the Engineer.
When permitted, the welding must be done in compliance
with the requirements of AWS-D12.1. i
3, Mechanical Splices: Mechanical splices where shown on
the plans or permitted by the Engineer shall be made {
using "Cadweld" (or equal) reinforcing bar connectors,
installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
g
03200-3 J
.1 1
• r.
-~i
~lw . _
instructions and recommendations. The mechanical device
shall develop the full tensile strength of the bar.
C. TOLERANCES
All reinforcement shall be placed as shown on the Plans with
the following maximum tolerances:
Cover + 1/8"
Spacings + 3/16" in 12"
PLACING
1. General: Steel reinforcement shall be placed in the
exact position as shown on the Plans and held securely
in place during the placing of the concrete. The
minimum clear distance between bars shall be two times
the bar diameter. Vertical stirrups shall always pass
around the main tension members and be securely attached
thereto. All reinforcing shall be wired together at a
sufficient number of intersections to produce a sound or
sturdy mat or cage of reinforcement that will maintain
the reinforcement in the intended positions when the
concrete is poured, Every 4th intersection is con-
sidered maximum unless otherwise authorized by the f
Engineer.
2. Approval: No concrete shall be deposited until the
Engineer has inspected and approved the placing of the
reinforcing steel and given permission to place con-
crete. Exposed reinforcing steel intended for bonding
with future extensions shall be effectively protected
from corrosion, i
3. Tieing and Supporting: The reinforcing steel in all
concrete slabs shall be held firmly in place, as shown
on the drawings, by wire supports or "chairs". Wire
sizing and spacing of the chairs shall be sufficient to
properly support the steel, and shall be in accordance
with CRSI Manual, "Recommended Practice for Placing
Bars."
4. Spacers: The reinforcing steel in all concrete ,.,ails
shall be spaced its proper distance from the face of the
forms, as shown on the drawings, by means of approved
galvanized metal spacers or approved precast mortar or
` concrete blocks. Before any concrete is placed, all
mortar blocks to be used for holding steel in position
adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in individual 1
molds, at which time the blocks shall be immersed in {
water for the remainaur of at least a four-day curing
period.
t 03200-4
f ,
I
i
The blocks shall preferably be cast with the sides
beveled and in such manner that the size of the block
increases away from the surface to be placed against the
forms, Blocks in the form of a frustum of a cone or
A pyramid are preferred. Suitable tie wires shall be
provided in each block for anchoring the block to the
steel, and to avoid displacement when placing the
concrete. Unless specifically authorized by the
Engineer, the size of the surface to be placed adjacent
to the forms shall not exceed two and one-half (2-1/2")
inches square or the equivalent thereof when circular or ,
rectangular areas are provided. Blocks shall be
accurately cast to the thickness required, and the
surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a
true plane free of surface imperfections.
END OF SECTION
1
I I
E
a
1
03200-5
1
11
'i
03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCREFE
to 1.00 GENEhAL
1,01 SCOPE /
The work covered by this item consists of furnishing all material,
mixing and transporting equipment, and performing all labor for the
proportioning, mixing, transporting, placing, consolidating, 1
yb finishing and curing of concrete in the structure. Concrete shall #
be composed of portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate,
air entraining admixture and water as hereinafter specified.
1,02 GOVERNING STANDARDS
All mixing, sampling, placing, curing and testing of concrete and
the materials used therein shall be in compliance with the la'est 1
revision of the following listed standards unless otherwise noted
in the Contract Documents. The publications listed below are from;
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race St.,
Philadelphia, Pa. 19103, 9
ACI - American Concrete Institute, P. 0. Box 19150, Redford
Station, Detroit, Michigan 48219.
CRD - OCE, COE, Dept, of the Army, HQDA Washington, D.C. 20314.
Other specifications and proprietary items are as noted.
Upon written request, the Contractor shall obtain and maintain one
(1) copy of any of the following applicable standards at the
construction field office.
i
ASTM-C31 Making & Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the field
ASTM-C33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM-C39 Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete ,
Specimens
ASTM-C42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams
of Concrete
ASTM-C94 Specification for Ready Mix Concrete
ASTM-C109 Test for Compressive Strengths of Hydraulic Cement
Mortar
ASTM-C125 Concrete and Concrete Aggregates, Definitions of
Terms
ASTM-C143 Slump Test
ASTM-C150 Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM-CI56 Test for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials 1
ASTM-C171 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM-C172 Sampling Fresh Concrete j
ASTM-0173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method
t l
03300-1
i
w
A
ASTM-C191 Test for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat
E Needle
ASTM-C192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory
ASTM-C231 Test for Air Content by Pressure Method
ASTM-0260 Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for
Concrete
ASTM-C293 Test for Flexural Strength of Concrete
ASTM-C309 Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for Curing Concrete
P
ASTM-C494 Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 1
ASTM-C595 Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
ASTM-C618 Specification for Fly Ash and Pozzolans for Use with
Portland Cement
ASTM-C827 Test for Early Volume Changes of Cementitious
Materials
ASTM-C845 Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement
ASTM-D412 Tests for Rubber Properties
ASTM-0570 Test for Water Absorption of Plastics
ASTM-D746 Test for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics
ASTM-01190 Hot Poured Joint Sealer
ASTM-01752 Specification for Preformed Cork Expansion Joint
Fillers
ASTM-02240 Test for Rubber Property Durometer r
ASTM-E96 Test for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials i
FS-TT-S- I
00230E Type II C1, B Expansion Joint Sealant
CRD-C588-76 Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout
ACI 211.1 Proportions for Normal Weight Concrete
ACI 214 Compression Test Results
ACI 301 Structural Concrete
ACI 304 Measuring, Mixing, Transporting a Placing Concrete
ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306 Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 309 Curing Concrete I
ACI 309 Consolidation of Concrete I
E
1,03 ORODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING i
A$ TORAGE OF CEMENT
I Cement may be delivered in bulk or in bags which are marked
plainly with the brand and name of manufactur, Immediately
y
upon receipt cement shall be stored in a dry, weathertight and
properly ventilated structure, which excludes moisture. All
t storage facilities shall be subject to approval and shall be
IF such as to permit easy access for inspection and identifi-
cation. Sufficient cement shall be in storage to complete
any lift of concrete started, in order that cement may not
become unduly aged after delivery, records of delivery dates
shall be maintained and the Contractor shall use any cement
which has been stored at the site for 60 days or more before
03300-2
i
using cement of lesser age. No cement will be used which is
lumped or caked or has been stored more than 90 days, or when
the cement temperature exceeds 170°F.
i
B. STORAGE OF AGGREGATES
t s§
The handling and storage of concrete aggregate shall be such
as to prevent the admixture of foreign materials. If the
aggregates are stored on the ground, the sites for the stock- '
piles shall be grubbed, cleared of all weeds and grass, and
!y leveled. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed
or used without recleaning.
. Different sizes of aggregates shall be stored in such a manner
as to prevent intermixing. Materials in all stockpiles shall
be handled in such a manner that segregation of materials
within the pile will be avoided, and shall be built up in
layers not over three (3) feet in depth. Should segregation
occur, the aggregates shall be remixed to conform with the
grading requirements. Unless otherwise authorized by the
Engineer, all fine aggregates shall be stockpiled at least 24
hours before mixing to reduce the free moisture content.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2,01 MATERIALS
A. CEMENT
Type I Portland Cement, conforming to the requirements of
ASTM-C150, shall be used for all concrete in the structures
a for this project.
B. FLY ASH/POZZOLANS
Under normal conditions, fly ash/pozzolan shall not be used in
the concrete mix. When fly ash/pozzolan or Type 1P blended
hydraulic cement is to be used the material shall meet the
requirements of ASTM-C618/C595 and the supplier's certificate
i as to the analysis and composition shall be furnished,
Before the use of fly ash/pozzolans is permitted, the Con-
tractor shall submit for the Engineer's a roval, a mix +
design and the results of a testing program, both done by an i
independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Owner showing
that the concrete meets the design requirements specified.
i
C. ADMIXTURES
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, concrete of 3000
psi or stronger shall contain air-entraining admixtures and
when job conditions require water reducing and sett-ontrolling
admixtures may be used with written approval of the Engineer.
1ti 03300-3
1
1
f
1. Air Entraining Admixture: This shall comply with ASTM
Designation C-260. The total average air content shall
be in accordance with recommendations of ACT 211.1; 4,5%
+ 1.0% for 1-1/2" maximum size aggregate.
2. Water Reducing Admixtures: This shall comply with ASTM
Designation C-494, and be accurately measured and added '
to the mix in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
0. WATER
1 1 1.,
Water for concrete shall be clean and free from injurious
amounts of oil, acid alkali, salt, organic matter, or other
deleterious substances. Water suitable for drinking or for
ordinary household use will be accepted for use without being
` tested.
Water from doubtful sources shall not be used until tested
and approved in writing by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall not take water for use in concrete from shallow, muddy,
or marshy sources.
When comparative tests are made with water of known satin- q
factory quality in accordance with ASTM Method C-87 any
indication of unsoundness, marked change in the time of set,
or reduction of more than five percent in mortar strength
' shall be sufficient cause for rejection of water under test.
E. FINE AGGREGATE
Fine aggregate shall consist of natural washed and screened
sand complying with the requirements and tests of Specif-
ications for Concrete Aggregates, ASTM Designation C33. The
gradation as included in ASTM-C33 air entrained concrete is i
as follows:
r SIEVE SITE PERCENT RETAINED PERCENT PASSING
i 3/811 0 100 I
f #4 0 - 5 95 - 100
#8 0 - 20 80 - 100
#16 15 - 50 50 - 85
#30 40 - 75 25 - 60
#50 70 - 90 10 - 30
#100 90 - 98 2 - 10
Fine aggregate shalt have not more than 45 percent retained
between any two consecutive sieves and its fineness modulus,
as defined in ASTM-C125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more ?
than 3.1.
03300-4
i
1
V
f
1
F. COARSE AGGREGATE
Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone or gravel %
conforming to the requirements and test of Specifications for
Concrete Aggregates, ASTM Designation C33, Gradation Size
DeNumber 467. signation C33 Gradation
ASTM Size
Number 357 e as Number 67
is as
included in and
size
follows:
NO. 357
SIEVE SIZE
SQUARE .OPENING OPENING PERCENT RETAINED PERCENT PASSING
2-1 /2 0 100
2" 0 5 95 - 100
30 - 65 35 - 70
1/2" 70 - 90 10 - 30
No, 4 95 - 100 0 - 5
Gradation Size Number 67 as included in ASTM C33 is as
follows:
N0._ 67
SIEVE SIZE
SQUARE OPENING PERCENT RETAINED AINEU PERCENT PASSING
l.. ~ a tao
3/4" 0 - 10 90 - 100
3/8" 45 - 80 20 - 55 ,
No. 4 90 - 100 0 - 10
No. 8 95 - 100 0 - 5
Gradation Size No. 467 as included in ASTM C33 is as follows: }
NO. 467
`r. STEVE SIZE
SQUARE OPENING PERCENT RETAINED PERCENT PASSING
2„ 0 100
1-1/2" 0 - 5 95 - 100
3/4" 30 - 65 35 - 70
3/8" 70 - 90 10 - 30 ,
No. 4 95 - 100 0 - 5
03300-5
t~ ,
I
J
j
r
G, MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
1, Joint Materials;
a, Premolded expansion Joint material shall conform to
ASTM D-1752 for resilient, non-bituminous, Type 11,
in the thickness specified,
b. Joint sealer shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM D1190,
c. Expansion joint sealant shall be a one component
gun grade polysulfide base elastomeric sealing
compound. This material shall conform to the
requirements of FS-TT-S-00230E Type I1 Class B as
manufactured by A. C. Horn Co., or Thiokol Chemical
Co,, or approved equal. Backing material for
sealant shall be 1-inch polyethylene rod prepared
as shown on plans. Where surface is to receive a
swept-in grout topping, a 3-inch wide 1 mil
i y
polyethylene strip shall be placed above the joint
sealant which strip shall be held in place with
1-inch wide polyethylene tape spaced at 12-inch
centers (maximum),
2. Waterstops shall be extruded PVC in the sizes and types
specified meeting the requirements of,
ASTM D412 ASTM 02240
ASTM D570 ASTM D746
NOTE; Stops shall be Dura,)oint No. 5 (6" length) or an
approved equal.
3. Sheet materials for curing concrete when required shall
conform to ASTM 0171.
a, Waterproof paper
b. Polyethylene film
c. White burlap - polyethylene film
4. Membrane curing compound when allowed shall conform to
ASTM C309.
i.
5, Epoxy Resins for coating, grouting, seal coating, f
wearing surfaces, etc. The epoxy selected shall carry c
the manufacturer's recommendation for the planned `
application. For applications involving moist or wet
surfaces, the epoxy selected shall be compatible with
the moisture, The manufacturer's recommendation shall
be followed in every detail.
03390-6
1,
6. Epoxy Resins for bonding fresh concrete to hardened
concrete shall be Sikadur HC-MOD (Sikastix 370) or an
approved equivalent. The epoxy shall carry the manu-
facturer's recommendation for the planned application
and the recommendation shall be followed in every
detail.
SN
7. Shrinkage Compensating Grout:
a. General: This section covers grouting of pump,
motor, and equipmen'. oaseplates or bedplates;
column basepla'. ther miscellaneous baseplates,
piping block outs and other uses of grout as
indicated on the drawings. Epoxy grouts shall be
used in the presence of chemicals that will abrade
cementitious grouts. Unless otherwise specified,
all grouting shall be done with non-shrinking
grout,
3
b. Materials:
(1) For all non-shrinking grout, the manufacturer
shall furnish from an approved independent
laboratory, recent t_st results verifying that
the grout shows: .1
rf No shrinkage from the time of placement, or
expansion after set, under ASTM-C827 and
CRD-C588-76 (Corps of Engineers).
A twenty-four (24) hour c(,mpressive strength
in a trowelable mix of not less than three
thousand pounds per square inch (3,000 psi)
0 under ASTM-C109.
An initial set time of not less than fortyfive
(45) minutes under ASTM-C191.
(2) All grout shall be non-organic, non-metallic,
non-staining and resist attack by oil and
' water.
(3) cEpoxy omponents grouts from shall the bfactory sand mixed oon the
Job site,
` (4) The Contractor shall obtain field technical
f assistance from the grout manufacturer, as
required, to insure proper installation of the
f grout in compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and procedures.
03300-7
1
1 C. Installation:
(1) For cementitious grouts, the foundation should
be saturated for twenty-four (24) hours before
installation and cleared of excess water im-
mediately before installation. All baseplates
or bedplates should be free of oil, grease,
laitance and other foreign substances.
(2) Fur epoxy grouts, the foundation and baseplate
or bedplate should be clean, dry, and sound
F prior to installation.
(3) Mixing: All mixing shall take place according
to manufacturer's recommended procedures.
(4) Placement: Grout shall be placed in strict
accordance with the directions of the manu-
facturer so that all spaces and cavities below
the top of the baseplates and bedplates are
completely filled without voids. Forms shalt
be provided where structural components of the
baseplates or bedplates will not confine the
1 grout. Where necessary, and acceptable under
manufacturer's procedures, a round head pencil
vibrator, three quarters of an inch (3/4')
maximum diameter, is allowable,
(5) Edge Finishing: In all locations where the
edge of the grout will be exposed to view, the
nonshrink grout, after it has reached its
initial set, shall be finished smooth. Except
where indicated to be finished on e, slope, the
edges of the grout shall be cut off flush at
the baseplate, bedplate, member, or piece of
fW equipment.
(6) Curing: For cementitious grouts, wet curing
should take place for at least three (3) days,
by wet rags, wet burlap or polyethylene
sheets. All cloths shall be kept constantly
wet for the curing cycle.
k For epoxy grouts, dry curing is acceptable.
2.02 CONCRETE PROPORTIONS
A. GENERAL.
y ACI 211.1 shall be the basis for selecting the proportions
f for concrete made with aggregates of normal and high density
03300-8
j
i
i
CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS
WATER WORKS IMPROVEMENTS
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
r
CONSTRUCTION OF
HIGH SERVICE
PUMP STATION EXTENSION
1
PROJECT NO. 85-WP-6
t q..si.gjt I
AUGUST 1964
, 1 7425
FREE-89 AND NICHOLS1 INC.
! CONSULTING ENGINEERS
1
~M
I
. I
CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS
WATER WORKS IMPROVEMENTS 41
INDEX TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
PAGE /
INVITATION FOR BIDS iB-1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
MINIMUM WAGL SCALE
PROPOSAL
DATA SHEET I
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
PERFORMANCE BOND 3
PAYMENT BOND 5
INSURANCE CERTIFICATE
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. Definitions GC-3
2. Preliminary Matters
3. Correlation, Interpretation and Intent GC-5
4. Availability of Lands, Physical Conditions GC-6 '
5. Bonds and Insurance GC-7
6. Contractor's Responsibilities GC-8
7. Work by Others GC-15
GC-16
8. Ownev s Responsibilities
9. Engineer's Status During Construction GC-19
10. Changes in Work GC-19
11, Changes of Contract Price GC-19
12. Change of Contract Time GC-20
13. Warranty and Guarantee, Tests, Etc. GC-21
14. Payments and Completion GC-24
15. Suspension of Work and Termination GC-30
GC-31
16. Arbitration
17. Miscellaneous GC-32
r<
SUPPLkMLNTARY CONDITIONS SECTION
ATTACHMENT A - RE; Resident Project Representative
General Construction Requirements 01001
Basis of Payment 01150
Earthwork 02201
Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete 02513
' Prestressed Concrete Cylinder pipe 02612
Hydrostatic Testing of Piping 02618
Concrete Formwork 03100
Concrete Reinforcement 03200
Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300
Miscellaneous Metals 05710
M Hatches for Access 07830
I Plant Painting 09905
General Equipment Stipulations 11000
Submersible Sump Pump 11426
Steel Pipe and Fittings 15061
Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings 15062
t
,
1
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
r
Galvanized Steel Pipe
Miscellaneous Pipe and Fittings 15065 ,
Disinfection of Water Lines 15078
Butterfly Valves 15079
I' Air Release Valves 15103
Slanting Disc Check Pump Control Valves 15117
Miscellaneous Valves 15133
Pressure Gages 15136 1
Piping Insulation 15172 1
Electrical; 16188
Wire and Conduit System
Electrical Equipment 16100
Lighting System 16150
16500
r I
~I
1
1
4
3
i
. I
. 777 ,n,
154:._.
r
1
I
I 1
INVITATION FOR BIDS
i; Sealed proposals addressed to Mr, John J. Marshall, Purchasing Agent of the
City of Denton, Texas will be received at the office of the Purchasing Agent
L at the City of Denton Service Center/Warehouse at 901-B Texas Street, until
2:00 P.M. November 61984 for the construction of
HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION EXTENSION
PROJECT NO. 85-WP.-6
BID NUMBER 9341
3 At this time and place the proposals will be publicly opened and read aloud.
Any bid received after closing time will be returned unopened.
Copies of Plans, Specifications, and Contract Documents are on file and may
be examined without charge in the office of the Purchasing Agent, 901-B Texas
Street, and Director of Utilities, Municipal Building, Denton, Texas, Copies
of Plans Specifications and Contract Documents may be procured from Freese
ers 811 Lamar Street, Fort Worth, Texas,
i and Nichols, Inc., Consulting Fn ine
} upon a nonrefundable deposit of 525.00.
A cashier's check, certified check or acceptable bidder's bond, payable to
the City of Denton, Texas, in an amount not less than five (5%) percent of
the bid submitted, must accompnay each bid as a guarantee that, if awarded
the contract, the Bidder will, within ten (10) days of award of contract,
enter into a contract and execute bonds on the forms provided in the Contract
Documents.
Attention is called to the fact that not 'less than the prevailing wage rates,
s, as established by the City of Denton, Texas, and as hereinafter set forth
z' in the Contract Documents hereinbefore described and which are made a part
hereof, must be paid on this project. ,
Performance and Payment Bonds shall be furnished as set forth in the Instructions y
to Bidders.
In case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating proposal prices, the I
City of Denton, Texas, reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous
construction thereof, or to reject any or all bids, and waive formalities.
No bid may be withdrawn within sixty (60) days after date on which bids are
{ opened.
/W,,~ T N, TEXAAS~S
V 11- Le
onn . ashall, C.P,M.
Purcsing Agent
k~
r IB-1
1
1
1.
LL, -
i
a
i
i
i,
i
i
I
i
I
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS ql
I
f
f
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Defined Terms, Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which
?q are defined? the General Conditions of the Agreement have the meanings
assigned to them in the General Conditions.
e
2, Qualification of Bidders. To demonstrate his qualifications for
tJ the Pro ec eacg"S er mus be prepared to submit within five (5) days
of Owner's request written data as to the Bidder's Qualifications such
as financial data, previous experience, list of available equipment, and
F" evidence of authority to conduct business in the jurisdiction where the
project is located,
3. Examination of Contract Documents and Site.
3.1 Before submitting his Bid, each Bidder must (a) examine the
Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to fami-
liarize himself with local conditions that may in any manner
affect performance of the work, (c) familiarize himself with
federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regula-
tions affecting performance of the work, and (d) carefully
bM correlate his observations with the requirements of the
Est Contract Documents.
3,2 Before submitting his Bid each Bidder will, at his own expense,
ij perform surveys and subsurface investigations as he may deem
necessary to determine his bid price for performance of the work
within the terms of the Contract Documents.
R,
~ 3.3 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible
representation by the Bidder that he has complied with every
4 requirement of this Article 3.
4. Interpretations. All questions about the meaning or intent of the
Contract ocents``sha11 be submitted to Engineer in writing. Replies
will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by
R Engineer as having received the bidding documents. Questions received
less than two days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be
i answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be
binding. Oral and othor interpretations or clarifications will be
if ( without legal effect.
5. Bid Securiy. Each bid must be accompanied by a certified or
cashier 's-c eck or an a?proved Bidder's Bond underwritten by a surety named
i in the current list of 'Surety Companies Acceptable on Federal Bonds' as
published in the Federal Register by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts,
U.S. Treasury Department, for the sum of five (5%) percent of the amount of '
the maximum total bid as a guarantee that, if awarded the contract, the
f Bidder will promptly enter into a Contract and execute a Performance and
Payment Bond on the forms included in the Contract Documents. Certified or 1
r cashier's check shall he made payable to the Owner.
I i
c
r
1? 00100-1
t~
ii
I
° 6. Contract Time, The number of days for the completion of work (the
Contrac me`F shall be inserted by the Bidder in the space provided in
{ the Bid (Proposal) and will be included in the executed Agreement.
el Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Supplementary
Conditions.
7. Bid Form (Proposal),
7.1 Bidders shall use the Bid (proposal) forms included in the
} documents for each contract Bid. Bid (Proposal) forms are to
be left attached to documents in same manner as received by
Bidders. Supplemental data to be furnished shall be included
in ,ame sealed envelope with Proposal.
7.2 Bid (Proposal! Forms must be completed in ink. The Bid price
of each item on the form must be stated in words, if speci-
fically requested, and/or numerals; in case of a conflict,
Q words will take precedence.
S~ 1
f 7.3 Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by
the president or a vine-president (or other corporate officer
accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the cor-
porate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or
an assist.int secretary. The corporate address and state of
incorporation shall be shown below the signature.
7.4 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name I
and signed by a partner, his title must appear under his
y signature and the official address of the partnership must be
shown below the signature.
1 7.5 All names must be printed below the signature.
7,6 The Bid shalt contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all
Addenda (the numbers of which shall be filled in on the Bid
Form).
8, Submission of Bids, Bids shall be submitted at the time and place
i indicfi e n the InvTtation for Bid!; and shall be included in an opaque
sealed envelope, marked with the Project title and name and address of
the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid Security and other required
documents,
9. Modification and Withdrawal of Bids, Bids may be modified or
withdrawn y an approprTiafe diicume'-n -du-Ty executed (in the manner that a
` Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be
submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. Bids may not be
withdrawn after opening of Bids; for the period set forth in the ]nvi-
I tation for Bids.
10, Opening of Bids, I?ids will be opened as indicated in the Invita-
tion or 79F-Tfds' received after such time will not be considered,
' and will be returned unopened.
1 00100-2
11, Bids to Remain Open. All Bids shall remain open for the period of
time set-for n e nvitation for Bids, but Owner may, in his sole
discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to that
date.
12. Award of Contract.
} 12,1 Owner reserves the right. to reject any and all Bids and waive
any and all formalities, and the right to disregard all +
nonconforming or conditional Bids or counter proposals.
12.2 In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of
the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the pre-
scribed requirements, and alternates and unit prices if
requested in the Bid forms. He may consider the qualifica-
tions and experience of Subcontractors and other persons and
I organizations (including those who are to furnish the princi-
pal items of material or equipment) proposed for those por-
tions of the work as to which the identity of Subcontractors
and other persons and organizations must be submitted as
specified in the Supplementary Conditions or Specifications.
He may conduct such investigations as he deems necessary to
establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial
ability of the Bidders, proposed Subcontractors and other
persons and organizations to do the work in accordance with
the Contract Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the
prescribed time, Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid
of any Bidder who does not meet any such evaluation to Owner's
satisfaction.
12.3 If a contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the
lowest responsible Bidder whose evaluation by Owner indicates
to the Owner that the award will be in the best interests of
the Project.
f
12,4 It is expected that the Owner's evaluation of bids and award
of contract will be made as set forth in the Invitation for
Bids. The successful bidder will be notified by a Notice of
Award which may be a letter or telegram, Time of completion
is very important and failure to meet completion schedule will
subject the Contractor to liquidal M damages as provided in
➢ the Supplementary Condi ''ons secs in of the Contract.
a
y 13. Execution of Contract.
13,1 The accepted Bidder, within fifteen (15) days after formal 1
notice of award, (hall execute the formal Contract Agreement
and required Bonds on the forms prepared and submitted by the
Owner,
3
v
S
s 00100-3
r
`i
1
J
41
13.2 The Owner will issue a Notice to Proceed authorizing the
Contractor to commence work. /
14, Wage Rates. There shall be paid on the project not less than the
gene raT-~revaiTing rates of wages in the locality of the project, which
prevailing wage rates have been determined by the Owner in accordance
with statutory requirements. There is included immediately following
i these Instructions to Bidders a schedule giving for various classifi-
cations the minimum rates as have been established by the Owner.
15.
the Sales of ns of Artic~en20,04a(F) qualifies as an exempt agency pursuant to
and Use Tax Act, and is not subject to any State or City sales taxes,
The Contractor performing this contract may purchase, rent or lease all
materials, supplies, equipment used or consumed in the performance of
this contract by issuing to his supplier an exempption certificate in
lieu of the tax, said exemption certificate complying with the State
Comptrollers ruling N95-0.07. Any such exemption certificate issued by
the Contractor in lieu of the tax shall be subject to the provisions of
the State Comptrollers ruling #95-0.09 as amended to be effective
October 2, 1968,
16, Performance and Payment Bonds. Performance and Payment Bonds are
require Tor TMs pro ecf anTsfia~ll be provided in accordance with Article
5 of the General Conditions.
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
i
Y
I
t~
I
}
i .
00100-4
,j ,
1 1
I
1 n wwol ,r 3
7
I ~ I IMM ~
:d 1
:;y1 r IlfO F 1 t C01 IM Mw'1
yd l I 0"19 11 O~X twr.M
At 1 F F Ir••0 if 1 /
p 1 DENTON
I.OI M 3 0 ' ow
1
AM IF
1 g - ,
4 J yr M"I'm ' 1
I I, II 1 Y,p .000
I 0 A Y » I I M
1 IAV 7I .
L-Al of I l M '
1 p,~
~M 0
` r C.~.~+1 ~LfJ
t M 1
DN
e
• . R I LnPROXI KALE ; 21, 1 M11>E,
1 3
1 0
l M
1 l , rP IM V N4I
1 a - WATER PLANT
1L 1
a, Power J
wMws 1 111 an11
0 11MIO I" M IM W.t V
~ G I • 1 0~ • 0~ L J
r1I ~ ~ 1 ti r
t I 1/ 0 I 4 / 1• ( ri I
• r
4 . 7 IMl J• I
C 1111
n ~ -
w 1 Q ~ LAA'{: 1
0/ It al ig
~ , MINIM ~
.
di SCHEDULE
CITY OF DENTON MINIMUM WAGE RATES FOR PUBLIC
ENGINEERING (HIGHWAY/HEAVY) CONSTRUCTION AND '
UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONTRACTS
Tho
TomasratIn accoow have been
with d th ernla~Atutorthe city
prevailing local wages. / "'I"I eaents ntand
Overtime shall tla paid for at tha eves Of one and one-halt
(1-1/2) tL.nes the raid rates for evety hour worked sn
of forty (40) bourn per weak, exceea
Trade~ft Classtf~on
Rato per Hour
+ Air Tool Man
Asphalt HeatermSn
Asphalt Raker
Asphalt shoveler 6.55
Datching Plant Scal.eman 5.00
Batterbonrd Setter 6.50
Carpenter
Carpenter 1101par 6,45
Concrete Finisher (Paving) 5.45
Concrete Finishor Helper (Paving) 7.50
05
Chncrate Finisher (Structures) S.
Concrete Finisher Helper (struct) 6.60
Concrete Ruboer 5.55
Electrician
Electrician Helper 9.50
Furm 6uildor (Structures) 5.50
Form Builder Heipar (5truct) 6.70
Form Liner (paving & Curb) 5.00
Form Settdx (Pavin Form Slitter Helperg & Curb) 7.25 Pavi I & Curb) 4 6.L0
Form Softer (Structures)
30
es) .
Form Setter Nelpor (Structures) 7.00
Laborer, Common 5.65
Laborer, Util)rv Man 4.90 j
Manhole Builder, Brick 4.90
Mechanic
Mechanic Helper 6.70
Oiler 4.00
Serviceman 6.05
Painter IStructuree) 5.75
Painter Helper (Structures)
?il.eariverman
?ipelayor
Ptpelayer Helper 5.75
?awderman 4.75
Roinl:nrctng Steu1 Sector (Paving) 7.00
Re in en ccing 3tee1 Setter (5truat) 3,00
Ro "14OCcing 3teei Setter Helper 6.60
Steel Norknr iStructural.) 4130
Steel Wor'ter ))el er 5.23
Sign (Structural)
=rector
Sign erector 'Veber
spreader box Man
' Swamper d.00 ,
9€¢ 4.vS
?q WHC ~O~i:7m4n Cy CLderapo r3I
t
Asphalt Distributor
Aopnalc Paving 6.00
Hroom or Sweoer Machine
0.95
Bulldozer L50 H? S Lass S.20
a Bulldozer 130 H? 6.25
Concrete Paving Curing Machine 6.75
Concrete Paving --marling Mach 6.50
j 6.60
1
i
Trade-Craft Classiticacion
late per your
.9
Concrete Paving Form Grader
Concrete Paving Joint Machine
Concrete Pavin
ongitudinal Float 6.15
Concrete Paving L
Mix
Concrete Paving SaweC 7.75
Concrete Paving Spreader 6.05
Paving Sub Grader
Crane, Clamshell, aaekhoe, Derrick,
Oragl.L:e, Shovel (less than 1 1/2 Cy)
Crane, Clamshell, Backhoe, Derrick, 7.06
7,15
Crrushernor Screening P1antYOpapacoc
Elevating Grader
Form Loader '
Foundation Drill Operator (Crawler
Mounted)
Foundation or ill Op. (Truck ,Mounted)
Foundation or ill OPeratoC Helper 6.25
t Front End Loader (2 1/2 CY & Leas) 5.45
Front End Loader (over 2 1/2 Cy) 6.15
110ist (Over 2 dru-$) 7.25
Mixer (Over 16 CF) 6.00
' MAxer (16cr & Lees)
Motor Grader Operator, Fine Grade
Motor Grauer Operator 7.55
Holler, Sto.!) , Wheel (Planr.-:Mix 7.25
• Pavements)
Holler, Steel Wheel (Other-rlat 6.15
Wheel Of Tamping)
Holler, Pneumatic (self-p:opollad) e•VS 1
Scrapers 117 CY & Less1 0.15 1
Scrapers (Over 17 CY) ti. 25
Side loom 6.90
Tractor (Crawler T e) 50 r1 E ,
Tractor (Crawler Tyne) Over 130 HPSs
Tractor (pneumatic) d0 Hp S La t 6'90
Tractor (Pneumatic) over 40 He 9'60 111
Traveling Mixer 6.75
Trenching Macnine, Light
Trenching Machine, Heavv
4 1 Wagon Drill, 130rLng %Iacnine It post '
I rlole Driller operator
5.25
Ttuck~rivgrs:
) Single Axle, Light )
Single Axle, Heavy 5.13
Tai,dom Axle or 3emitrai.ar
LOW007-Float
T:an41t-Mix
Winvit 5,70
Welder
neldae Heipor 7.13
y :'he Cv^YTftACTOFl 9na11 tomyi;i .cn ali State Ind
f ipollcaole co sucn wor.<,
^7e above ars minlnum K ares• 3:iders ;nal! ease :e oils fn
races ttty sxpacc t0 pay, i,n axces~ oP
OWVER ii i not consl'er c' tins -or extra pavnente :oi9 T.9AC:OH
on account of payment of 'a es nignor t,ian those apucified,
4
1
BID
(PROPOSAL)
` Denton Texas
November 6 1984
PROPOSAL Red River Construction Company
A Corporation organized and existing under the laws of,the State of M W09004 soft iw ng-ef
Rose
an-#ndo 04 dw}.
TO: The City of Denton, Texas
Attn: Mr. John J. Marshall, Purchasing Agent
PROPOSAL FOR: HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION EXTENSION
The undersigned Bidder, pursuant to the foregoing Invitation for Bids,
has carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, this Proposal, the
Supplemental Conditions, the form of Contract Agreement and Bonds, the
General Conditions of the Agreement, the Specifications, the Plans, and ,
also the site of the work, and will provide all necessary labor, super-
intendence, machinery, equipment, tools, materials, services and other
facilities to complete fully all the work as provided in the Contract
Documents; and binds himself upon formal acceptance of his Proposal to
execute a contract and bonds, according to the prescribed forms, for the t
following prices to-wit:
Item Item Description and Quantity Unit
N
(Lump Sum Amount) Extended `
Price Amount
if Construction of High Service
Pump Station Extension, Complete
as shown on Plans and as speci-
fied; except, Owner furnishes
one pumping unit and motor I
controller for installation under
this Item; for the Lump Sum Amount
of
Two Hundred Sixty-Nina ra
Four Hundred Fifty && W4LOCDolIars N/A $269 45O
OO
003`J0-1
z.
s3
LL
Item Item Description and Quantity Unit
No. (Lump Sum Amount) Extended
Price Amount I
6 2• For Added (or Deducted) Amounts, as
follows: JJ
a. Additional 1500 psi concrete above
amount shown on Plans, as requested
by Owner; 25 cu. yds. 5100.00 5.2,500.00
b. Additional, 3000 psi concrete above
amount shown on Plans, as requested
by Owner; 15 cu, yds. 5200, 0 5.000.00
1
co Additional reinforcing steel; above
amount shown on Plans and specified;
as requested by owner; 1500 pounds ; 0,50 ; 760.00
d. 1;14 Concrete for backfilling as
requested by Owner; 25 cu. yds. ; 80,00 ; 21000.00
Sub-Total, Item 2 $ 8,250,00
TOTAL AMOUNT BID ; 277,700.00
Within fifteen (15) days after formal acceptance of this Proposal by a
Notice of Award of contract, the undersigned will execute the Contract
Agreement and will furnish approved surety bonds and such other bonds as
required by the Contract Documents for the faithful performance of the I
0 Contrac,
set forth, Agreement and
attached bonds
security in ethe i
amount of
(6% of Amount Bid)
is to become the prorerty of the Owner as liquidated damages for the
delay and additional work caused thereby.
The undersigned agrees to substantially complete all work covered by
these Contract Documents within )go consecutive calendar days frnm the +
day established for the start of- a work as set forth in a written
Notice to Proceed to be issued by the Owner or by the Engineer for the
Owner. Except by mutual agreement of the Owner and the Contractor the
date established for the start of work will ho not less than ten HO)
days or not more than thirty (30) days afte, the date of the Contract
Agreement,
T ' 00300-2
o
r
r f
41
yk
4 F
i
Receipt is acknowledged of the following addenda;
Addendum No. 1 NONE RECEIVED '
Addendum No. 2
Addendum No. 3 "
Addendum No. 4 "
i Addendum No. 6
Respectfully submitted,
By Red River C truction Co.
Attested By:
vVintLOW art TRIP,
iirftoK Smith, Vice President
...i....~.+. 13 Omega
cre ry
Dallas, Texas 76214
ress
(SEAL) If Bidder is a Corporation
NOTE. Do not detach bid forms from other papers. Fill in with ink and
submit complete with attached papers.
M
,
i
S
00300-3
r
t,
1
IVA SHEET AND SUBMITTAL INFORMATION CONTRACTORS ~
t CONTRACTOR'S NAME: _
ADDRESS: PH NE NO.: ~_-ZCL11~)
CONTRACTOR'S RELATED WORK EXPERIENCE (LIST THREE REFERENCES)
CLIENT:
/"Olry Fr-
Er•~'~.1S~e5
ADDRESS: P% PHONE NO.: 1~►1{b'~1
DESCRIPTION: !
CLIENT; ~i.L!vC
ADORESS:<jt PHONE NO.: - !o`TC8r7)
DESCRIPTION: F.let~i. ~iA~
CLIENT: Adj. V~~
ADDRESS: PHONE NO.:
i {
DESCRIPTION;
TYPE OF SUB CONTRACTOR NAME
' r
ADDRESS
PHONE NO.
i
TYPE OF SUB CONTRACTOR NAME
F
I ADDRESS
PHONE NO-
Submit additional data sheets if necessary.
C
~J .
D-1
>
k ,
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
f STATE OF TEXAS
" t COUNTY OF Denton
THIS AGREEMFNT, made and entered into this 20th day of November
A.O., 1994 , by and between Jhe City of Denton
of the County of Denton and State of Texas, acting through its
City Manaaer -thereunto duly authorized so to do, s
Party of the First Part, hereinafter termed the OWNER, and
Red Rive^ Construction Compaq
y
of the City of Dallas County of Dallas
and State of Texas Party of the Second Part, hereinafter {
termed CONTRACTOR,
i WITNES5ETH; That for and in consideration of the payments and
agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the Party of
the First Part (OWNER), and under the conditions expressed in the bonds
bearing even date herewith, the said Party of the Second Part (CONTRACTOR)
hereby agrees with the said Party of the First Part (OWNER) to commence
and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows,
Construction of High Service Punip Station Extension - Project No, 85-WP-6
(Bid Number 9341)
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in
the General Conditions of the Agreement; and at his (or their) own proper
cost and expense to furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery, equip-
ment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and other accessories and
services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with
the conditions and prices stated in the Proposal attached hereto, and in
accordance with all the General Conditions of the Agreement, the Special
Conditions, the Notice to Bidders (Advertisement for Bids), Instructions
1
10-15-71
'78
/
s
I1 M
to Bidders, and the Performance and Payment Bonds, all attached hereto,
and in accordance with the plans, which includes all maps, plats, blue-
prints, and other drawings and printed or written explanatory matter
thereof, and the Specifications therefor, as prepared by FREESE AND
I NICHOLS, INC,, herein entitled the ENGINEER, each of which has been identi-
fied by the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER, all of which are made a part
hereof and collectively evidence and constitute the entire contract.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work on or after the
date established for the start of work as set forth in a written notice
to commence work and to substantially complete all work within the time
stated in the Proposal, subject to such extensions of time as are pro-
vided by the General and Special Conditions.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds the
price or prices shown in the Proposal, which forms a part of this Con-
tract, such payments to be subject to the General and Special Conditions
of the Contract,
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed
this Agreement in the year and day first above written, i
. I
ATTEST.
City of Denton, Texas
art t iFirst - ar ; OWNER
r.-
By .1 ,
G, Chris Hartung
1
City Manager
(SEAL)
ATTEST.
Red River Construction Company
Party o the Second Vart, CUNTRACTOR
By
Me--
t
President
(SEAL)
' 2
10/22/73
'7B
1
~J
1
PERFORMANCE BOND
1 »
STATE OF TEXAS }
COUNTY OF Denton }
r
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Red River
} Construction Company , of the City of _ Dallas ,
' County of Dallas and State of Texas ,
as PRINCIPAL, and Transamerica Insurance Company, _
Los Angeles, CA as SURETY,
authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds 1
for principals, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton,
Texas , as OWNER, in the penal sum of Two Hundred
' Seventy Seven Thousand Seven Hundred and No/100 Dollars 277,700.00 ) a
for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and
' their heir3, administrators, executols, successors and assigns, jointly
and severally, by these presents;
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract
with the OWNER, dated t;,d 2 day of November , 19_24_, for the con-
struction of
High Service Pump Station Extension, No. 85Na 5-W2b-b
( Bid Number 9341)
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to
the same extent as if copied at length herein,
I i
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such, that if
the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract and shall in all
respects duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the cove-
rants, conditions and agreements in and by said contract agreed and cove-
nanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to the
true intent and meaning of said Contract and the Plans and Specifications
hereto annexed, then this obligation shall be void: otherwise to remain
in full force and effect;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the
provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended
3
10-15-71
• 78
,y
~ r
` by acts of the 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and all liabilities
on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said
Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
t' PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed upon this
bond, venue shall lie in Denton County, State of Texas.
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change,
extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or
to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings
accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on this bond,
and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alter-
ation or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be per-
formed thereunder.
IN WITNESS WHERFOF the said Principal and Surety have signed and
sealed this instrument this ~ZOth day of November 19 84
Red R1%,er
Construction Company Transamerica Insurance Company j
a~ M i
r n pa Surety
s
By _ By
Title Pr es dent Title_
Address 13725 Omega AddressL
►,Lju'(=-Y
&4-4 NC,
8300 IUGLAS AVE, Sltlll: 7C}!}
Dallas, Texas 75234 k
'I el. (214)
r~F3/ 2lUU
M (SEAL) (SEAL)
~ I
! The ame and address of the Resident Agent of Surety is: i
f. 3 GYM C. ( .Ol
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract,
I
4
j 10-15-71
~7A
1
PAYMENT BOND
STATE OF TEXAS j
COUNTY OF Denton j
g KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Red River
Construction Company , of the City of Dallas ,
~ County of Dallas , and State of Texas ,
as PRINCIPAL, and Transamerica Insurance Company,
Los Angeles, CA , as SURETY, authorized under the laws of the State of
{
exas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly buund
unto the City of Denton, Texas ,
j 1
as OWNER, in the penal sum of Two Hundred Seventy Seven Thousand j
Seven Hundred A No/100 Dollars ($277,700,00 ) for the payment whereof,
the said Principal an Surety bind t erase ves and their heirs, administrators,
executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents,
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered Into a certain written contract
with the Owner, dated the 20thday of November , 1984 , for the construction
Of Hi Sarvira Pump Station FYtencinn
erojec No. 85-WP-6 j flits Numher 9341
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to
the same extent as if copied at length herein,
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that
if the said Princ;pai shall pa all claimants supplying labor and material
to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in
said contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in
full force and effect;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the
` provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended
y acts of the 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and all liabilities
on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said
Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein,
i
PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed upon this
bond, venue shall lie in Denton County, State of Texas.
5
10-15-71
'78
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change,
extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or
to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications or drawings
accompanying the same, shall in anywise'affect its obligation on this bond,
and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time,
alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be
performed thereunder.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and
sealed this instrument this _20th day of Nave,nher 1994_,
Red River Transamerica Insurance
Construction Company Company
Principal - -Surer ` i
BY r BY Reafm
Title
Pre; dent T1cle,j,
Address 13725 gneva Address i.IJS CROTI- POWf:RS PCO. mC,
c UG 1 AS AVE' U!'i'6 700
Dallas, Texas 7513A V DALLAr,
e . d 4) ~V-2100
(SEAL) (SEAL)
1
The name and address of the Resident Agent of Surety is;
r- i 1
iA
Note: Date of Bond must not he prior to date of Contrat:t,
a
1
,
6
10-15-71
178
Transamerica Transamerica Insurance Company
A Stork Cvnifmny Hung 0 161 n Luz Anprn•> Insurance Services
Power of Attorney u
j
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS;
That TRANSAMERICA INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation of the State of California, does
hereby make, constitute and appoint Willard Crotty or James N. Powers or Tom P, Ellis,lll
or Peter A. Rush or Cirvil B. Coborn,Jr,or Rosemary Weaver
or Paula L, Folsom "each" of Dallae,Dallse Cotmty,Taxas
its true and lawful Attorney (s)-in-Fact, with full power and authority, for and on behalf of the Company as
surety, to execute and deliver and affix the seal of the Company thereto, if a seal is required, bonds,
undertakings, recognizances or other written obligations in the nature thereof, as follovv-: :
Any and all bonds and undertakings. Unlimited in Amount, for or or behalf of this
Company, in its business and in accordance with its Charter, - - - - - - - - - -
and to bind TRANSAMERICA INSURANCE COMPANY thereby, and ail of the acts of said
Attorney(s) in. Fact, pursuant to these presents, are hereby ratified and confirmed.
This appointment is made under and by authority of the following by-laws of the Company which by-laws
are now in full force and effect:
ARTICLE VII
k SECTION 30. All policies, bonds, undertakings, certificates of insurance, cover notes, recognizances, contracts of indemnity,
L endorsements, stipulations, waivois, consents of sureties, re-Insurance acceptances or agreements, surely and co-surety obligations and
agreements, underwriting undertakings, and all other Instruments pertaining to the Insurance business of the Corporation, shall be validly
executed when slgned on behalf of the Corporollan by the President, any Vice President or by any other officer, employee, agent or y
Attorney•in•Facl authorized to so sign by (i) the Board of Directors, {ill the President, (iii) any Vice President, or (iv) any other person e
empowered by the Board of Directors, the President or any Vice President to give such authorization; provided that all policies of insurance
sha11 also bear the signature of a Secretary, which may be a facsimile, and unless manually signed by the President or a Vice President, a
facsimile signature of the President, A facsimile signature of a former officer shall be of the some validity as that of en exlslinyy officer. I
The affixing of the corporate seal shall not he necessary to the valid execution of any instrument, but any parson outfsorited to txmne s
or attest such instrument may affix the Corporation's seal thereto.
I
his Power of Attorney Is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following r1t
resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company at a meeting duly called and held on the
17th day of October 1963.
"Resolved, That the signature of any oHlcei authorited by the By laws and the Company seal may be affixed by facsimife to any
power of anorney or special power of attorney or cerlificntion of either given for the execution of any bond undertaking, recognizance
or other written obligation In the nature thereol; such signature and seal, when so used being hereby adopted by the Company as the ;j i
original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Company, to be valid and binding upon the Cnmpany wilh the same force
eneffect as though manually affixed." U
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, TRANSAMERICA 1NSURANCC COMPANY has caused these presents
to be slgned by Its proper officer and its corporate soil to be hereunto -:nixed this 12th day of
May 19 83
%
I
j
F BY Q), t/
>v c.G,
J. W. FLESHMAN, Vito P,esidom
State of California 1
County of Los Angeles ) ss t
On this 12th day of MAY 19 8~before me personally came J.W. F leshman to me
known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the City of Sierra Madre, State
of California; that he Is a Vice-President of Transamerica Insurance Company, the corporation described in
f and which executed the above Instrument; that he knows the seal of said Corporation; that the seal affixed
to the said Instrument Is such corporate seal; that It was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board
of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and
acknowledges some to be the act and dead of said corporation.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
oratatsot
ELIZ1,BETH AHERNE
NOTA'fVNI CAL00 NU
+klNClek ortlcl
' MS Commaacn I 13(',1964 Notary Public
4 ts imp a%
- '1 17199 IOveit 560
r
'I
I, J. Tanner, Assistant Vire President of Transamerica Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the
Power of Attorney herein before set forth is a true and exact copy and is still In force, and further certify
I that Section 30 of Article VII of the By-Laws of the Company and the Resolution of the Board of
Directors, set forth In said Power of Attorney are still in force. In testimony whereof I have har unto
19~f
subs rlped my name and affixed the seal of the said Company this may,( day of
' ` li:a i(ff 06 111Y111,
Y .
k
I a„1 . J, N, TAN N E R, Anltta nt V Ice president
5
,
t,
`I V
{
4
i
i.
Y
I 1
;f
i
- _ ,,#,~,,,a- ' - T • _ _ _
1
A- y~l 1~}~SN; y
r r il4 rt ,t ItWi' r:
r.lr•' d'npp k1~ YT 5•1♦ iY,x I , t ' , 'r,lrk !`~l'tl ! ll; to tl I,t1 T~1q { n1s 1; l.~• -It < tf♦ v. t!^i. " i.
s1 ) 11` { 1 r:1 "i j I rlr .f 1 r'rf t ,In. 1 k }j~{ )'1~i7}h1 f L l'li iI OAv ),AJ . .~tf
t r~12/12/84
' aetLgec ffu ~v"4'4~Iq vd"i:~:>br ,1 i3: nTy3~.~.~h r'~i'1'~ Lr,C ~N4I `.4'!i•w Cs4S'~>ts '~a: t #'.f. D9r~.'tA.+~
PHCJI)l IS''-q THIR CEnTIFIOATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORLIAT70N ONLY AND COHFEnS
X EI+I-IS CR1I'I'Y ril & COMPANY INC. NU nIfIH'fG UPON TIE CEHTIF+CATE HOLDUL THIS CrnTIFICAf£ DOES NOT AMEND, ,
8300 DarrAS Avmjvi, SRI'IIE 700 EXTEND Oil ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFOHDEO UY THE POLICIES BELOW,
}1 OALThS l 75225 - - -
t COMPANIES AFF0110ING COVERAGE - '
d
EnN+1>nuv SNl'EFqLA^EODlFtL INSUF U> ' COMPANY
IET En
_ . COMPANY UNITED PACIFIC INSURANCE CCME)ANY
INSI :D-------'------- LETTER C t(
RIVER CO[IST1-CC[Ii7N CIJ,, TUC. - -
1 i COMPANY ~
P. 0. FM 923 LFl TEn ir, '
II AWISONt TEXi>v 75001 - - - - I ;
COMPANY
~ Ierren ~ I.
COMPANY
' < LETTER
if >!d j )pJ} h
fN~ppp'{~/~ y,, phi tai TtRi22
.~J:GYJ 't'd' ' r>'Yf1FA ..llfY)lt aY
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT POLICIEF OF INSURANCE LISTED PCLOW HAVE LIL•PN ISSIJGUTO THE INSUNED NAI!CO ABOVP. FOn THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. L~Ird.
NOTWITHUANDINCI ANY REOUIREMENT, TCHM ON CON011tON OF ANY CO}JTnACT 011 011101 DOCUMENT l I RESPECY TO VNIICH THIS CERTIFICATE: MAY t
BE ISSULU OR MAY PERTAIN, THC INSURANCE AFFOr OUD UY THI! POLlcivi DUSCHIULD HEREIN IS SUDJECT 10 ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS, AND CONUI• ' rs
~i TIONS OF SUCH POUCIEG.
ARIL v 1 T1 ' LIMITS IN THOUSANDS
'
'I CO Fall l1i;G11Vf PGLICY FtIIa,VIPII LI 1 x•'
• ~ 'LTH TYPE OF tN3UliANCE POLICY tJU6fUPFt o)ti luiaourrJ Wit W!axJr,^d `;"1- C.hH nac UEGA1C '7' {1
i- Is.....,,;•7,' OCCU REll;
rs f. 1. $
r. , pa
UENCRAL LIABILITY
COHPAEREiFS1'IE FOAtd IS
uwiff°E ,l RAtIU lS I I,Ai I6.GL
' Uh'lfftbAOli4p EYPLOS Y , GUI LAP;t' 16'ilARO
J
,.f PAWUUXUi.IPltiflJ 0?TRATIONS
' III > 1 r tf
COVI CO
1
_ E
u7o.Fn,ueN1 conTrOcT(a; l '
PLAS617A1 IIIJU'rr ~ ~ ~ Pr Is:ounl. Ifiauuv
~ _ _ -..~_._~.~~._.____.____.._-..._.___.____.f.__._._......__-'--•_-.__~._,. x...1.'1
AUTOM,MILL unlnui r , I
1 i
I '
ANY 4111)
tal. ovri,n nuros tL,+w tea i I ~ I ~ I
ALL O'J!L'ED ADIOS (OT7V , lilr'I~
- HIRtOAU10) A^ P4ss
NON-WINUI AUTOS Tit .I.: 1 t .
Iurt
MRAGF L7AU'IAl , i
I
Al, ".EEBLInBItnv M 523 386 592 2 9-2-84 9-2-05 nl , ,
:j
cc nl an 31000 1:3 0
JI.WkELtAroll
oTRfnrParruutsllELUrGIJ`,F
WORREM' COMPENSATION (EJ II Arr' 7CNiJ !
AND:.- LISIItd, ILI_•~f
-
@ ? I ~'y EMPLOYI LIAUILITY ; II '.li E 1 CHLU L0,1,1
.
OTW7$I ALL RISK" 5UL~71X7I IC)
S, BUILDERS, RISK 1
POLICY M 3 72 00 96 9-1-84 9-1-85 'PERMS AND CONDITIONS
POIICX-5500'DbD--APPLTE
DmicnIPTIONOrOPl:I7;n~t'1t,,ccnTlD`Lan'ISl,l.1~ LI~Inlrlr;"
JOHS CONSTRUCTION OF HIGH SERVICE PUMP STATION EXTENSION
PRClGlif NO 85-WP-6
f ti i s r rr „ r I u 1k f avr) tri I Cl~ ,~,jr,,1'ty INN, LjIlI, WI 16,
} 5 gq
Yllf..'v.E'W,r;t.._rfrh.r.r
SHOULD AIIV (IF THI, i-MOVI: DH` CRR13) POLICIII UE 0AI1ll],KLLtD MOM Tilt r.;•
TD 1.
I PUt~rTlOti f1ATr11100.hl', 1}Ili I:i1:UINl COMPAr74 WILL CflPh,ilOII
CITY LK T)ENICJN, 'Pl fA5 h p I,AY" RIT1U1 N011U TO rl : CCITT A lOLDER NAfffn TO 'rv
C/0 FRIMSII AND mill INC. IL
fir onvlarl Iv f3(Z-ZNf,(1,3 OTI CI ~LIAllulY
C)NSUL'PING , 811 IAMAR STREET 17, S Ctdl'I'Y& 7!%
INC
CORT WOR'T'H, TWA 16102 1
i if
r+,,.. ;r. , A vr''.r1 1 '{C! n,.•+b+.. •ttgn w.1,T
sN ,r, ry(j+/R•A!,'j?1 r IL.K.a~.r .1.•._. If
I
r
j
l 1
Grp INSURANCE CERTIFICATE
f F'
This Is to certify that the policy or policies listed below have been Issued to rho named Insured and are In force as of the date of this certificate, This
Certificate shall remain In effect until the listed expiration date, If any, or until II, days after wrIlion notice is mailed to the certif Icate holder, whichever data
shall first occur.
o Thlt certificate Is not an Insurance policy and does not emend, alter or extend coverage afforded by the policies listed. Notwithstanding any requirement,
term or conditlon of any Contract or other document with respect to which this cetlfiwto may be Issued or may pertain, the Insurance afforded by the '
policies Ilstad Is subject to all the terms ul such poltcles.
o
A NAME AND ADDRESS OF CERNFICATE HOLDER Eff ECNYE DALE OF THIS CERTIf ATE
Deoeober 13# 1964
t Ir`~` ISSUED AT
The City of Denton ftn"g TIIXae
901 B T4z" Street
Denton# TeCCY In SURanCO ASSOC STIon
T8XaS EMPLOYeRS
i - InOemnITY COMP8nY .Y
r _ EFTIPLOYORS C88UBLYY
'S NAME AND ADDRESS Of INSURED company
r=MPLOYeRS NBTIOnSL
rl In SURBnCe COFY1PenY
Red River Conetruatiron C0.# Inc, EMPLOYORS Ca SUBLTY j
I " Pa 0. Boole 293 CORPORaTIOnJ
Ld"rOn1 Tax" 750+1 EIT1PLoyeRB NaTIOnaL -
InSUllence CORPORerton
r-EMPLOYORS OF TBXOS
LLOYD'S
s (Aul hor' c r in 'r s
g i1
W _ (iyped)!dace Abbott Met. Site.
INSURANCE IN FORCE E0plmliee IIMIIS OF IIAIIUIY NOT tt$i INAN
Dair IaA lawn Brh ANeen' Ar h1lq STATE AND {
Kind PellrY Nvmh4, to e•^vlgr4l lu Dr eeOm'rl Or A99'.9.1, IOCATION OF OPERATIONS I
M /dirt hblNrm IN nary Iorhbm
ii.am l1 Cewm 4 97351 fully Compiler Wlth Regvieerni of
Ped 14006 worFus' Comp4nwilon tow
I
q ~ J onl Diwm. onl
" 4"$$ Only Only STATI OF TEXAS
_
c y 8 %3;111' And Mm01 S440 111
3 _ lherro~ _ See HeadtrI ~100r000 $100,000 $500,000 Y-
irip
. r pp Ilan 4 <everaYe Fully CampBa With Aequhsmnt, -
` E Pen 1 el ~1eN law
5 y DWO14 Only Disww Only
a CPO,i 140 Anal Reno al if tlan$
V 8 pr
Thaser SaHaedlnp $1000000 $100,000 _$500,000
bodily - - - E - s s3~-0
Ia' nlury TMP-1L2132 Xi j00p000 Pea.n,onlF UggA.IISTERAIIOAItSoA
- i
Poe rl And awel R heat
Delwgi lhotaeos Se4 Needlnp POSMSIONS AND CANADA
X X X $100#000 $1000000
liem 4
aedily 601 !501 000 f500 000 Not
Injury 1 AppliteLle U.tA. SF Tt AR11ORIES OR
h p Pwpe riy And Renewal If Ilany _ Net~ P0~ SSSIONS AND CANADA
Damage Thereof So* Needlnp --X X X y 31oo1 Applimble
lam 3 3 3 f
And Rene nl II IIonL • _
There e~ $oo Heeding 3 S S
item 6 s°-
And kenowal if /fans • - - 1 ~
Eheuel Sae 11"dlne 3 _,I
REMARKS ns Right Service Pump Station Ertmaion 0113810jeJf
P;A A~';L•n tr3t~5S, •
f IECO 17997 (4L1.84(
1,1 1 2 U D is A' I u t\'
li`5U1<,1i\C~. ±il~`1JIUJl xL UIHC!lt:.\lJ
Itltilout 1"f"ti119 any Ot Lite other ouiigatiolls or 11du11it1Es OC
the Contractor, tale Contractor mull proviue altu maintain until
the work is cuill pleteu anu acce tea b
owner, willilllum insurance coverage as fulluwsne Utty ut Le°t'JII,
T~ itU'xAAIYL, SA'ITU,\ L2lil'l',5 1, 1AbILI'
J7 A~U'l Ui(
I1. Cut~lPlct11h~S1Uh Gk~t;xAL 1,fAitlLl'I'Y t
' bodily injury r
$SUu,uuu
1 hacrl occurance Aggregate
Property Uamage
$1uU,000 $1uU,UUU
Each accident Aggregate
I I I . C0,NiPREh1:hb I VL Aurl umoB I LL L IAU 11, 17'Y
uouily Injury
$250,UUu $SUu,uuu
Lt,cu person
1'ro )or L' C;l itCCl~lf {iC
l ty llaoial;(;
~lvv,uuu
Eacll accident
M A In addition to the insurance uescriL)eu
Contractor snali ootain at a
bove
15 0 toe
PkOTLC'fIVI; L1A1sI1,I''Y INSUI(ANCL PUL1C7 expense an hUr<
nalnirtl, tho City ot
Lonton as insurcu witn Clla~ follolcinr, limits;
f buu1LY INJURY
- PIIUPLIt7' Y' wW111W;
$luu,Goo each person $1UU,UUU eacn accident
$3Uu,UUU cacti accident
$11)Il,UUII agt;regute
Cover ing l the Durk to be >e>
the CFtrtorrneu ny the Contractor for
y of Denton. E
' h. Tiie f
contractor Iv ifl tur'nisn the
_ Policy uuscriued abnve anu UI%ner's Protective
r u0S)' ~I to et;ecu'Le cite uertitic;;te
c, r flowing huge to the laity of Lentuo
for i.ts approval
con,+nell Insurance nest ae i. ccepteu bcLure
arty Icon. ultLi er the contract to wrlich tilis
~ ihsuranc~l applies,
a
C1 1
,i
f,
r
I
l
eels IJ IU CL
mftes i'If snuYwn below;
Iho comPany or curnpu chat the following policies, subject to filet, Ierms. conditions and exclustuns. Have
THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE neither affirm
been issued
policy atrvciy IIVL'fV
l Of puiicies Shown below, nor isrt Jr? eodursemeltl rna{ in
i
ur ❑e arncnds, extends or liters the coverage JITurded I
judlti n 'ensured on the polio} ur pulicies referred to lwlcin. b tlio pe Pcnorlrsonl firm ur eulporauun at w
• in the event of an hose rec;ucsf !t ;
y rnatrrtul change in or caneelfatwn of the policy of pulicres, th a Owed
days` written notice to the patty to whom this cerlilleacc is addressed, o panles wlli mud fen I I
e cmpany ur com
NAME AND A00q"' OF PARTY TO WHOM CERTIFICATE IS ISSUE()
f cv~., OA TE:
CitY of Denton -1 REMARKS.
215 E. MCKinney Hid r'l-------~ '
Denton, TX 76201
! Attn: John J, I
Purchasing A8enc' C.P.,K,
I J ~
r
NA&.e rsiJu,yGpRC~S OF IiVSU -
u
t
t
insurance company FN'umber
Type of Imuranee Polley Elfec t ve Frclnpon ~Warkmen'sCampensarroni UAEiIQTY•
and
f Emoroyers Liablrity +51a rv
j Comprehensive :E,ronlovar 3
Generul
Liability f s LtallifY L.mirs-~10p,001
9oolly Iniurv l
F-
l j I' f
-
j 7q Octurrence
S j
l i i5 e"llp Plooucts
ompleted Oneror
l ~ +nrouunv Damage
I
I~ tS Euh OtcuneAc
r
S - A regare Operutonl a,
+ + 1 aggrePUe prore~
A 9gCuntracru•
ComprehenfWe + r
Is ~ 094te r•ro funs
Autamourle Liabillty•' 1 - CJm,_ oh gneran
r , ~BOtldy In~un.
, i I $
Each Persl,n
1 + ~s
Each
I l + Occurrence
i•.""~ T i I Is
Oarn,tae
S
l I - ~ - Eden Cccu- - _.lferjee _
~ I
{ l ' 1
Ate 01 any aoorop'rt,l to Miry Me&
oven aft owned, n - -
_o u'th Infurnn!f in 7olte,-_ _
OO,OWned or nlled "I, to
S. tIAhE ,tan
MDRE55 I)F .1GE:lC.f~
J •
~fO:tE :IL"~9EP, tlF' xGE:707 .
Autn _
Pp/llknla ll4e
is of the Ins..ralue
r9 arXl y.~
{
.,,,WIPPIP,,,~,,,~1 T
1
1
r GENERAL CONDITIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Article 1 - DEFINITIONS GC-1
Article 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS GC-3
ql,- 2.1 - Execution of Agreement GC-4
2.2 - Delivery of Bonds GC-4
2.3 - Copies of Documents GC-4
2.4 - Contractor's Pre-start Representations GC-4
2.5 - Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed GC-4
2,6 - Starting the Project GC-4
" 2.7 - Before Starting Construction GC-5
Article 3 - CORRELATION, INTERPRETATION AND INTENT OF
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS GC.5
z Article 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS: PHYSICAL CONDITIONS,
REFERENCE POINTS GC -6
4.1 - Availability of Lands GC-6
4.2 - Physical Conditions - Surveys and Reports GC-6
4.3 - Unforseen Physical Conditions GC-6
4.4 - Reference Points GC-6
Article 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE GC-7
5.1 - 5,2 - Performance, Payment and Other Bonds GC-7
5.3 - Contractor's Insurance Requirements GC-7
5,4 - Additional Bonds and Insurance GC-8 i
Article 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES GC-8
6.1 - 6,2 - Supervision and Superintendence GC-8
6.3 - 6.6 - Labor, Materials and Equipment GC-9
6.7 - Substitute Materials or Equipment GC-9
6.8 - 6.11 - Concerning Sub-contractors GC-10
6,12 6,13 - Patent Fees and Royalties tic-10
6,14 Laws and Regulations GC-11
6.15 - Taxes GC-11
6.16 - 6.17 - Use of Premises GC-11 f
6.18 - Record Drawings GC-11
6.19 - Safety and Protection GC-12
6.20 - Emergencies GC-12
6.21 - 6,26 - Shop Drawings and Samples GC-13
6.27 - Cleaning GC-14,
6.28 - 6.29 - Indemnification GC-14
Article 7 - WORK BY OTHERS GC-15
I Article 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES GC-15
` Article 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION GC-16
9.1 - Owner's Representative GC-16
9.2 - Visits to Site GC-16
9.3 - Clarifications and Interpretations GC-16
9.4 - Rejecting Defective Work GC-17
9.5 - 9.7 - Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments GC-17
~J
TC-1
1
LLL
A
GC-17
9,8 - Resident Project Representatives GC-17
9,9 - 9.10 - Decisions on Disagreements
9.11 - 9.13 - Limitations on Engineer's Responsibilities GC^19
Article 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK GC-19
Article 11 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE GC-20
Article 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME
v Article 13 -WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE; TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;
CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE GC-21 l
WORK
13.1 - Warranty and Guarantee GC-21
GC-21
13.2 - 13.4 -Tests and Inspections GC-22
13.5 - Access to Work GC-22
13.6 - 13.7 - Uncovering Work GC-23
L3,8 - Owner May Stop Work GC-23
13.9 - Correction or Removal of Defective Work GC-23
13.10 - One Year Correction Period GC-24
13.11 - Acceptance of Defective Work GC-24
t"J 13.12 - Neglected Work by Contractor GC-24
Article 14 -PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION GC-24
14.1 - Schedules GC-24
14,2 - Application for Progress Payments GC-25
14.3 - Contractor's Warranty of Title 1
' 14,4 - 14.6 - Approval of Payments GCGC--25
25 1
14.7 - 14.8 - Substantial Completion GC-27
14.9 - Partial Utilization GC-27
14.10 - Final Inspection GC-28
14.11 - Final Application for Payment GC-28
14,12 - 14,13 - Ap?roval of Final Payment GC-29
14.14 - Contractor s Continuing Obligation GC-29
14.15 - Waiver of Claims GC-30
Article 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION GC-30 i
15.1 - Owner May Suspend Work GC-30
15.2 - 15.4 - Owner May Terminate Terminate GC-31
15.5 - Contractor May Stop GC-31
Article 16 - ARBITRATION GC-32
4 Article 17 - MISCELLANEOUS GC-32 ?
1
17.1 - Giving Notice GC-32
17.2 - Computation of Time GC-32
17.3 - 17.5 - General
1
TC -2
y
.r
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE i - DEFINITIONS
Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other Contract
Documents, the following terms have the meanings indicated which are
applicable to both the singular and plural thereof:
Addendum (Addenda) - A supplement to the Contract Documents issued in
writing prior to the receipt of bids.
Agreement - The written Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering I
the Work to be performed.
k
Application for Payment - The form furnished by ENGINEER which is to
be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting progress payments and which is to
include the schedule of values required by paragraph 14,1 and an af-
fidavit of CONTRACTOR that progress payments theretofore received on
account of the Work have been applied by CONTRACTOR to discharge in
full all of CONTRACTOR's obligations reflected in prior Applications
for Payment and that all materials and work included in the application
for payment conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Bid - The offer or proposal of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed
form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed,
Bidder - Any person, firm or corporation submitting a Bid for the Work,
Bonds Bid, performance, payment, maintenance bonds and other instru-
ments of security, furnished by CONTRACTOR and his surety in accordance
with the Contract Documents,
Calendar Day - A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from mid-
night to the next midnight and is any day of the week, no days being y
excepted, F
Contract Amendment - A written agreement signed by both parties altering
the terms of the General Conditions and/or the Supplementary Conditions.
f„ Change Order - A written order to CONTRACTOR signed by OWNER authorizing
an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the i
Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued after execution of the
Agreement,
Contract Documents - The Agreement, Addenda, Invitation for Bids, In-
structions to Bidders C
ONTRAGTOR s Bid the Bonds the Notice of Award,
these General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the
Specifi- cations, Drawings and Modifications,
F&N-78 GC-1
T T
i
Contract Price - The total mono s a '
Documents. Y P Yab1e to CONTRACTOR under the Contract
Contract Time - The number of days stated in the Agreement for the coin-
pletion of the Work, computed as provided in paragraph 17.2
CONTRACTOR - The person, firm or corporation with whom OWNER has executed
1 the Agreement,
Drawings - The drawings which show the character and scope of the Work
to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by ENGINEER
and accepted by Owner and are referred to in the Contract Documents
except shop drawings as required by the Contract Documents,
ENGINEER - The person, firm or corporation named as such in the Agreement,
f
Field Order - A written order issued by ENGINEER which clarifies or
interprets the Contract Documents in accordance with paragraph 9.3 or
orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with paragraph 10.2,
Modification - (a) Contract Amendment; (b) Change Order; (c) field Order,
Notice of Award - A written notice by OWNER to the apparent successful
Bidder stating that upon compliance with the conditions precedent to
be fulfilled by him within the time specified, OWNER will execute and
deliver the Agreement to him,
Notice to Proceed - A written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR (with
a copy to ENGINEER) fixing the date on which the Contract Time will
commence to run and on which CONTRACTOR shall start to perform his obli-
gations under the Contract Documents.
' OWNER - A public body or authority, corporation, association
ship,
ship, or individual for whom the Work is to be performed. partner-
- The entire construction to be performed as provided in the
Contract Documents.
Resident Project Representative - The authorized representative of ENGI-
NEER who is assigned to the Project site or any part thereof,
Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, brochures, schedules j
and other data which are prepared by CONTRACTOR, a Subcontractor, manu-
facturer, supplier or distributor and which illustrate the equipment,
material or some portion of the Work,
j
F&N-78 GC-2
1
i
E Specifications - Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting /
of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction
systems, standards, procedures and workmanship as applied to the Work,
c. Subcontractor - An individual, firm or corporation having a direct con-
tract with CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for the performance
of a part of the Work at the site,
Substantial Completion - Certification by ENGINEER that the construction
of the Project or a specified part thereof is sufficiently completed,
in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Project or
specified part can be utilized for the purposes for which it was in-
tended pursuant to the provisions of Paragraph 14,7, 14,9; or if there
r be no such certification, the date when final payment is due in ac-
cordance with Paragraph 14,12, o
1 '
Supplementary Conditions - A por Don of the Contract Documents which
modifies the General Conditions by making additions, clarifications #
and/or deletions, In cases of conflict between the Supplementary
Conditions and the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions
shall have precedence over the General Conditions.
Work - Any and all obligations, duties and responsibilities necessary
to the successful completion of the Project assigned to or undertaken ~~111
by CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, including all labor, materials,
equipment and other incidentals, and the furnishing thereof, i
Working Day - A day not including Saturdays, Sundays or any of the
following holidays; New Year, Washington's Birthday, Memorial Day,
N Independence Oay, Labor Day, Columbus Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving
Day and Christmas Day, in which weather or other conditions, not under
the control of the CONTRACTOR, will permit construction of the principal
units of the work for a period of not less than seven (7) hours between
7,00 A.M. and 6;00 P.M.
ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS
Execution of Agreement;
2,1 The Agreement, Bonds and such other portions of the Contract
Documents as may be required will be executed and delivered by CON-
TRACTOR to OWNER within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the Notice
of Award, The Owner shall determine the number of counterparts requires„
The OWNER will execute the counterparts, OWNER, CONTRACTOR Cnd ENGINEER
F&N-78 GC-3
}
i
i
i
shall each receive an executed counterpart of the Contract Documents i
and additional conformed copies as required,
Delivery of Bonds;
2,2. When he delivers the executed Agreement to OWNER, CONTRACTOR
shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as he may be required to furnish
in accordance with paragraph 5.1 and 5,4.
Copies of Documents;
2.3. OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to ten (10) copies (unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions) of the Contract
Documents as are reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work.
Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of re-
+r.: production.
i, Contractor's Pre-Start Representations,
2.4, CONTRACTOR represents that he has familiarized himself with,
and assumes full responsibility for having familiarized himself with,
the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, locality, and
with all local conditions and federal, state and local laws, ordinances,
rules and regulations that may in any manner affect performance of the
Work, and represents that he has correlated his study and observations
with the requirements of the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR also represents
that he has studied all surveys and investigation reports of subsurface
and latent physical conditions referred to in the Contract Documents j
and will make such additional surveys and investigations as he deems
necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price in accordance ,
with the requirements of the Contract Documents and that he has correlated
the results of all such data with the requirements of the Contract Documents,
Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed;
2.5. The Contract Time will commence on, and include, the day following
the date established in the Notice to Proceed issued by Owner to Contractor.
Starting the Project:
2.6, CONTRACTOR shall start to perform his obligations under the
Contract Documents on the date when the Contract Time commences to run, i
No Work shall be done at the site prior to the date on which the Contract F
Time commences to run.
i
FEN-78 GC-4
i
f ,
• h
'T
Before Starting Construction:
4
2.7. Before undertaking the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully
study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent
figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. He shall
at once report in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error or discrepancy
which he may discover.
2,8, Within ten (10) days after delivery of the executed Agree-
ment by OWNER to CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for
approval, an estimated progress schedule indicating the starting and
completion dates of the various stages of the Work, and a preliminary
schedule of Shop Drawing submissions. 1
2.9, When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements the CONTRACTOR
shall furnish OWNER and ENGINEER certificates of insurance as required
by Article 5. After delivery of the executed Agreement by OWNER to
CONTRACTOR, but before starting the Work at the site, a conference
will be held to review the above schedules, to establish procedures
for handling Shop Drawings and other submissions and for processing
Applications for Payment, and to establish a working understanding
between the parties as to the Project. Present at the conference will
be OWNER or his representative, ENGINEER, Resident Project Representatives,
CONTRACTOR and his Superintendent,
ARTICLE 3 - CORRELATION, INTERPRETATION AND INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS i
3.1. It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings to de-
scribe a complete Project to be constructed in accordance with the
Contract Documents. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agree-
ment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. They may be altered only by a
i Modification.
3.2. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called
for by one is as binding as if called for by all. If CONTRACTOR finds
i a conflict, error or- discrepancy in the Contract Documents, he shall
r call it to ENGINEER's attention in writing at once and before pro-
ceeding with the Work affected thereby, Any Work that may reasonably
be inferred from the Specifications or Drawings as being required to
produce the intended result shall be supplied whether or not it is
specifically called for. Work, materials or equipment described in
words which so applied have a well-known technical or trade meaning,
shall be deemed to refer to such recognized standards.
FAN-78 GC-5
Y
I
j
ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS: PHYSICAL CONDITIONS: REFERENCE: POINTS
Availability of Lands:
!
4.1, OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract documents
and not later than the date when needed by CONTRACTOR, or such later I
date as set forth in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the
Work is to be done, rights-,)f-way for access thereto, and such other
lands which are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR. Easements for
permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will
be obtained and paid for by OWNER, unless otherwise specified in the
Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that any delay in OWNER's
furnishing these lands or easements entitles him to an extension of
the Contract Time, he may make a claim therefor as provided in Article
12, CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto
that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage
of materials and equipment.
Physical Conditions - Surveys and Reports:
4,2. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identi-
fication of those surveys and investigation reports of subsurface and
latent physical conditions at the Project site or otherwise affecting
performance of the Work which have been relied upon by ENGINEER in preparation
of the Drawings and Specifications, The data is for general information
and the OWNER and ENGINEER do not guarantee the accuracy,
Unforseer, Physical Conditions:
4.3. CONTRACTOR shall, within three (3) days after discovery, notify I
OWNER and ENGINEER in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions
at the site differing materially from those indicated in the Contract
Documents, ENGINEER will-investigate those conditions and advise OWNER
in writinq if further surveys or subsurface tests are necessary, Thereafter,
a a the necessary additional surveys and tests and furnish
copies to ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR, If ENGINEER finds that the results
of such surveys or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent ;
physical conditions which differ materially from those intended in the
Contract Documents and which could not reasonably have been anticipated
or discovered by CONTRACTOR through his efforts as represented pursuant
to Article 2.4 of these General Conditions, a Change Order may be issued
incorporating the necessary revisions,
.
r Reference Points:
4.4. OWNER shall provide engineering surveys for construction to
establish reference points which in his judgment are necessary to enable i
F&N-18 GC-6
I
E ,
,V
7
>z CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible
for surveying and laying out the Work (unless otherwise provided in
the Supplementary Conditions), and shall protect and preserve the
established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations
t 1 without the prior written approval of OWNER. He shall report to ENGINEER
whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation
because of necessary changes in grades or locations. CONTRACTOR shall
replace and accurately relocate all reference points so lost, destroyed
' or moved.
i
ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE
Performance, Payment and Other Bonds; ,
'I 5.1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and payment Bonds as
security for the faithful performance and payment of all his obligations
under the Contract Dccuments. These Bonds shall be in amounts at least
equal to the Contract Price, and (except as otherwise provided in the
Supplementary Conditions) in such form as set forth in the Contract
Documents and with such corporate sureti.ss as are licensed to conduct
business in the state where the Project is located and are named in
the current list of "Surety Companies Acceptable on federal Bonds" as
published in the Federal Register by the Audit Staff BurEau of Accounts,
U. S. Treasury Department. The performance bond and payment bond shall
be extended to include the Correction Period set forth in Article 13.10.
5.2. If the surety on any Bond furnished by CONTRACTOR is declared
a bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated
in any state where any part of the Project is located is revoked, CONTRACTOR
shall within five (5) days thereafter substitute another Bond and surety,
both of which shall be acceptable to OWNER,
Contractor's Insurance Requirements;
5,3, CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will
protect him from claims under workmen's compensation laws, disability
r benefit laws or other similar employee benefit laws; from claims for
damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease,
or death of his employees, and claims insured by usual personal injury
liability coverage; from claims for damages because of bodily injury,
sickness or disease, or death of any person other than his employees
' including claims insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
and from claims for injury to or destruction of tangible property, in-
cluding loss of use resulting therefrom - any or all of which may arise
out of or result from CONTRACTOR's operations under the Contract Documents,
whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or anyone
F&N-78 GC-7
r
I IT
F
i
1
1
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any
of them may be legally liable. This insurance shall include the specific
or yreand
coverage and t1written for not less than any ittions liability
quired
maximum deductibles specified in the Supplementary Condi
by law, whichever is greater, shall include contractual liability insurancp
and shall include OWNER and ENGINEER as additional insured parties,
The Contractor shall maintain such additional insurance as he may deem
appropriate. With the execution of the Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall
a.
file with OWNER and ENGINEER certificates of such insurance, acceptab e
to OWNER; these certificates shall contain a provision that the cover-
age afforded under the policies will not cancwrielledttenornotmatericeialhalsybeen
changed until at least fifteen (15) days' prior
given to OVINER and ENGINEER.
Additional ponds and Insurance;
5.4, prior to delivery, of the executed Agreement by OWNER to CON-
TRACTOR, OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish such other Bonds and
such additional insurance, in such form and with such sureties or insurers
as OWNER may require. If such other Bonds or such other insurance are
specified by written instructions given prior to opening of Bids, sthe hall
premiums shall be paid by CONTRACTOR; If subsequent thereto, they
be paid by OWNER (except as otherwise provided in paragraph 6.7). j
ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Supervision and Superintendence: ,(1
6,1. CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work efficiently F
with his best skill and attention. He shall be solely responsible for {
the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction
and safety at the site, CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible to see
that the finished Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents,
CON ll be ciemplntend ENGINEERdependent
con ;
6,2. CONTRACTOR shall keep at the project site at all times during
its progress of the work a competent residensuperintendent,who shall
not be replaced without written notice to OWNER
under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be CONTRACTOR's
representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf
as All given commvnications CONTRACTOR, to the superintendent shall
CONTRACTOR.
be as
F&N-78 GC-8
,
r~ 1
1
l
Y'
Labor, Materials and Equipment:
6.3. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified person-
nel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required
by the Contract Documents. He shall at all times maintain good disci-
pline and order at the site.
6.4. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, equipment, labor,
transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, ap-
pliances, fuel, ppower, light heat, telephone, water and sanitary
facilities and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the
execution, testing, initial operation and completion of the Work.
6.5. All materials and equipment which is to be incorporated
into the Project shall be newI.except as otherwise provided in the
Contract Documents. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall furnish
satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equip-
ment.
6.6. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed,
connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with
the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator or pro-
cessors, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The
v CONTRACTOR shall furnish the OWNER with four (4) sets of all operating
instructions, maintenance nianuals and parts list for all mechanical
and electrical equipment furnished for the project.
Substitute Materials or Equipment:
6.7. If the Specifications, law, ordinance or applicable rules
` or regulations permit CONTRACTOR to furnish or use a substitute that
r is equal to any material or equipment specified, and if CONTRACTOR
wishes to furnish or use a proposed substitute, he shall, prior to
the conference called for by paragraph 2,9, make written application
to ENGINEER for approval of such a substitute certifying in writing
that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the functions
called for by the general design, be similar and of equal substance
to that specified and be suited to the same use and capable of per-
A forming the same function as that specified; and identifying all vari-
ations of the proposed substiute from that specified and indicating
available maintenance service. No substitute shall be ordered or in-
stalled without the written approval of ENGINEER who will be the Judge
of equality and many require CONTRACTOR to furnish such other data
about the proposed substitute as he considers pertinent. No substitute
shall be ordered or installed without such performance guarantee and
bonds as OWNER may require which shall be furnished at CONTRACTOR's
expense.
F&N-78 GC-9
1
I
1
-
Concerning Subcontractors;
i
6.8. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor or other person
or organization (including those who are to furnish the principal items
of materials or equipment), whether initially or as a substitute, against
whom OWNER may have reasonable objection, Acceptance of any Subcontractor,
other person or organization by OWNER shall not constitute a waiver of
ti.y any right of OWNER to reject defective Work or Work not in conformance
with the Contract Documents. If OWNER after due investigation has reasonable
f objection to any Subcontractor, other person or organization proposed
by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall submit an acceptable substitute. CONTRACTOR
shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, other person or organization
against whom he has reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not without
the consent of OWNER make any substitution for any Subcontractor, other
person or organization who has been accepted by OWNER.
6,9. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for all acts and omis-
sicns of his Subcontractors and of persons and organizations directly
or indirectly employed by them and of persons and organizations for whose
acts any of them may be liable to the same extent that he is responsible
for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him, Nothing
F in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship be-
tween OWNER or ENGINEER and any Subcontractor or other person or organization
having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR, nor shall it create any obligation
on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to pay or to see to the payment of any
moneys due any Subcontractor or other person or organization, except
as may otherwise be required by law. OWNER or ENGINEER may furnish to
any Subcontractor or other person or organization, to the extent practicable,
evidence of amounts paid to CONTRACTOR on account of specific Work done
in ac.ordance with the schedule of values,
6.10. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the l-
identifications of any Drawings shall not control CONTRACTOR in dividing
the Work among Subcontractors or delineating the Work to be performed
by any specific trade.
6.11. CONTRACTOR agrees to bind specifically every Subcontractor
to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for
the benefit of OWNER,
t
Patent Fees and Royalties;
6.12, CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume
all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work and the
completed Project of any invention, design, process, product or device
which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others,
i
I
j F&N-78 GC-10
.
.j
CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER and ENGINEER and anyone
directly or indirectly employed by either of them from and against all
I claims, damages, losses and expenses (including attorneys' fees) arising
out of any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the
use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation
in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device and
` shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement
of such rights.
6.13. CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits
and 'licenses and shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees
necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the
time of his Bid, OWNER shall assist CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining
such permits and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all public utility charges.
1
Laws and Regulations:
6.14. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all laws,
ordinances, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. If CONTRACTOR
observes that the Specifications or Drawings are at variance therewith,
he shall give ENGINEER prompt written notice thereof, and any necessary
changes shall be adjusted by an appropriate Modification. If CONTRACTOR
performs any Work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations,
and without such notice to ENGINEER, he shall bear all costs arising
therefrom.
Taxes:
6.15, CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar
taxes required to be paid by him in accordance with the law of the place
where the Work is to be performed,
Use of Premises:
6.16. CONTRACTOR shall confine his equipment, the storage of materials
and equipment and the operations of his workmen to areas permitted by
law, ordinances, permits, or the requirements of the Contract Documents,
and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with materiais or equipment.
6,17. CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure
to be loaded with weights that will endanger the structure, nor shall
t he subject any part of the Work to stresses or pressures that will endanger
it.
19 Record Drawings:
6.18. CONTRACTOR shall keep one record copy of all Specifications,
a Drawings, Addenda, Modifications, and Shop Drawings at the site in good
F&N-78 GC-11
J
1
S
order and annotated to show all changes made during the construction
process, These shall be available to ENGINEER and shall be delivered
to trim for OWNER upon completion of the Project.
Safety and Protection:
6.19. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining
" and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with
the Work. He shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, 1
' and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury
i 'art or loss to,
6.19.1. all employees on the Project site and other persons
who may be, affected thereby, q
6,19.2. all the Work and all materials or equipment to be y
incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, and
6.73.3. other property at the site or adjacent thereto,
including, but not limited to, trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pave-
ments, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal,
relocation or replacement in the course of construction,
CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for the
safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury
or loss. He shall erect and maintain, as required by the conditions +
and progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for its safety and 1
protection, He shall notify owners of adjacent utilities when prosecution
of the Work may affect them. All damage, injury or loss to any property
referred to in paragraph 6.19,2 or 6,19.3 caused, directly or indirectly, i
in whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or anyone directly i
or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any
of them may be liable, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR's
duties and responsibilities for the safety and protection of the Work
? shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER
has issued a notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph
14.12 that Work is acceptable,
Emergencies:
6.20, In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property,
the CONTRACTOR shall act, at his discretion, to prevent threatened
damage, injury or loss, Any additional compensation or extension of
i time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work shall be
jj determined as provided in Article 11 and 12 for Changes in the Work,
3
FSN-78 GC-12
i '
i
y
Shop Drawings and Samples:
n
6.21. After checking and verifying all field measurements, CONTRACTOR
shall submit to ENGINEER for approval, in accordance with the accepted
schedule of Shop Drawing submissions (see paragraph 2.8) five copies
(or at ENGINEER's option, one reproducible copy) of all Shop Drawings,
which shall have been checked by and stamped with the approval of CONTRACTOR
and identified as ENGINEER may require. The data shown on the Shop Drawings
will be complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials
of construction and the like to enable ENGINEER to review the information
as required. i
6,22, CONTRACTOR shall also submit to ENGINEER for approval with
i such promptness as to cause no delay in Work, all samples required by
the Contract Documents. All samples will have been checked by and stamped
with the approval of CONTRACTOR, identified clearly as to material, manu-
facturer, any pertinent catalog numbers and the use for which intended, !
6.23, At the time of each submission, CONTRACTOR shall in writing
call ENGINEER's attention to any deviations that the Shop Drawings or
4 sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
6.24. ENGINEER will review and approve with reasonable promptness
Shop Drawings and samples, but his review and approval shall be only
for conformance with the design concept of the Project and for compliance
with the information given in the Contract Documents, The approval of k
a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in
F which the item functions. CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required
by ENGINEER and shall return the required number of corrected copies
of Shop Drawing; and resubmit new samples until approved, CONTRACTOR
shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the
corrections called for by ENGINEER on previous submissions, CONTRACTOR's !
stamp of approval on any Shop Drawing or sample shall constitute a repre-
sentation to OWNER and ENGINEER that CONTRACTOR has either determined
and verified all quantitia,,, dimensions, field construction criteria,
materials, catalog numbers, and similar data or he assumes full responsibility
for doing so, and that he has reviewed or coordinated each Shop Drawing
or sample with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.
f
6,25. Where a Shop Drawing or sample submission is required by
the Specifications, no related Work shall be commenced until the submission
j has been approved by ENGINEER. A copy of each approved Shop Drawing
and each approve, sample shall be kept in good order by CONTRACTOR at
the site and shall be available to ENGINEER,
i ^
t
F&N-78 GC-13
1
t
y
ti
i
1
I
` 6,26. ENGINEER's a
relieve CONTRACTOR from hisoresponsibility aforganyrdeviationshfromnot
the requirements of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in
writing called ENGINEER's attention to such deviation at the time of
submission and ENGINEER has given written approval to the specific
deviation, nor shall any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR from
responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings,
Cleaning: y
6.27. CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from accumulations
of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work,
and at the completion of the Work he shall remove dll waste materials,
rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools,
construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials, and shall
leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER. CONTRACTOR
shall restore to their original condition those portions of the site
E not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
Indemnification:
6,28, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER and
ENGINEER and their agents and employees from and against all claims,
damages, losses and expenses including, but not limited to, attorneys'
fees arising out of or resulting from any act, omission or defect connected i
with the performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage,
loss or expense (a) is attributable to bodily Injury, sickness disease
or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property other
than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom
and (b) is caused in whole or in part by any condition of premises
or materials, act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not is caused
in part negligently or otherwise, by a party indemnified hereunder,
6,24, In any and all claims against OWNER or ENGINEER or any
of their agents or employees by any employee of CONTRACTOR, any Sub-
contractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification
obligation under paragraph 6,28 shall not be limited in any way by
1 any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits
j payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractor under workmen's com-
pensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts,
F&N-78
GC-14
E
11 '
,
a.
ARTICLE 7 - WORK BY OTHERS
> 7.1. OWNER may perform additional work related to the Project
by himself, or he may let other direct contracts. CONTRACTOR shall
afford the other contractors who are parties to such direct contracts
(or OWNER, if he is performing the additional work himself), reasonable
opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equip-
ment and the execution of work, and shall properly connect and co- 1
ordinate his Work with theirs.
7.2. If any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends for proper
ENGINE (oi
.E OWNER) cCONTRACTORtshall Inspectkand promptly oetheprortcontractor
writing any defects or deficiencies in such work that trenderNitRun-
suitable for such proper execution and result. His failure so to report
shall constitute an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper
for the relationship of his Work except as to defects and deficiencies
which may appear in the other work after the execution of his Wnrk.
7.3. CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of
his Work that may be required to make its several parts come toether
k properly and fit it to receive or be received by such other work.
CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, exca-
vating or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter ,
their work with the written consent of ENGINEER and of the other con-
tractors whose work will be affected,
7.4. If the performance of additional work by other contractors
or OWNER is not noted in the Contract Documents prior to the execution
of the Agreement, notice thereof shall be given to CONTRACTOR prior
to starting any such additional work. !
ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
l 8,1. OWNER shall issue all communications to CONTRACTOR through
ENGINEER,
8.2. In case of termination of the employment of ENGINEER OWNER
shall appoint an engineer against whom CONTRACTR makes no unreason-
I able objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall he
that of the former ENGINEER. Any dispute in connection with such ap-
pointment shall be subject to arbitration.
~ 8.3, ,
OWNER shall furnish the data required of him under thn
k Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments promptly after they are due as provided in argraphso14.4TandT14,12,
a,
P&N-78 GC-15
F
r
8.4. OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands and easements
and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set
forth in paragraphs 4.1 and 4.4, Paragraph 4.2 refers to OWNER's identifying
4 and making available to CONTRACTOR copies of surveys and investigation
reports of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or other-
wise affecting performance of the Work which have been relied upon by
ENGINEER in preparing the Drawings and Specifications.
8,5. OWNER's responsibility in respect of certain inspections,
. tests and approvals is set forth in paragraph 13.2.
I
f' 8.6. In connection with OWNER 's right to stop Work or suspend Work,
` see paragraphs 13.8 and 15.1. Paragraph 15,2 deals with OWNER s right
to terminate services of CONTRACTOR ur+der certain circumstances.
ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
Owner's Representative:
' 9,1, ENGINEER will be OWNER 's representative during the construction
period unless the OWNER advises the CONTRACTOR of other arrangements.
The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of ENGINEER
as OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in Articles
1 through 17 of these General Conditions and shall not be extended without
written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER, f
Visits to Site,
9.2. The ENGINEER will make visits to the site to familiarize himself
generally with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine
in general if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract
Documents. On the basis of his on-site observations as an ENGINEER,
he will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the Work, and will
endeavor to gguard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work the or continuous O on O-site The inspections will
chnot eckbtherequire
quantityuofive
ualitytormake
the Work.
Clarifications and Interpretations;
9.3. ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written
clarifications or interpretations of the Contract Documents (in the farm
of Drawings or otherwise) as he may determine necessary, which shall
be consistent with or reasonably inferable from the overall intent of
y the Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification
b
FAN-78 GC-16
k
i
v
1
J
and interpretation entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price,
he may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11.
Rejecting Defective Work;
' 9.4. ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or reject Work
which is "defective" (which term is hereinafter used to describe Work
that is unsatisfactory, faulty or defective, or does not conform to the
requirements of the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements
of the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any in-
spection, test or approval referred to in paragraph 13.2 or has been
damaged prior to approval of final payment). He will also have authority
to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in para-
graph 13.71 whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments:
9.5. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibility for Shop Drawings
and samples, see paragraphs 6.21 through 6.26 inclusive, j
9.6. In connection with ENGINEER's responsibility for Change Orders, 1
see Articles 10, 11 and 12,
917. In connection with ENGINEER'S responsibilities in respect
of Applications for Payment, etc., see Article 14,
Resident Project Representatives,
9,8. If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will furnish a Resident I
Project Representative and assistants to assist ENGINEER in carrying
out his responsibilites at the site, The duties, responsibilities and
limitations of authority of any such Resident Project Representative
and assistants shall be as set forth in the Supplemental Conditions.
t
1
Decisions on Disagreements,
9.9. ENGINEER will be the interpreter of the requirements of the
j Contract Documents and the judge of the performance thereunder. In his
{ capacity as interpreter and judge ENGINEER will exercise his best efforts
to insure faithful performance by both OWNER and CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER
j will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for the result
of any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith. Claims, disputes
and other matters relating to the execution and progress of the Work
or the interpretation of or performance under the Contract Documents
4
( 1
3
F&N-78 GC-17
i
i!
4
,y
-7 T
I
a shall be referred to ENGINEER for decision; which he will render in
i writing within a reasonable time.
9.10: Either OWNER or CO"!TRACTOR may demand a=,)itration with
respect to any such claim, dispute or other macter that has been re-
ferred to ENGINEER, except any which have been waived by he making
or acceptance of final payment as provided in paragraph 14,15, such
arbitration to be in accordance with Article 16. However, no demand
for arbitration of any such claim, dispute or other matter shall be
made until the earlier of (a) the date on which ENGINEER has rendered
his decision or (b) the tenth (10th) day after the parties have presented
their evidence to ENGINEER if he has not rendered hi: written decision
before that date. No demand for arbitration shall be made later than .
thirty (30) days after the date on which ENGINEER rendered his written
decision in respect of the claim, dispute or other matter as to which
arbitration is sought; and the failure to demand arbitration within
said thirty (30) days' period shall result in ENGINEER's decision being
final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, If ENGINEER renders a
decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision
may be entered as evidence but shall not supersede the arbitration
proceedings, except where the decision is acceptable to the parties
concerned.
Limitations on ENGINEER's Responsibilities:
9,11, Neither ENGINEER's authority to act under this Article 9
or elsewhere in the Contract Documents nor any decision made by him
in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority shall
give rise to any duty or responsibility of ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR,
any Subcontractor, any materialman, fabricator, supplier or any of
their agents or employees or any other person performing any of the
Work.
9.12, ENGINEER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the
safety precautioi,s and programs incident thereto, and he will not be
responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the work in accordance
with the Contract Documents, The ENGINEER shall have no responsibility
with respect to safety and has no obligation to see that the CONTRACTOR's
safety obligations are fulfilled,
9.13, ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or ormissions
of CONTRACTOR, or any Subcontractor, or any of his cr their agents
or employees, or any other persons at the site or otherwise performing
I any of the Work,
3
RR
j
i
F&N-78 GC-18
f
if
r
I
ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
10.1. Without invalidating the Agreement, OWNER may, at any time
or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the
Work, these will be authorized by Change Orders. Upon receipt of o
Change Order, CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the Work involved, All
such Work shall be executed under the applicable conditions of the
Contract Documents. If any Change Order causes an increase or de-
crease in the Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the
Contract Time, an equitable adjustment will be made as provided in
Article 11 or Article 12 on 'he basis of a claim made by either party.
I 1
10,2, ENGINEER may authorize minor changes or alterations in
the Work not involving extra cost or contract time and not incon-
sistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents. These may
he accomplished by a Field Order, If CONTRACTOR believes that any
minor change or alteration authorized by ENGINEER entities him to an
increase in the Contract Price or Contract Time, he shall not proceed
' with the work and shall in writing advise the ENGINEER and request a
Change Order,
l 10.3. Additional Work performed by CONTRACTOR without author-
ization of a Change Order will not entitle hiai to claim an increase
in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, except I
In the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.20 and except
as p ovided in paragraph 13.7,
10,4, OWNER, after consideration and approval, may execute ap-
propriate Change Orders prepared by ENGINEER covering changes in the
Work to be performed as provided in paragraph 4,3, and Work performed
in an emergency as provided in paragraph 6,20 and any other claim of
CONTRACTOR for a change in the Contract Time or the Contract Price
which is approved by ENGINEER.
ARTICLE 11 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE
11.1. The Contract Price constitu~es the total compensatior pay-
able to CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties, responsi.
bilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by CONTRACTOR shall
be at h•s expense without change in the Contract Price,
11.2, The Contrast ?rice may only be changed by a Change Order,
Any claim for an increase in the Contract Price shall be based on written
notice delivered to OWNER and ENGINEER within ten (10) days of the
occurrerc,s of thc; event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount
of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within thirty
(30) days of such occurrence unless ENGINEER allows an additional
l~
FAN-78 GC-19
1
period of time to ascertain accurate cost data. All claims for ad-
3
Sustments in the Contract Price shall be determined by ENGINEER if
OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree on the amount involved,
11.3, The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any
claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be de-
termined in one of the following ways: i
11.311. Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices
contained in the Contract Documents, by application of unit prices
to the quantities of the items involved, unless actual quantities
differ from bid quantities by twenty (20%) percent. Revised con-
sideration will be given to that portion in excess of the twenty
(20%) percent difference subject to mutual acceptance of a revised ;
unit price.
t 11.3.2 By mutual acceptance of a lump sum,
11.3.3 On the basis of the actual cost directly related y
to the Work plus a Contractor's Fee for overhead and profit in
the amount of fifteen (15%) pertent. The actual cost shall be
limited to: labor, including foremen; materials entering perma-
nently into the work; the ownership or rental cost of construction
plant and equipment during the time of use on the extra work;
power and consumable supplies for the operation of power equip-
ment; insurance; and social security and old age and unemploy-
ment contributions.
11,4, The amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER
for any such change which results in a not decrease in cost, will be
the amount of the actual net decrease which decrease shall include
a CONTRACTOR's Fee for overhead and profit in the amount of fifteen
(15%) percent, When both additions and credits are involved in any
one change, the CONTRACTOR's fee of fifteen (15%) percent shall be
figured on the basis .)f the net increase, if any.
11.5. Whenever the cost of any Work is to be determined pursuant
to paragraph 11 CONTRACTOR will submit in form prescribed by ENGINEER
an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.
ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF THE CONTRACT TIMc
12,1. The Contract Time may only be changer by a Change Order.
Any claim for an extension in the Contract Time shalt be based on written
notice de'ivered to OWNER and ENGINEER within ten (10) days of the
occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim, Notice of the extent
FAN-78 GC-20
{
I
f
i
of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within thirty
(30) days of such occurrence unless ENGINEER allows an additional period
of time to ascertain more accurate data. All claims for adjustment
in the Contract Time shall be determined by ENGINEER if OWNER and CON-
TRACTOR cannot otherwise agree. Any change in the Contract Time re-
sulting from any such claim shall be incorporated in a Change Order,
12.2. The Contract Time will be extended Ii an amount equal to
time lost due to delays beyond the control of CONTRACTOR if he makes
a claim therefor as provided in paragraph 12.1. Such delays shall
include, but not be restricted to, acts or neglect by any separate
contractor employed by OWNER, fires, floods, labor disputes, epidemics,
or acts of God other Dan weather conditions. No time extensions will
be allowed for weather conditions for Project using calendar days for 1
the Contract Time.
'J 12.3 The CONTRACTOR agrees that time is of the essence of this
contract, and that for each day of delay beyond the number of days
herein agreed upon for the completion of the work herein specified
{ and contrarted for (after due allowance of such extension of time as
is provided for in Article 12) the OWNER may withhold permanently from
the CONTRACTOR's total compensation, the amount per day set forth in
Supplementary Conditions, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages
and for added expense for engineering services, etc,
ARTICLE 13 - WARRANTY AND 61JARANTEE: TESTS AND INSPECTIONS: CORRECTION,
REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK I
Warranty and Guarantee:
13.1, CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER and E"F.:INEER
that all materials and equipment will be new unless otherwise specified
and that all Work will be of good quality and free from faults or defects
ain accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and '
o, ny inspections, tests or approvals referred to in paragraph 13.2,
All unsatisfactory Work, all faulty or defective Work, and all Work
not conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents at the l
time of acceptance thereof or of such inspections, tests or approvals,
shall be considered defective. Prompt notice of all defects shall
be given to CONTRACTOR. All defective Work, whether or not in place,
may be rejected, corrected or accepted as provided in this Article 13,
Tests and Inspections,
.
13.2. If the Contract Document, laws, ordinances, rules, regu-
lations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require
4
F&N-78 GC-2l
• Y
L
I any Work to specifically be inspected, tested, or approved by some J
public body, CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility therefor.
pay all costs in connection therewith and rovalsh A11lothertinspertions,
certificates of inspectioo, testing or app
tests and approvals required by the Contract Documents shall be per-
formed by organizations selected by OWNER and the costs thereof shall
be borne by OWNER unless otherwise specified. /
13.3. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice of readiness
of the Work for all inspections, tests or approvalscovIf any uch tWork
be a
required to be inspected, tittmustr ifprequested by ENGINEERthou
written approval of ENGINEER,
uncovered for observation, and such uncovering shall be at CONTRACTOR'S i
' expense unless CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of his intention
to cover such Work and ENGINEER has not acted with reasonable promptness
in response to such notice.
13.4. Neither observations by ENGINEER nor inspections, tests
or approvals by persons other than CONTRACTOR shall relieve CONTRACTOR
dtserform the Work in accordance with the requirements
from his obligations to
of the Contract
k t. Access to Work;
13.5. ENGINEER and his representatives and other representatives
of OWNER will at reasonable times have access to the Work, CONTRACTOR observ shall PWorkdandralso fon any inspectionsorotestingathereofnby others.
of the
Uncovering Work;
uncoveredefor ue5t
I any Work ited by ENGINEER, the
of ENGINEER, it must, If requested
ENGINEER's observation and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense.
13.7. If any Work has been covered which ENGINEER has not speci-
fically requested to observe prior to its being covered, or if ENGINEER
rt considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be inspected
or tested, CONTRACTOR, at ENGINEER's request, shall uncover, expose
or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing
as ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing
all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such
Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall bear all the expenses of such un-
covering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satis-
factory reconstruction, udedgctiveeChangenOrderadditlonaliprofessional
services, and an app priate
If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall
GC-22
F&N-7Q ,
1
be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
I
Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to such un^overiny, exposure,
observation, inspection, testing and reconstruction it he makes a claim
therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
Owder May Stop the Work;
}
13,6. If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails to supply
sufficient skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment, or fails
to conform to the progress schedule required by Paragraph 14.1, or
if CONTRACTOR fails to make prompt payments to Subcontractors or for
. labor, materials or equiprrant, OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the
Work, or. any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated; however, this right of OWNER to stop the Work shall not
give rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to exercise this right for
the benefit of CONTRACTOR or any other party.
Correction or Removal of Defective Work:
13.9. If required by ENGINEER prior to approval of final payment,
CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and as specified by
ENGINEER, either correct any defective Work, whether or not fabricated,
installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by ENGINEER,
remove it from the site and replace It with nondefective Work. If
CONTRACTOR does not correct such defective Work or remove and replace
such rejected Work within a reasonable time, all as specified in a
written notice from ENGINEER, OWNER may have the deficiency corrected
or the rejected Vbrk removed and replaced. All direct or indirect
costs of such correction nr removal and replacement, including compen-
sation for additional professional services, shall be paid by CONTRACTOR,
and an appropriate deductive Chdnge Order shall be issued, CONTRACTOR
shall also bear the expenses of making good all Work of others destroyed
R or damaged by his correction, remova-r or ^eplacement of his defective
ix Work.
One Year Correction Period:
13.10. If, after the approval of final payment and prior to the
expiration of one year thereafter or such longer period of time as
may be prescribed by law rjr by the terms of any applicable special
3 guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any Work is found to
be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and
in accordance with OWNER's written instructions, either correct such
defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from
the site and replace it with nondefective Work. If CONTRACTOR does
not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, OWNER may
have the defective Work corrected or the rejected Wrirk removed and
1
i
rj
F&N-7A GC-23
r
I
replaced, and all direct and indirect costs of such removal and re-
placement, including compensation for additional professional services,
shall be paid by CONTRACTOR.
Acceptance of Defective Work:
13.11. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replace-
ment of defective Work, OWNER prefers to accept it, he may do so.
In such case, if acceptance occurs prior to approval of final payment,
a Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions
in the Contract Documents, including appropriate reduction in the Con-
tract Price; or, if the acceptance occurs after approval of final pay-
ment, an appropriate amount shall be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER.
{ Neglected Work by Contractor:
13.12. If CONTRACTOR should fail to prosecute the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents, including any requirements of the progress
r schedule. OWNER, after seven (7) days' written notice to CONTRACTOR
may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such
deficiencies and the cost thereof (including compensation for additional
professional services) shall be charged against CONTRACTOR in which
case a Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary,revisions
in the Contract Documents including an appropriate reduction in the
Contract Price. If the payments then or thereafter due CONTRACTOR
are not sufficient to cover such amount, CONTRACTOR shall pay the dif-
ference to OWNER.
ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
Schedules:
14.1. At least ten (10) days prior to submitting the first Appli-
cation for a progress payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit a progress schedule,
r a final schedule of Shop Drawing submission and a schedule of values
of the Work. These schedules shall be satisfactory in form and sub-
stance to ENGJNEER. The schedule of values shall include quantities
and unit prices aggregating the Contract Price, and shall subdivide
the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the
basis for progress payments during construction. Upon approval of
the schedules of values by ENGINEER, it shall be incorporated into
the form of Application for Payment furnished by ENGINEER.
Application for Progress Payment:
14.2. At least ten (10) days before each progress payment fails
due (but not more often than once a month), CONTRACTOR shall submit to
F&N-1a GC-24
i
ENGINEER for review an Application for Payment on a form supplied by
the OWNER filled out and certified by CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed
as of the date of the Application. If payment is requested on the basis
of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered
and suitably stored at the site, the Application for Payment shall also
be accompanied by such data as required by OWNER, Each subsequent Appli-
cation for Payment shall also include an affidavit of CONTRACTOR stating
that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have
been applied to discharge in full all of CONTRACTOR's obligations reflected
in prior Applications for Payment, The CONTRACI':R shall certify on each
Application for Payment that the Work performed to date complies wfth '
the Contract Documents,
Contractor's Warranty of Title:
14.3. CONTRACTOR warrants ,ind guarantees that title to all Work,
materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether
incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to OWNER at the time of
payment free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests and encumb-
rances (hereinafter in these General Conditions referred to as "Liens").
z' Approval of Payments;
14.4. ENGINEER will, within ten (10) days after receipt of each
Application for Payment, either indicate in writing his approval of payment
and present the Application to OWNER, or return the Application to CONTRACTOR
indicating in writing his reasons for refusing to approve payment, In
the latter case, CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit
the Application. OWNER shall, within ten (10) days of presentation to
him of the approved Application for Payment, pay CONTRACTOR the amount
approved by ENGINEER less ten (10%) percent of the amount thereof which
shall be retained until Final Payment and less all other sums that may
be retained by the OWNER as set forth in the Contract Documents.
14.5. ENGINEER's approval of any payment requested in an Application
for Payment will constitute a representation by him to OWNER, based on
ENGINEER's on-site observations of the Work in progress as an experienced
M and qualified design professional and on his review of the Application
for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules that the Work has
progressed to the point indicated; that, to the best of his knowledge,
information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with
the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functionin
Project upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent g
t' tests called for in the Contract Documents and any qualifications stated
in his approval); and that CONTRACTOR is entitled to payment of the amount
approved, However, by approving any such payment ENGINEER will not thereby
V
ii F&N-78 GC-25
s
1
,
be deemed to have represented that he made exhaustive or continuous on-
site inspections to check the quality or the quantity of the Work, or
that he has reviewed the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and pro-
cedures of construction, or that he has made any examination to ascertain
how or for what purpose CONTRACTOR has used the moneys paid or to be
paid to him on account of the Contract Price, or that title to any Work,
materials or equipment has passed to OWNER free and clear of any Liens,
14.6. ENGINEER may refl,s:e to approve the whole or any part of any
' payment if, in his opinion, to would be incorrect to make such representations
to OWNER, He may also refuse to approve any such payment, or because
of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections
or tests, nullify any such payment previously approved, to such extent
as may be necessary in his opinion to protect OWNER from loss because;
14.6.1, the Work is defective, or completed Work has been i
damaged requiring correction or replacement,
14.6.2, claims or Liens have been filed or ther,1 is reason-
able cause to believe such may be filed,
' 'A 14.6.3. the Contract Price has been reduced because of Modifications,
14,6.4. OWNER has been required to correct defective Work
or complete the Work in accordance with paragraph 13,11, or
14.6,5, of unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work, including
failure to furnish acceptable submittals or to clean up.
14.6.6, reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed
within the Contract Time,
E
14.6.7, reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for I
the unpaid balance of the Contract Price,
Substantial Completion:
14.7. Prior to final payment, CONTRACTOR may, in writing to OWNER
and ENGINEER, certify that the entire Project is substantially complete
and request that ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion,
Within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall
make an inspection of the Project to determine the status of completion.
If ENGINEER does not consider the Project. substantially complete, he
will notify CONTRACTOR in writing giving his reasons therefor, If ENGINEER
considers the Project substantially complete, he will prepare and deliver
F&N-78 GC-26
i
-now" 7
i Y
\1I
I
I
41
1 i
I,
~1 I
1
All
to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall
fix the date of Substantial Completion and the responsibilities between
t OWNER and CONTRACTOR for maintenance, heat and utilities. There shall ;
be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to he completed
or corrected before final payment, and the certificate shall fix the
time within which such items shall be completed or corrected, said time
to be within the Contract Time, OWNER shall have seven (7) days after
receipt of the tentative certificate during which he may make written
objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions of the certificate or attached
list. If, after considering such objections, ENGINEER concludes that
the Project is not substantially complete, he will within fourteen (14)
days after submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER notify CONTRACTOR
In writing, stating his reasons therefor. If, after consideration of
OWNER's objections, ENGINEER considers the PROJECT substantially complete,
x he will within said fourteen (14) days execute and deliver to' OWNER and
CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a
} revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting
such charges from the tentative certificate as he believes justified
after consideration of any objections from OWNER. The failure of the
ENGINEER to include any items on such tentative list of items to be completed
s does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
14.8. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the
Project after the date of Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow
CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative
list.
Partial Utilization,
14.9. Prior to final payment, OWNER may request CONTRACTOR in writing
} to permit him to use a specified part of the Project which he believes
he may use without significant interference with construction of the
other parts of the Project. If CONTRACTOR agrees, he will certify to
OWNER and ENGINEER that said part of the Project is substantially com-
plete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion
for that part of the Project. Within a reasonable time thereafter OWNER,
CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of that part of the
Project to determine its status of completion. If ENGINEER does not
consider that it 1s substantially complete, he will notify OWNER and
CONTRACTOR in writing giving his reasons therefor, If ENGINEER considers
that part of the Project to be substantially complete, he will execute
and deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a certificate to that effect, fixing
the date of Substantial Completion as to that part of the Project, at-
taching thereto a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected
r, before final payment and fixing the responsibility between OWNER and
9
Y
f F&N-78 GC-27
CONTRACTOR for maintenance, heat and utilities as to that part of the
Project. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from any part
of the Project which ENGINEER has so certified to be substantially com-
plete, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete
or correct items on the tentative list. j
Final Inspection;
` 14.10, Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the Project is
f complete, ENGINEER will make a final inspection with OWNER and CONTRACTOR
and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this
` inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective, CONTRACTOR
shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to remedy such
deficiencies.
I Final Application for Payment; 1
14.11. After CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the
satisfaction of ENGINEER and delivered all maintenance and operating
instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates of inspection
and other documents - all as required by the Contract Documents, he may
make application for final payment following the procedure for progress
3 payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied by
such data and schedules as OWNER may reasonably require, together with
complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER)
of all Liens arising out of the Contract Documents and the labor and
services performed and the material and equipment furnished thereunder.
In lieu thereof and as approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts
or releases in full; an affidavit of CONTRACTOR that the releases and
receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which {
a Lien could be filed, and that all payrolls, material and equipment
bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which OWNER
or his property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise !
satisfied; and consent of the Surety, if any, to final payment, If any 1
Subcontractor, materialman, fabricator or supplier fails to furnish a
•elease or receipt in full, CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral
satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify him against any Lien.
Approval of Final Payment;
14.12. If, on the basis of his observation and review of the Work
during construction, his final inspection and his review of the final
inspection and his review of the final Application for Payment - all
as required by the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the
Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR has fulf;iled all of his obligations
I
J
F&N-78 GC-28
v
l
I
V
r under the Contract Documents, he will, within ten (10) days after receipt
of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing his approval
of payment and present the Application to OWNER for payment. There-
upon ENGINEER will give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that
the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.15.
Otherwise, he will return the Application to CONTRACTOR, indicating
in writing his reasons for refusing to approve final payment, in which
case CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application. OWNER shall, within ten (10) days of presentation to
him of an approved final Application for Payment, pay CONTRACTOR the
amount approved by ENGINEER.
' 14.13. If after Substantial Completion of the Work final com-
pletion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of CONTRACTOR,
and ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER, upon certification by ENGINEER, and
without terminating the Agreement, may make payment of the balance
due for than' portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If
the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is
less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have
been furnished as required in paragraph 5.1, the written consent of
the Surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the
Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR
to the ENGINEER pr,I 'or to certification of such payment. Such payment
shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
I
) Contractor's Continuing Obligation; ~
14.14, CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work and complete
the Project i+; accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute.
Neither approval of any progress or final payment by ENGINEER, nor
the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion, nor any pay-
ment by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, nor eny use
or occupancy of the Project or any part thereof by OWNER, nor and, act
of acceptance by OWNER nor any failure to do so, nor any correction
of defective work by OWNER shall constitute an acceptance of Work not
in accordance with the Contract Documents. ~
Waiver of Claims;
4.15. The making and acceptance of final payment shall consti-
tute a waiver uF all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other
those previously made in writing and still unsettled, than
r,
J
s} F&N-78 GC-29
4
M
"yq 1
ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
Suspend Work:
Owner May
at any time and without cause, susrPnd thedays Work
15.1. OWNER may,
portion thereof fora period of not more than ninety fix
and ENGINEER which shall f(go) the
or any P to CONTRACTOR T OR shal }
da CONTRACTOR rrebsume the Work
by notice in writing resumed. may be all CONTRACowed an increase inthetly
te on which Work shall b
If on the date so fixed. ectl
Contract Price or an extension if h makesracclaimetherefor as pr
attributable to any suspension in Articles 11 and 12.
' Oa .°r May Terminate; as ba 15 .2. If C t~TRACTOR iu fordthe benefinkruptoforhiinssolcrediventt, or
if he makes a general assignment o{rated for CONTRACTOR or for any
or if a trustee or receiver is to take nkruptcy aorasimi}arflaws,
i~ of his property,
debtor's act, or to reorganize under the ba skilled or sui,
fails to supply sufficie edly nt y fail$ tormake promptt
or if he repeatedly or if he repeat meet or
able materials or equipment, materials or equip
rule,,, regulations or orders of
payments to Subcontractors or for labor,
if he disregards laws, ordinances, disregards the the Contract
an public body hng jurisdiction, or if he authority
other right or
aviolates ofyENGINEER, or if he otherWithout prejudice to Surety rovianysion of
Documents, then OWNER may, seven (7) days, written
possess
and after giving CONTRACTOR and his ossession of
termin CONTRACTOR and take
reined/
ate the services of
notice, a ui ment, tools, construction equipment whatever
i the Project and of all material CONTRACTOR, and finish the Work by
and machinery thereon owned by
until 0`theAWork isfinished,
method he may deem expedient. Insuch case
entitled receive any further payment
ncluding compensation for Con if the unpaid balance feting thetProject, i exceeds bee direct
CONTRACTOR.
I
indirect costs of comp such excess shall paid
additional professional serviald'balance, CONTRACTOR shall pay the
if such costs exceed such unp OWNER shall be determined
different^. to OWNER. Such costs incurrdOrder,
bby ENGINEER and incorporated in a Change 15.3 terminated by
. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so hts te to OWNER against
all not affect any rig
OWNER, said terminations shor which may thereafter accrue. Any retention
I
CONTRACTOR then existing Or due CONTRACTOR wi11 not release CONTRACTOR `
or payment of moneys by
from liability.
3 ~
I '
1 {
GC-30
FH-78
r
I
and of workability suitable for usual cast-in-place struc-
tures.
j B. PROCEDURE IN DESIGN OF CONCRETE MIXES
1. General: The Contractor shall be responsible for the
design of the concrete consistent with the minimum
requirements of strength and proportions stated herein.
The proportions of materials entering into the mix,
subject to limitations already stated, to produce
concrete of satisfactory quality, shall be determined by
a laboratory tests prior to beginning of concrete placing.
Design shall be in accordance with ACI Standard 211.1
j "Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions of
Concrete," subject to maximum water cement ratio,
minimum cement content and minimum strengths set forth
herein,
2. Trial Mixes; An independent testing laboratory retained
by the Contractor and approved by the Owner shall deter-
mine the materials and proportions for trial concrete
7 - mixes to meet the requirements of this specification.
The laboratory trial concrete mix design shall be
submitted for the Engineer's approval before the 7-day
strength tests are made.
ti
Laboratory samples shall be made in accordance with the
a` trial mix designs for laboratory testing purposes. The
fresh concrete shall be tested for Slump (ASTM-C143) and
Air Content (ASTM-C173/C231). Strength test specimens
~f shall be made, cured and tested for 7 and 28 day
l strength in accordance with ASTM-C192, ASTM-C39,
ASTM-C293.
)1 Laboratory tests on trial mixes shall show a 28-day
strength 10 percent higher than the stated minimum 28day
strength. From these preliminary tests, the ratios
between 7-day and 28-day strenghs shall be established
~E to determine at 7 days the strengths necessary to
satisfy the required 28-day strengths. The 7-day trial
mix strength test results shall be submitted at least 14
days in advance of the 28-day strength tests. The final
results of the laboratory tests of the trial mixes shall
s be submitted to the Engineer at least 10 days prior to
the beginning of concrete placement.
3. Changes in Mixer If, during the progress of the work,
it is found impossible to secure concrete of required
workability and strength with the materials being
tT furnished by the Contractor, the Engineer may order
changes in proportions or materials or both, necessary
to secure the desired properties, subject to limitations
'i
'E
y03300-9
already stated. The Contractor may not make changes in
materials, either gradation, source, or brand, or
proportions of mixtures after their having once been
approved except by specific written approval of the
Engineer.
C. WORKABILITY
! In general the workability of any mix shall be that required
for the specific placing conditions and method of placement.
The concrete shall be of such workability that it can be
worked readily into all corners and around reinforcing
without segregation of materials or having free water collect
on the surface. Compliance with specified slump limitations
shall not necessarily designate a satisfactory mix. The
Engineer may require changes in proportions at any time as
necessary to obtain a mix having satisfactory properties.
The slump tests will be made by the Engineer (or a designated
representative of the Owner's laboratory) in accordance with
ASTM Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete,
Designation C-143.
In no case shall the amount of coarse material be such as to
produce harshness in placing or honeycombing in the structure
when forms are removed,
1
0, CONCRETE CLASSIFICATIONS
f'c Cement Max.Size Max.Water Max.
28 day Bags Agg. Gals/Bag Slump
Class (psi) C.Y. (inches) (net) (inches) Use
A 3000 5.5 1.5 6.25 4-6 General. All {
reinf. canc. structures
this project unless 1
otherwise specified
B 2000 4.0 1.5 7.0 4-7 Cradling, Blocking,
Encasement
C. - 2.0 1.5 - 1-1/2 - 3 Lean Conc. Backfill
only where show or
specified
The maximum amount of coarse aggregate (dry loose volume) per cubic
foot of finished concrete shall not exceed 0.82 cubic feet.
The maximum amount of water as set forth in the table above
is based on the assumption that the aggregates are in a
saturated, surface dry condition..
03300-10 t
The maximum water content will be the amount added at the
mixer, plus the free water in the aggregate, and minus the
absorption of the aggregate based on a thirty-minute absorp-
tion period. No allowance will be made for evaporation of
EI water after batching. If additional water is required to
obtain the desired slump, a compensating amount of cement
s h a T also ee`ad3ed:•`TFe max mum wa er-cemen ra o s ha 1
no be excee oW, No additional compensation will be made
for additional cement which may be used under this condition.
z The concrete mix will be designed with the intention of
producing concrete which will have compressive or flexural
strength equal to or greater than the following when using
current ASTM Designatiol C-39 and C-293:
Mi ni num Minimum
Class of Compressiv: Strength Flexural Strength
Concrete (Pounds per Square Inch) (Pounds per Square Inch)
a`~'da'y aTTyy
1
A. 2,000 31000 400 500
o. 1,400 2,000 200 300
t
E. OMITTED
' I
F. TESTS OF CONCRETE
1. General: Frequent tests will be required by the
i Engineer throughout the work to determine the quality of
concrete. Unless otherwise specified these tests shall
be made by an independent testing laboratory to be
selected and paid for by the Owner. All samples shall
j be taken in acco^dance with ASTM 0172.
2. Slump Test: The slump test as described in ASTM C143
r will be used to Wicate workability and consistency of
the concrete mix from batch to batch. Generally, a
slump test will be made at the start of operations each
day, at regular intervals throughout a working day, and
at any time when the appearance of the concrete suggests
f a change in uniformity.
3. Air Content Test: Tests for air content of the concrete
a shall be made in accordance with ASTM C231, at the point
of delivery of concrete Just prior to placing in forms.
The test shall be made often enough to insure a proper
air content uniform from batch to batch.
4. Compression Test: Compression test specimens shall be
b" x 12" concrete cylinders made and cured according to
the latest designation of ASTM C31. The number of
specimens and frequency of sampling shall be determined
03300-11
by the Engineer. No fewer than two specimens shall be
made for each test to be made at each age (7 and 28
days), and samples shall be taken at a minimum of every
( 150 cubic yards of concrete of each class placed.
Further, at least one set of test specimens per day
shall be made of each class of concrete used that day.
All specimens shall be cured under laboratory conditions
specified in ASTM C31.
Additional concrete cylinders may be required to be
cured on the Job under the actual Job curing conditions;
this shall be the Contractor's responsibility. These
samples could be required when;
a. In the opinion of the Engineer, there is a possi-
bility of the air temperature surrounding the
concrete falling below 40 degrees F., or rising
above 90 degrees F.
1
b. In the opinion of the Engineer, the curing pro-
cedure may need improving and/or lengthening.
C. Necessary to determine when structure may be put in
service.
Compression strength tests shall be made on the labora-
tory cured and job cured concrete cylinders at 7 and 28 J
days, in accordance with ASTM C39, latest designation.
The value of each test result shall be the average
compressive strength of two samples taken at the same
time from the same batch of concrete. The tests made at
7 days shall show strengths of not less than two-thirds i
(2/3) of the design strength. For the 28 day cylinders,
the strength level will be considered satisfactory if
t the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength
test results exceeds the required design compressive
strength, f'c, and no individual strength test result
falls below the required f'c, by more than 500 psi.
if the test record of the standard-cured specimens fails
to sati;fv the strength requirements, the Engineer shall
have *",a right to order a change in the mix proportions.
If the ,lob-cured cylinders fail the strength criteria,
the Engineer shall have the right to require changes in
temperature, moisture conditions, and time for the
curing process to obtain the required strength. If a
strength deficiency exists es shown by either test
record, the questionable portion of the structure shall
be cored, tested and evaluated according to ACI 301.
The cost for testing of the hardened concrete structure
and possible subsequent replacing of a part of it found
to be inadequate shall be at the Contractor's expense.
03300-12
1
f7
l
Unless the Owner's laboratory is on the site the
r. Contractor shall provide such housing as may be required
for curing and storage of test specimens and testing
equipment. The Contractor, if he desires, may at his
expense, have tests made of cylinders as a check on the
] tests made for the Owner.
5. Test on High Early Strength Concrete: When Type III
High Early Strength Portland Cement is used in lieu of
r,^ Type I Portland Cement, the minimum allowable 28-day
strength for Type I Portland Cement concrete shall be
y required at 7 days. The ages at time of test for Type
III High Early Strength Portland Cement shall be 3 days
and 7 days in lieu of 7 days and 28 days, respectively,
for Type I.
6. Failure to Meet Requirements: Should the 7-day
sl strengths shown by the test specimens fall below the
required values, the Engineer shall have the authority
to require additional curing on those portions of the
structures represented by the test specimens. The
additional curing required by the Engineer shall be done
at the Contractor's expense, and test cores shall be
obtained and tested in accordance with ASTM Method of
Obtaining and Testing Specimens from Hardened Cores and
Beams of Concrete, Designation C42. In the event that
v such additional curing does not give the strength
y required, the Engineer shall have the right to require
strengthening or replacement, at the Contractor's +
expense, of those portions of the structure which failed
to develop the required strength.
Upon receipt of written request by the Contractor,
substandard concrete work may be re-examined in place by
non-destructive testing methods or core samples in
accordance with ACI 301. The Contractor shall retain
I the services of an independent testing laboratory
approved by the Engineer and shall bear all expenses
I without compensation from the Owner. Laboratory results
shall be evaluated by the Engineer and the Engineer
shall make the final decision on acceptability of the
concrete in question.
i
The Owner may withhold payment for any section of -
concrete that does not meet the requirements of these
specifications for placement, lines, finishing, general
workmanship or strength. Withheld payment shall be
{ based on the unit prices bid for additional concrete and
reinforcing steel. Payment shall be withheld until the
z
.4
03300-13
'I
} unacceptable concrete has been refinished, removed and
replaced or otherwise brought into conformance with the
specifications.
G. MIXING CONDITIONS
f 1. General: The concrete shall be mixed in quantities
required for immediate use, and any concrete which is
not in place within the time limits specified in
paragraph G.4 shall not be used. Retempering of
` concrete will not be permitted.
2. Concrete Temperature, No concrete shalt be placed when
the temperature of the concrete to be placed is greater
than 90 degrees F. or less than 50 degrees F. The
temperature of the concrete to be placed will be taken
by the Engineer using a thermometer immediately prior to
( placement with the point of measurement being in the 1
chute or bucket.
3. Cold Weather: No concrete shall be placed without the
approval of the Engineer when the air temperature is at
or below 40 degrees F. (taken in the shade away from ,i
I artificial heat) and falling. If authorized by the
Engineer, concrete may be placed when the air
temperature is at 35 degrees F. and rising. All cold
weather concreting shall be done in accordance with
ACI-306.
When permission is given for placing when the air
temperature is below 40 degrees F., all water used for
mixing shall be heated to a temperature sufficient to i
raise the temperature of concrete to 70 degrees F., but
the temperature of the mixing water shall not exceed 165
degrees F. at the time of entering the mixer. If
heating the mixing water only will not raise the placing
temperature of the concrete to 70 degrees F., then the
aggregate must also be heated, either by steam or dry
heat, to a temperature sufficient to raise the placing
temperature of the concrete to the required temperature.
In no case shall the aggregate temperature as it enters
the mixer exceed 150 degrees F. The heating apparatus
shall be such as to heat the mass of the aggregate
uniformly and preclude the occurrence of hot spots which
will burn the material. Temperatures of transported
concrete shall not be less than 60 degrees F. at the
time of placing in the forms.* Salts, chemicals or
other foreign materials shall not be mixed with the
concrete for purpose of preventing freezing.
*Adequate means shall be provided to maintain the
j concrete and the surr..unding air at a minimum tem-
perature of 50 degrees F. for a minimum of 3 days.
1
03300-14
f
i
i
4. Hot Weather; Vot weather is defined as any combination
of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind
velocity that in the Judgment of the Engineer would ~
impair the quality of the concrete. All hot weather
I concreting shall be in accordance with ACI-305.
Concrete shall be placed in the forms without the
addition of any more water than required by the design
(slump), Vo excess water shall be added on the
'i concrete surface for finishing. Control of initial set
of the concrete and extending the time for finishing
operations may be accomplished with the use of an
approved water-reducing and set-retarding admixture as
specified above,
Maximum time intervals between the addition of mixing
water and/or cement to the batch, and the placing of
r concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following:
Air or Concrete Temperature Maximum Time From
(whichever higher) Addition of Water to Placement
Non-Agitated Concrete
ti
Up to 80° F. 30 Minutes
Over 80° F. 15 Minutes
1 Agitated Concrete
Up to 75° F. 90 Minutes
75° to 89° F. 60 Minutes
Over 90° F. (max. permissible
concrete temperature) 45 Minutes
The use of an approved set-retarding admixture will
permit the extension of the above time maximums by 30
minutes, for agitated concrete only.
Under extreme hot temperature, wind, or humidity
conditions, the Engineer may require the use of the
set-retarding agent, or may suspend concreting ope-
i rations if quality of the concrete being placed is not
acceptable.
2,03 BATCHING, MEASURING AND MIXING
A. GENERAL
If operated on the job site, the batching plant shall be
located in an area approved by the Eligineer.
s
03300-15
7~
will not occur when the valves are closed. The filling and
ry discharge valves for the water hatcher shall be so inter-
locked that the discharge valve cannot be opened before the
filling valve is fully closed,
D. ADMIXTURE DISPENSER
1 A suitable device for measuring and dispensing the air-en-
training admixture shall be provided. The device shall be
capable of ready adjustment to permit varying the quantity of
f admixture to be batched. The dispenser for air-entraining
admixtures shall be interlocked with the batching and dis-
charging operations of the water so that the batching and
discharging of the admixture will be automatic.
ji E. MOISTURE CONTROL
The plant shall be capable of ready adjustment to compensate
N for the varying moisture contents of the aggregate, and to
j change the weights of the materials being hatched. An
electric moisture meter shall be provided for measurement of
moisture in the fine aggregate, The sensing element shall be
arranged so that the measurement is made near the hatcher
charging gate of the sand bin or in the sand hatcher,
• '1
F. SCALES
Adequate facilities shall be provided for the accurate
measurement and control of each of the materials entering
The accuracy of the weighing equip- d
each batch of concrete.
ment shall conform to the applicable requirements of National
Bureau of Standards Handbook 44 for such equipment. The l
4 Contractor shall provide standard test weights and any other
auxiliary equipment required for checking the operating
performance of each scale or other measuring device. Peri-
odic tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer in
j; such a manner and at such intervals as may be directed. Upon
ra completion of each check test and before further use of the
indicating recording or control devices, the Contractor shall
make such adjustments, repairs or replacements as may be
required to secure satisfactory performance. Each weighing
unit shall include a visible springless dial which shall
indicate the scale load at all stages of the weighing opera-
tion, or shall include a beam scale with a beam balance
indicator which will show the scale in balance at zero load
and at any beam setting. The indicator shall have an over
and under travel equal to at least 5 percent of the capacity
`l of the beam. The weighing equipment shall be arranged so
that the plant operator can conveniently observe all dials or
indicators.
u
03300-17
I
I '
G. RECORDERS
1
An accurate recorder or recorders shall produce a graphical
or digital record of the scale reading after each of the
aggregates and cement has been batched prior to delivery to
the mixer and after the batchers have been discharged (return
to zero reference). The weight or volume of water, shall also
be recorded if batched at a central hatching plant. Recor-
ders shall conform to the following detailed requirements.
I Each recorder shall be housed in a cabinet which shall be
capable of being locked.
The charts or tapes shall clearly indicate the different
types of mixes used by stamped letters, numerals, colored ink
or by other suitable means. The charts or tapes shall be so
marked that variations in batch weights of each type of mix
can be readily observed.
The charts or tapes shall show time of day (stamped or
preprinted) at intervals of not more than 15 minutes.
The recorded charts or tapes shall become the property of the
Owner.
The recorders shall be placed in a position convenient for
observation by the plant operator and inspector. ,I
This requirement may be deleted by the Engineer if satis-
factory evidence is presented to demonstrate consistent
performance of the plant.
N. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT
Mixers may be stationary mixers, truck mixers, or paving
mixers of approved design. Mixers shall be capable of
combining the materials into a uniform mixture and of dis-
charging this mixture without segregation. Stationary and
paving mixers shall be provided with an acceptable device to
lock the discharge mechanism until the required mixing time
has elapsed, Truck mixers shall be equipped with accurate
revolution counters. The mixers or mixing plant shall
include a device for automatically counting the total number
of batches of concrete mixed. The mixers shall be operated
at the drum or mixing blade speed designated by the manu-
facturer on the name plate.
The mixing time for stationary mixers shall be based upon the
ability of the mixer to produce uniform concrete throughout
the batch and from batch to batch, for guidance purposes,
the Manufacturer's recommendations or, 1 min, for 1 cu, yd.
plus '1/4 min. for etch additional cu. yd, may be used. Final
03300-18
1
mixing time shall be based on mixer performance, Mixers
shall not be charged in excess of the capacity recommended by
the manufacturer on the specification plate attached to the
machine.
€I
When a stationary mixer is used for partial mixing of the
i concrete (shrink mixed) the mixing time in the stationary
;j mixer may he reduced to the minimum necessary to intermingle
t' the ingredients (about 30 seconds),
When a truck mixer is used either for complete mixing
(transitmixed) or to finish the partial mixing done in a
stationary mixer, In the absence of uniformity test data,
each batch of concrete shall be mixed not less than 70 nor
more than 100 revolutions of the drum at the rate of rotation
designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as mixing
441 speed, if the batch is at least 112 cubic yard less than the
rated capacity, in the absence of uniformity test data, the
ft number of revolutions at mixing speed may be reduced to not
less than 50. Any additional mixing shall be done at the
speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as
agitating speed. When necessary for proper control of the
concrete, mixing of transit mixed concrete will not be
permitted until the truck mixer is at the site of the con-
crete placement.
G
Paving mixers may be either single compartment drum or
multiple compartment drum type. A sled or box of suitable
size shall be attached to the mixer under the bucket so cis to
catch any spillage of concrete that may occur when the mixer
is discharging concrete into the bucket. Multiple compart-
ment drum paving mixers shall be properly synchronized, and
the mixing time shall be determined by including the time
required to transfer the concrete between compartments of the
drum. Vehicles used in transporting materials from the
hatching plant to the paving mixers shall have bodies or
compartments of adequate capacity to carry the materials and
to deliver each batch, separated and intact, to the mixer,
l Except as otherwise approved, loose cement shall be trans.,
ported from the batching plant to the mixers in separate
boxes or compartments which shall be equipped with windproof
and rain-proof covers.
1, SAMPLING
Suitable facifities shall be provided for readily obtaining
representative samples of aggregate from each of the weigh
I batchers for test purposes. Suitable facilities shall be
provided for obtaining representative samples of concrete for
uniformity tests. All necessary platforms, tools, and
equipment for obtaining samples shall be furnished by the
Contractor.
03300-19
i
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
i
APPROVAL BY ENGINEER
Before starting work, the Contractor shall inform the Engi-
neer fully as to the type of forms, falsework, and methods of
construction he proposes to use, and as to the amount and
character of equipment he proposes to use, the adequacy of
which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer, The
Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer's approval, a
schedule showing the sequence of concrete placements. Ap-
proval of forms, falsework, and methods of -onstruction by
the Engineer shall not be considered as relieving the Con-
tractor of the responsibility for the safety or correctness
of his methods and adequacy of his equipment, or from carry-
ing out the work in full accordance with the Contract.
i, B. TIME SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
Unless otherwise provided, the following requirements shall
govern for the time sequence in which construction operations
shall be carried on. Forms for walls or columns shall not be
erected on concrete footings until the concrete in the
footing has cured at least two curing days. Concrete may be
placed in a wall or column as soon as the forms and rein-
forcing steel placements are approved. Steel beams or forms
and falsework for superstructures shall not be erected on
concrete substructv'es until the concrete in the substructure ` J
has cured at least four curing days. Approved falsework 1
required for superstructures shall not be erected until the
i substructure has cured G curing days and shall not be removed i
M 9 until the superstructure has cured 7 days, The use of com-
pleted portions of a structure as the site for mixing opera-
tions or for storage of materials will not be permitted with-
out the Engineer's approval,
C. EMBEDDED ITE14S
1. Embedded items; Before concrete placement begins all
embedded items, i.e., water stops, anchor bolts,
mechanical and electrical inserts shall be checked to
determine that they are firmly and securely fastened at
the locations shown on the plans. They must be free of
oil, rust and anything else that would prevent proper
bonding to the concrete. Voids, when required shall be
made by use of some easily removed material.
2. Aluminum in Contact with or Embedded in Concrete., Where
aluminum anchors, aluminum shapes, or aluminum electrical
03300-20
f I
i
conduits are embedded in concrete, all contact surfaces
shall be painted with zinc chromate primer in accordance
with United States Joint Army-Navy Specification JANP-
a 735, The paint shall be allowed to thoroughly dry before
the aluminum is placed in contact with the concrete.
E
Aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with concrete,
1 wood, or masonry construction, except where the aluminum
is to be embedded in concrete, shall be given a heavy
coat of an alkali-resistant bituminous paint before
installation. The bituminous paint used shall meet the
requirements of United States Military Specification
MIL-P-6883. The paint shall be applied as it is received
from the manufacturer without the addition of any
thinner,
All steel or other ferrous metal to be mounted on or
placed in contact with dry/cured concrete such as valve +
operator floor stands, electrical switchgear, etc., shall
be painted on the mounting surface in accordance with
PAINTING Specification for exterior metal surfaces in
non-critical areas.
0, CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
{
The joint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct
contact with concrete that has attained its initial set shall
be deemed a construction joint. When concrete in a structure
or a portion of a structure is specified to be monolithic,
a the term monolithic shall be interpreted to mean that the
manner and sequence of concrete placing shall be such that
1 construction joints will not occur. Construction joints
shall be of the type and spacing shown on the plans, Addi-
tional horizontal and vertical construction Joints will be
considered by the Engineer upon request, but Shall not be
} used without prior written approval of the Engineer. The
;i
locations and elevations of additional construction joints
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Construc-
tion joints shall be neatly chamfered three-eighths of an
;l inch (3/8") as directed by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise provided, construction joints shall be
square and normal to the forms. Bulkheads shall be provided j
in the forms for all joints except horizontal joints.
Horizontal construction joints shall be prepared for ra-
ceiving the succeeding lift by cleaning by air-water cutting,
The air-water cutting of a construction joint shall be done
at the proper time. The surface shall be exposed sound,
clean aggregate. The air pressure supply to the jet shall be
approximately one hundred (100) pounds per square inch, and
the water pressure shall be gust sufficient to bring the
03300-21
T .
A
water into effective influence of the air pressure. After
cutting, the surface shall be washed until there is no trace
of cloudiness of the wash water.
In areas where air-water cutting cannot be satisfactorily '
accomplished, or in areas where it is considered undesirable
by the Engineer to disturb the surface of the concrete before
it has hardened, the surface shall be prepared for receiving
the next lift by wet sand blasting to remove all laitance and
unsound concrete immediately prior to placing of the next
lift. The surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly washed
after sand blasting to remove all loose material.
Immediately prior to the placing of additional concrete, all
forms shall be drawn tight against the concrete in place, and
the surfaces of the concrete in place shall be flushed with a
coating of grout mixed in the proportions of one part of
cement to two parts of sand.
If shown on the plans, construction joints shall be provided
with concrete keyways, reinforcing steel dowels, and water-
stops. The method of forming keys in keyed joints shall be
such as io permit the easy removal of forms without chipping,
breaking, or damaging the concrete in any manner.
E. PREPARATION OF EXISTING HARDENED CONCRETE
Where new concrete or any grouting compound except epoxy grout
is to be placed in contact with existing hardened concrete,
the existing surface ahall be, textured by chipping or other
means so that an irregular surface which has a height variance
I ' of not less than 1I4-inch is created. The existing concrete
` shall then be treated in accordance with paragraph D, above.
3.02 PLACING CONCRETE
} A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
` Y 1. Preliminary Consideration; The Contractor shall notify
the Engineer upon completion of various portions of the
work required for placing concrete so that inspection may
~ be made as early as is practicable. The Contractor shall ,
! also keep the Engineer informed regarding his anticipated i
concrete placing schedule, When all items have been
i found to be in order by the Engineer including lines and i
grades, forms, reinforcing, inserts, piping, electrical, 3
plumbing and the Contractor's concreting materials and
equipment, the Engineer will then authorize the Con-
tractor to proceed. Unless authorized by the Engineer,
no concrete shall be placed in any unit prior to the
completion of all form-work and the placement of all
reinforcement in that unit„ No concrete shall be placed
,
03300-22
S
before the completion of all adjacent operations which
might prove detrimental to the concrete. Whenever it is
necessary to continue the mixing, placing, and finishing
of concrete after the daylight hours, the site of the
work shall be brilliantly lighted so that all operations
are plainly visible. In general, however, concrete
placing shall be so regulated as to permit finishing
operations to be completed in the daylight hours. The
Engineer reserves the right to order postponement of the
placing operations when, in his opinion, impending
weather conditions may result in rainfall or low tem-
peratures which will impair the quality of the finished
work. In case rainfall should occur after placing
1 operations are started, the Contractor shall provide
ample covering to protect the work.
2. Cleaning Forms; At the time of placing concrete, the
k forms shall be clean and entirely free from all chips,
dirt, sawdust, and other extraneous matter. Forms for
1 slab, beam and girder construction shall not have tie
wire cuttings, nails, matches or any other matter what-
soever which would mar the appearance of the finished
t construction. All forms shall be cleaned to the satis-
faction of the Engineer, and kept free of foreign matter
of all kinds during concrete placing.
3, Embedded Items: Before placing concrete, care shall be
taken to determine that all embedded items are firmly and
securely fastened in place. All embedded items shall be
thoroughly clean and free of oil and other foreign
t material. Anchor bolts shall be set to exact locations
" by the use of suitable anchor bolt templates, or as
otherwise shown on the plans,
B. HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING
Chutes, troughs, or pipes used as aids in placing concrete
shall be arranged and used so that the ingredients of the
concrete will not be segregated, They shall be steel or
steel lined. When steep slopes are necessary, the chutes
shall be equipped with baffles or made in short lengths that
l reverse the direction of movement. Open troughs and chutes
shall extend, if necessary, down inside the forms or through
holes left in the forms, and the ends of such chutes shall
terminate in vertical downspouts. All chutes, troughs, and
pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened
concrete by a thorough flushing with water before and after
placement. Water used for flushing shall be discharged 1
1 clear of the concrete in place. Non-agitating trucks shall
be used only when authorized by the Engineer with due con-
sI eration of the length of haul, roughness of roads, and
design of trucks proposed, Pumping of concrete will be
03300-23
permitted, subject to approval of the pumping equipment by
the Engineer. The placing of concrete for floor slabs
preferably shall be done by a mixing plant located off the
structure. Carting or wheeling concrete batches on completed
concrete floor slab will not be permitted until the slab has
aged at least four curing days. Unless pneumatic tired carts
are used, the carts shall be wheeled on timber planking so
that the loads and impact will be distributed over the slab.
Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of
wheeling concrete over finished slabs.
' C. DEPOSITING
The method and manner of placing shall be such as to avoid
the possibility of segregation or separation of the aggregate
or the displacement of the reinforcement. In thin walls,
drop chutes of rubber or metal shall be used, The spattering
of forms or reinforcement bars shall be prevented if the
concrete so spattered will dry or harden before being in-
corporated in the mass. Each part of the forms shall be
filled by depositing concrete directly as near its final
position as possible. The coarse aggregate shall be worked
back from the face and the concrete forced under and around
the reinforcement bars without displacing them. Depositing
large quantities at one point in the forms and running or
working it along the forms will not be allowed. After the
concrete has taken initial set, the forms shall not be jarred
or any strain placed on projecting reinforcement. Where the
Contractors operations involve the placing of concrete from
above, that is, directly into an excavated area or through 1
the completed forms, particularly in the case of walls,
piers, columns, and similar structures, all concrete so
placed shall be deposited through vertical drop chutes of
rubber or metal of satisfactory size. Drop chutes shall be
made in sections or provided in several lengths so that the
outlet may be adjusted to proper heights during
operations. Concrete shall not be dropped free more ithan
five (5) feet. Concrete shall be placed in continuous
horizontal layers with a depth of from 1 to 3 feet, depending
upon the wall thickness. Each iayer shall be soft when a new 1
layer is placed upon it, and unless otherwise specified
herein or by the Engineer, not more than one hour shall
elapse between the placing of successive layers of concrete 3
in any portion of the structures included in a continuous f
placement. The Contractor should avoid additional construc-
tion joints other than those shown on plans by placing
required sections of piers, walls, or superstructures in one
continuous operation.
If excessive bleeding causes water to form on the surface of
the concrete in tall forms the mix shall be made drier to
reduce the bleeding. In tall walls the concrete shall be
03300-24
L
01
f
placed to a point about a foot below the top of the wall, and
at least one hour, or more if specified by the Engineer,
shall be allowed for settling, Concreting should then be
resumed and completed before set occurs.
D. CONSOLIDATING
1. General: Each layer of concrete shall be well compacted
and the mortar flushed to the surface of the forms by
i„ continuous working with mechanical vibrators of an
approved type. Vibrators of the type which operate by
attachment to forms will be permitted only when immer-
sion type vibrators .,rnnot be used due to inaccessi-
bility. The vibrators shall be applied to the concrete
immediately after deposit and shall he moved throughout
the layer of concrete just placed, and several inches
into the plastic layer below, thoroughly working the
concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures,
and into the corners and angles of the forms until the
` concrete is thoroughly compacted. Mechanical vibrators
shall not be operated so that they will penetrate or
disturb layers placed previously which have become
partially set or hardened, and they shall not be used to
aid the flow of concrete laterally. The vibration
shall be of sufficient duration to accomplish thorough
compaction and complete embedment of reinforcement and
fixtures, but shall not be done to an extent that will
cause segregation. Vibrators shall be kept constantly
moving in the concrete and shall be applied vertically
at points uniformly spaced, not farther apart than the
radius over which the vibrator is visibly effective, i
The vibrator shall not be held in one location longer
than is required to produce a liquified appearance on
the surface,
2, Vibrators: Internal vibrators shall maintain a fre-
quency when submerged in the concrete of not less than
6,000 impulses per minute for spuds with diameters
greater than 5 inches and 10,000 impulses for smaller
spuds. The intensity (amplitude) of vibration shall be
sufficient to produce satisfactory consolidation. A
sufficient number of vibrators (powered pneumatically or
electrically) shall be used to provide one for each ten
" cubic yards of concrete per hour being
one vibrator, which may be of the gasolineCpowered t e e,
i
shall be immediately available as a standby for each two
1
vibrators in service. The Engineer may require the
Contractor to use a vibrator of larger size and power if
{ he feels, based on observed performance, that it is
y ,
03300-25
~i
1
1
l
I necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation. All
i vibrators intended for regular service or standby
{ service shall be checked and approved by the Engineer
prior to the beginning of the concreting operations.
` E. PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATHER
f No concrete shall be placed when the atmospheric temperature
is at or below 40 degrees F. (taken in the shade away from ,
artificial heat) and falling, unless permission to do so is
given in writing by the Engineer. When such permission is
given, or in cases where the temperature drops below 40
degrees F. after the concreting operations have been started,
the Contractor shall furnish sufficient canvas and framework
or other type of housing to enclose and protect the structure
in such a way that the air around the forms and fresh con-
Crete can be kept at a temperature not less than 50 degrees s#
F. for a period of five days after the concrete is placed for
normal concrete, and for three days for high-early-strength
concrete. Sufficient heating apparatus such as stoves,
salamanders, or steam equipment and fuel to furnish all
required heat shall b~ supplied. It is understood that the
Contractor is responsible for the protection of concrete
placed under any and all weather conditions. Permission
given by the Engineer to place concrete during freezing
weather will in no way relieve the Contractor of the res-
ponsibility for satisfactory results. Should concrete placed
under such conditions prove unsatisfactory, it shall be
removed and replaced. J
F. PLACING CONCRETE IN WATER 1
Concrete may be deposited in water only when required by the
plans or with the permission of the Engineer. The forms,
cofferdams, or caissons shall be sufficiently tight to
prevent any water flowing through the space in which the
concrete is being deposited, Pumping will not be permitted
while the concrete is being placed, nor until it has set for
at least 36 hours. The concrete shall be carefully placed in
a compact mass by means of a tremie, closed bottom-dumping
bucket, or other approved method that does not permit the
concrete to fall through the water without protection. The
concrete shall not be disturbed after being deposited.
Depositing shall be regulated to maintain approximately
horizontal surfaces at all times. When a tremie is used, it
shall consist of a tube constructed in sections having
watertight connections. The means of supporting the tremie
shall permit the movement of the discharge end over the
entire top surface of the work and shall permit the tremie to
be rapidly lowered when necessary to choke off or retard the
flow. The number of times it is necessary to shift the
location of the tremie, for any continuous placement of
03300-26
concrete, shall be held to a minimum, During the placing of
concrete, the tremie tube shall be kept full to the bottom of
the hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, the
tremie shall be slightly raised, but not out of the concrete
at the bottom, until the batch discharges to the level of the
bottom of the hopper, The flow shall then be stopped by
lowering the tremie. The placing operations shall be con-
tinuous until the work is completed, When concrete is placed
by means of the bottom-dump-bucket, the bucket shall have a 1
i capacity of not less than one-half cubic yard. The bucket
shall be lowered gradually and carefully until it rests upon
the concrete already placed. It shall then be raised very
slowly during the discharge travel; the intent being to
maintain as nearly as possible, still water at the point of
discharge ano to avoid agitating the mixture.
G. PLACING CONCRETE IN SLABS
t
Concrete in columns, walls, and deep beams or girders shall
be allowed to stand for at least one hour, or more if speci-
fied by the Engineer, to permit full settlement due to
consolidation before concrete is placed in the slabs they are f
to support. Haunches are considered as part of the slab and
shall be placed integrally with them. When monolithic slabs
are placed in strips, the widths of the strips, unless
a otherwise specified or shown, shall be such that the concrete
in any one strip will not be allowed to lie in place for more
f than one hour before the adjacent strips are placed. Imme-
diately before placing concrete, the earth cushion to receive
concrete shall be thoroughly dampened to prevent too rapid
absorption of moisture from the concrete,
H. PLACING CONCRETE IN FOUNDATIONS
Concrete in deep foundations shall be placed in a manner that
will avoid segregation of the aggregates or displacement of
the reinforcement, Suitable chutes or vertical pipes shall
be provided. When footings can be placed in dry foundation
pits without use of cofferdams or caissons, forms may be
omitted, if desired by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer, and the entire excavation filled with concrete to
the elevation of the top of footing. The placing of concrete
bases above seal courses will be permitted after the forms
are free from water and the seal course cleaned. Any
necessary pUmping or bailing during the concreting operations
shall be done from a suitable sump located outside the forms. '
i
{
Y:
Y
k 03300-27
s
3,03 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. TYPE OF FINISHES
1. General: Except as elsewhere permitted in these
specifications, plans, or by direction of the Engineer,
finishes shall be an integral part of a concrete
placing. The following schedule of finishes shall be
used where applicable unless otherwise specified,
amended, or extended.
2. Screeding; Screeding is an operation normally associ-
ated with horizontal concrete surfaces such as slabs.
Screeding shall be done as soon as concrete has been
approximately leveled. The screed shall be designed
adaptable to the use intended, shall have provisions for
vertical adjustment, and shall be sufficiently rigid to
remain true to shape during use.
The screed shall be vertically adjusted so as to leave
the concrete surface at an elevation slightly above
grade after the initial strike off to allow for con-
solidation and finishing. Continue Screeding and
tamping alternately or in unison until the concrete is
properly consolidated and surface voids are eliminated.
The surface shall then be brought to a smooth, true
alignment by means of longitudinal screeding, then
finished as specifically required.
3. Rubbed Surface Finish: Surfaces to receive a rubbed
finish shall be treated as hereinafter specified. J
Surfaces shall be rubbed with carborundum fluted surface l
stones providing an abrasive which, when applied in
surface rubbing at the proper time in the concrete aging
process, will remove form marks, surface imperfections,
and otherwise smooth, shape, or finish the surface.
Surface rubbings shall proceed as soon as forms are
removed.
As soon as the forms are removed, all necessary pointing
shall be one, When the po nt ng has set sufficiently
to permit rubbing, all surfaces requiring surface finish
shall be wet and given a surface rubbing with a No. 16
Carborundum Stone or an abrasive of equal quality, The
rubbing shall be continued sufficiently to bring the
surface to a paste, to remove all form marks and
projections, and to produce a smooth dense surface
without pits or irregularities, The material that has
been ground to a paste shall be carefully spread or y
brushed uniformly over the surface and allowed to take a
reset. The use of cement to form a surface will not be
permitted. Within 24 hours after removal of forms a
1
03300-2Q
1
sufficient number of personnel, in the opinion of the
Engineer, shall be engaged in pointing up and rubbing
the concrete to insure completion expeditiously.
si In general, chamfered corners shat T- of 6e ruWed in the
first surface rubbing.
< If necessary to obtain bond between a rubbed surface and
s concrete wall, use of an admixture or epoxy bonding com-
pound with rubbing will be allowed; however, plastering
in lieu of rubbing will not be permitted,
The Contractor shall prepare for approval of the
•;1 Engineer a 4' x 8' panel, showing how final finished
surfaces will appear, which panel will be used as a
guide in judging the workmanship of surface finish.
4, Smooth Form Finish: All concrete surfaces are to have a
"smooth form finish" as covered by ACI 301. Patching
tie holes, fin removal and other touch-up shall proceed
immediately after form removal, i
5, Rough Form Finish: Rough form finish is permitted only
where called for on the plans,
6. Wood Float Finish: Surfaces shall be finished using a r
wood float to a true even plane with no coarse aggregate
visible. Sufficient pressure shall be used on the wood J
float to bring all excess moisture to the surface so
that it can be removed, The surface shall have a
uniform appearance and shall meet the straightness
requirements. j
3
f 7. Steel Trowel Finish: After all surface moisture has
disappeared following the wood float finish, surfaces
shall be steel trowelled to a smooth, even impervious
finish, free from blemishes including trowel marks.
Where indicated on the plans, or herein elsewhere
specified, a floor hardener shall be applied to slabs
receiving a steel trowel finish. Floor hardener shall
be Lapidolith, as manufactured by L. Sonnehorn and Sons,
Master Builders (equal product), or equal, and shall be
applied in three applications or an approved equal
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specs-
f1cations,
8. Brush Finish: Following the steel trowel finish,
surface of the concrete shall be brushed lightly with a
softbristled brush. The brush shall be kept clean and
shall be dipped in water frequently so that it will be
clean and wet at all times. Brushing shall be limited
to that necessary to remove the glaze and produce a
non-slip surface,
6
03300-29
ubyfushand ing an finish-
9, Power-Machine Finish (optiobn): In
finished ing, surfaces of slabs may
approved power finishing machine in accordance with the
directions of the machine manufacturer. The preparation
of concrete surfaces for finishing by machine shall in e re agennderalthe finishhshallbbeoof theuqualityrrequirednforithe
` specific surface.
f 10, light Sand Blast Finish: Surfaces to receive a light
sand blast finish shall first receive a rubbed surface
finish. The concrete surface shall then be blasted with
an abrasive (sand or grit) until the aggr sahall Is
uniform relief, The depth of penetration sufficient to remove only the surface mortar. T matchhea
`
Contractor shall prepare a 4` x 8' panel
Subsequent sand blast
sample supplied by the Engineer.
finishing shall match the sample panels.
11. Medium Sand Blast Finish: Surfaces to receive a medium
sand blast finish shall be treated as specified for
Light Sand Blast finish except that the depth ofrface
penetration shall be sufficient to remove the su
ate.
mortar and expose the surface ofassome coarse abovreeg specified Sample panels shall be Prepared
12. Broom
be Be l Finish-. Finish iusing Broom or Burlap Belt accordance 13, Non-slip Finish: Finish in accordance with AC1 301
using aluminum oxide abrasive grains as follows:
Alundum Aggregate as manufactured by Norton Company,
, um Oxidestero Massa rvicesCompanydor equal~p Aluminum
i
14, Special Finishes: Areas designed to receive special
finishes are: (1) interior. of the pump station,
excluding the floor, and (2) exposed exterior wall
surfaces of the pump station and the reservoir. The
of accordance d coatingtmanu-
finish(s structionsoandirecommendations in
facturrir. N
The interior surfaces of the pump station and flow tube
vault, excluding the floors, shall be prepared and
coated with brush-on base coat of Thoroseal using
minimum of two pounds per square yard and then Quickseal
shall be applied at minimum of one-half pound per square
yard, Finish color shall be ivory unless otherwise
03300-30
- j -
i
{ requested in writing by the owner. Coatings shall be as
manufactured by Standard Dry Wall Products, Inc., or
f; approved equal. /
i= The exposed exterior wall surfaces of both the pump
station and reservoir shall be coated with Thoroseal,
Acryl 60 and Thorite in accordance with recommendations
and instructions of Standard Dry Wall Products, Inc.,
ei for brush and float finish for concrete. The surfaces
shall be prepared as recommended and Thorite shall be
I 4 used for patching, filling of honeycombed areas, cracks,
etc. After surface preparation, Thoroseal mix using
solution of one part Acryl 60 and three parts of clean
water, so that the consistency is suitable for brush
application to be applied. Two heavy brush coats shall
be applied to the surfaces at the rate of two pounds
ra (dry Thoroseal measure) per square yard. After first
coat has set, the second brush coat shall be applied at ,
f same rate and when the surface is set so that it will
not roll or lift, the surface is to be floated to a
uniform texture with a sponge float, Sufficient
material shall be applied to fill and seal all pores and
voids and to make the surfaces even and of uniform
6 texture.
• 15. Chemical-Hardener Finish: Apply chemical-hardener
A finish to interior concrete floors where shown on the
drawings or in schedules. Apply liquid chemical
g hardener after complete curing and drying of the
concrete surface. Dilute the liquid hardener with
water, and apply in 3 coats; first coat, 1/3 strength;
second coat, 1/2 strength; third coat, 2/3 strength.
Evenly apply each coat, and allow 24 hours for drying
between coats.
Apply proprietary chemical-hardeners, in accordance with
the manufacturer's printed directions.
After the final coat of chemical-hardener solution is
applied and dried, remove surplus hardener by scrubbing
and mopping with water.
U B. FINISH SLABS - FLOAT FINISH
Except as hereinafter set forth where it is necessary that
slabs shall receive a special finish, as soon as concrete
placing operations have been completed for a slab section of
sufficient width to permit finishing operations, the concrete
shall he approximately leveled and then struck off, tamped,
1 and screeded using a longitudinal screed as described under
types of finishing for concrete. The surface shall then be
brought to a smooth true alignment by means of longitudinal
03300-31
4i
tf
a
screeding, floating, belting, and/or other methods approved
by the Engineer. When templates are used, they shall be of
such design as to permit early removal in order to avoid
construction joints and to permit satisfactory finishing at
and adjacent to the site of the template.
While the concrete is still plastic, the surface shall be
straightedged by the use of a standard ten (10') foot metal
straightedge. Ordinates measured from the face of a
straightedge to the surface of the slab shall at no place
exceed one sixteenth (1/16") inch per foot from the nearest
point of contact, and in no case shall the maximum ordinate
to a ten (10') foot straightedge he greater than one-eighth
(1/8") inch. Deviations in excess of permissible variations
shall be corrected. The final surface finish of the slab
shall be done after the initial straightening, and corrective
adjusting, if required, is completed. Where indicated on the
Glans, slabs shall be sloped to provide drainage, with such
slabs to have a minimum thickness of that shown on the plans.
C. FINISHING SLABS - STEEL TROWEL FINISH i
Slabs to receive a steel trowel finish shall first receive a
float finish as specified above. A steel trowelled finish
shall then be applied in accordance with ACI 301.
0. FINISHING CONCRETE SURFACES
Concrete surfaces shall be finished as specified herein:
CONCRETE FINISH SCHEDULE
Type of Finish Location i
Smooth Form and Interior walls and
! T
l
' Special Finishes bottoms of roof slabs of
M pump station and flow
tube vault; all exposed
exterior walls from one
foot below grade to top
of wall and vertical
edges of roofs
Float All slabs except those
r noted in broom finish
below
Broom Finish All exposed roof slabs j
Smooth Form Finish All remaining surfaces
r except those noted above
I
03300-32
T
E. CURING CONCRETE
r Unformed surfaces of portland cement concrete shall be cured
by either of the following methods;
1. Wet Covering: The surface shall be covered by wet
burlap, cotton mats or canvas covering immediately
following the finishing operations and shall be kept
J thoroughly wet for a period of four (4) curing-days
after the concrete is placed. Covering shall be held
in direct contact with the concrete.
i.
Water used for curing shall be free from injurious
amounts of oil, acid, alkali, salt, or other deleterious
substances.
L Immediately following the finishing operations, concrete
3 slabs, including roof slabs shall be covered with wet 1
cotton mats or with a temporary covering of canvas or
burlap. The temporary covering will be required when
the size of slab, size of mats, or other factors are
such that the mats cannot be placed immediately fol-
lowing the finishing operations without marring the r
finish of the slab.
jj Canvas or burlap covering material shall weigh not less
r than twelve (12) ounces per square yard, and the
sections shall be placed with a lap at the edges of at
least eight (8) inches. Cover material shall be
saturated with water previous to placing and shall be
kept saturated as long as it remains in place. Care
shall be exercised in the placing of the cover material j
in order to prevent marring the concrete surface. j
When temporary coverings are used, they shall remain in ( I
place only until the slab has hardened sufficiently that
y a cotton mat covering can be substituted without marring
E t" or disturbing the slab finish. Cotton mats shall be
thoroughly saturated before placing and shall be kept on i
the slab in a saturated condition for a period of at
least four (4) curing-days after the concrete is placed.
i a
Curing by flooding or submerging concrete will not be
` y allowed,
2, Impervious Coating: Immediately after finishing and wet ,
curing of .-oncrete, the surface of the concrete shall be
covered with a continuous, uniform water impermeable
r coating, meeting the requirements of ASTM C-309 "Liquid
I Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete." Im-
mediately after removal of the side and end forms, the
O sides and ends of all concrete shall receive a like
03300-33
1 Ell
,
1
j coating, The solution shall be applied under pressure
with a spray nozzle in such a manner as to cover the
entire exposed surface thoroughly and completely with a ,
uniform film. Membrane curing shall not be used on
surfaces which will receive paint, floor hardener or the
like,
The rate of application shall be such as to insure
complete coverage, but the area covered shall not exceed
two hundred (200) square feet per gallon of curing com-
pound.
The coating shall be sufficiently transparent and free
from permanent color to result in a pronounced change in
color from that of the natural concrete at the conclu-
sion of the curing period. It shall, however, contain a
dye of color strength to render the film distinctly
visible on the concrete for a period of at least four
(4) hours after application.
Under normal conditions, the curing compound, after
application, shall dry to touch within one (1) hour and
shall dry thoroughly and completely within four (4)
hours. When thoroughly dry, it shall provide a 1
continuous flexible membrane free from cracks or 1
pinholes and will not disintegrate, check, peel, or
crack during the required curing period. If for any S
reason the seal is broken during the curing period, it 1111
shall be immediately repaired with additional sealing
solution.
When tested in accordance with ASTM Specification,
Designation C-156, the curing compound shall provide a
film which will have retained within the specimen the
following percentages of the moisture present in the
specimen when curing compound was applied: at least
ninety-seven (97) percent at the end of twenty-four (24)
hours, at least ninety-five (95) percent at the end of
three (3) days, and at least ninety-one (91) percent at
the end of seven (7) days.
6, Grouting Materials:
( a, Non-Shrink Grout - Normal Use: Pre-mixed, factory
packaged, ferrous aggregate mortar grouting com-
pound complying with CE (Corps of Engineers)
CRD-C588, Type Id, Products offered by manufac-
turers to comply with the requirements include the ?
following:
Embeco: Master Builders Company
Ferrolith G: Sonneborn
Irontox: Toch Brothers
03300-34
(
1
1
Mi
b. Non-Shrink Grout - Exposed Use; Pre-mixed,
nonstaining, non-shrink grout shall be Embeco 636
Grout as manufactured by Master Builders Co.,
Sonneborn (equal model); or equal.
C* Grouting Pumps and Other Mechanical Equipment;
Pumps and other mechanical equipment shall have a
43 layer of grout (usually 1" to 3/4") between the J
concrete floor and the bottoms of the equipment. 1
Grout shall be non-shrink grout as pre-mixed Embeco
Grout manufactured by Master Builders, Cleveland,
Ohio; Sika Grout as manufactured by Sika Chemical
Corporation, or equal.
` .a
All parts of engine generator units and centrifugal
blower units which requi-e grouting shall be
grouted with Esco Weld 7505 epoxy grout as manu-
factured by Enjay Chemical Co., Houston, Texas,
Master Builders (equal model), or equal. The grout
shall be mixed and placed in accordance :,ith the
manufacturer's recommendations.
After mixing, the grout shall be quickly and
continuously placed to avoid overworking, segre-
gation and breaking down of the initial set. The
foundation shall be thoroughly cleaned, the forms
v set in place and securely anchored, with holes or
r' cracks in forms caulked with rags, cotton waste or
dry sand mixture to prevent the loss of grout, and
the necessary materials and tools shall be on hand {
before starting grouting operations. Anchor bolt
holes and the surface of the concrete floor shall
~ be washed with a liberal amount of water, and any
oil or grease removed with a strong, hot detergent
or caustic solution. Concrete shall be damp when
the grout is poured, but shall not have an excess
of water to dilute the grout. No machines shall
be in operation in the vicinity of grouting to
cause vibrations which might affect the setting of
the grout, Before final set, cut back exposed
edges 1/2" and refinish with plain sand cement
mortar,
3,04 CURING CONCRETE
E
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ;
Careful attention shall be given to the proper curing of all
concrete, the curing methudt shall use sheet materials con-
forming to ASiM 0171 or membrane curing compound conforming to
tj 03300-35
i.
,T
i
t
ASTM C309. Membrane curing is not permitted on surfaces to be
rubbed or on surfaces on which additional concrete, mortar or
1 terrazzo is to be applied.
Unless the curing method is otherwise noted or specified the /
curing method shall be selected by the contractor and sub- i
mitted to the Engineer for approval.
B. LENGTH OF CURING PERIOD 5
f
All concrete shall be cured for a period of seven consecutive
is days. In cold weather, when curing may be retarded this
period shall be extended until 7 "curing-days" have passed, up
to a limit of 14 consecutive days.
C. CURING-DAY
A "curing-day" shall be any day on which the atmospheric
temperature taken in the shade, or the air temperature ad-
Jacent to the concrete, remains above 50 degrees F. for at
least 18 hours.
D. APPLICATION
1. Sheet Curing: Sheet materials when used shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM C171. They will be in
contact with the entire concrete surface and shall be
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recom-
mendations. All holes shall be patched and where
pedestrian traffic is unavoidable, suitable walkways
shall be provided to protect the sheet material.
2. Membrane Curing: Membrane curing compound shall comply
with ASTM C309 Specifications with coloring tint,
approved by the Engineer, ready for use other than
stirring, and of such composition that it will remain
intact as a sealing coat for 28 days. An acceptable
compound shall have such sealing qualities that the
moisture loss from test specimens shall not be more than
three and one-half percent when tested in accordance
with Method of Test for Water Retention Efficiency of
Methods of Curing Concrete, ASTM Designation C156 when
the sealing compound is applied at a coverage of
one-hundred and fifty square feet per gallon. The
sealing compound shall be sprayed on, using pressure
tank type spraying equipment, and the sealing compound
shall be thoroughly mixed just before and during
application by either a power-operated mechanical
stirrer or compressed air. Curing compound shall be
strained through gasoline strainer as it is poured into
spraying equipment. Application of the seal coat shall
be on a moist surface, shall be uniform as indicated by
03300-36
1
A
1 T
the color, and shall be at the rate of one gallon per
150 square feet, applied in one coat on horizontal
surfaces. On vertical surfaces curing compound shall
be applied uniformly in two coats at the rate of 300
square feet per gallon for each coat, The application
of the curing compound shall follow immediately after
removal of forms and preparation of concrete surface as
specified. Within thirty minutes after form removal on
any surface to be cured by membrane, patching shall be
commenced or the surface shall be kept wet by sprinkling
until patching is commenced. Curing compound shall be
applied immediately after any patch is made unless other
k curing is provided. Seal coats shall remain in place
and be protected against abrasive action for a period of
28 days if in an area where 14-day curing is required
and 14 days if in an area where 7-day curing is requir-
ed. Seal coats on slabs shall be protected by a
t, one-inch layer of sand or earth or by other approved
t means. The protective coating shall not be placed 4
sooner than 24 hours after the seal coat has been
applied. Any damages to the membrane coating within the
1 period of time noted above shall be repaired immediately
by a liberal application of the compound.
3.05 FILLING TIE HOLES
3 After the tie rods are broken back or removed, the holes shall be
filled solid with non-shrink cement-sand mortar thoroughly cleaned
to remove all grease and loose particles then the mortar shall be
as dry as practicable and carefully packed into the holes in small
quantities, After the holes are completely filled, all excess
mortar shall be struck off flush and the surface finished in such a
manner as to render the filled hole as inconspicuous as possible. I
If these patches appear to be darker than the other surface of the
9 '
r s~ concrete, white cement shall be used in the mortar as required.
3,06 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. GENERAL
Any defective work discovered after the forms have been re-
moved shall be repaired immediately, If the surface of the
concrete is bul concrete. Finished surfaces containing sand
streaks or voids will not be acceptable, and shall be repaired
by cutting out the unsatisfactory material and replacing it
with dry pack mortar which shall be securely keyed and bonded
to the old concrete and finished in such a manner as to render
the jointing as inconspicuous as possible. This concrete
shall be drier than the regular mixture and shall be
thoroughly tamped into place. Each defective area shall be
'kM1 cut back with pneumatic chipping tool as deep as the defect
extends and in no case less than one inch. The holes shall
03300-37
1
E
1
i then be painted with an approved bonding agent, such as
Darweld C, and then filled to within three-fourts inch of the
surface with approved non-shrink mortar as directed by the
Engineer and the remainder of the hole filled with regular dry
pack mortar, Holes less than three-fourts inch deep shall be
` filled with non-shrink cement-sand mortar for the full depth.
The surface of such patches shall then be finished as speci-
fied for tie holes. All dry pack mortar shall be driven into
place with suitable hammer and wooden blocks.
i
ENO OF SECTION
i
I
M
k
t
"l C
S,. r
q
['v
i
e
03300-38
iii
F' 05710 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
a; Furnish and install all miscellaneous and specialty metal work shown
on the drawings or specified herein. Provide anchors, hangers, rods,
bars, brackets or fasteners required to complete this work. Provide
inserts for concrete where necessary.
Submit six (6) copies of shop drawings for all misce)laneovs fabri-
cated metal items in accordance with Article of tri General
Conditions, for Engineer's approval prior to begi!„iina any work.
f 1,02 FABRICATION
Nom, _
When a specific manufacturer's article or apparatus is specified, it
shall be applied, assembled, and installed in accordance with the '
manufacturer's specifications.
if a~ l ,
~ insofar as possible, all items shall be shop fabricated and
assembled ready for erection. Fabricate articles to proper shape
with sharp lines and smooth surfaces. Connections shall be
± securely welded, bolted or riveted and welds shall be dressed
E ; smooth on exposed surfaces. Thickness of metal and component
parts shall be of size adequate to withstand strains reasonably
anticipated for its usage. Provide lugs, rabbets or brackets to
allow for proper assembly and close fit. Exposed edges and ends
of metal shall be dressed smooth where exposed.
Castings shall be of proper design, sound and exposed parts shall
have no blemishes. Remove fins, casting lugs, or other unneces-
sary parts, grind rough edges and shape for fit with other com-
ponent parts.
2.00 MATERIALS
A. STEEL ROLLED SHAPES
I
ASTM A36, having a minimum yield strength not less than
36,000 psi.
B. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL
i' ASTM A-36 Plates and bars shall conform to ASTM A-284. Ij
I
C. CAST STEEL, GENERAL PURPOSE
ASTM A-27, Grade 65-35
05710-1
s
9
f
D. GALVANIZING
Galvanized metals shall conform to ASTM A-123 and ASTM A-386,
E. WELDING ELECTRODES
Electrodes shall be of the type required for the purpose
intended. Use E70 series for manual arc welding for A-7 or
A36 steel.
F. ALUMINUM
Aluminum shall be of an alloy suitable for the function
intended. Finish shall be as noted on the drawings, other-
wise shall be of recognized industry standard for the type of
component.
G. FASTENERS
Fasteners shall be of the type required for the purpose
s intended and particular application and shall be of a recog-
nized industry standard for the type of components. Fas-
teners shall include:
Sleeve Anchors - Hilti "H'lhugger" or Red Head "Wedge Anchor"
Expansion Bolts - Hilti 'lolhugger" or Red Head "Multi-Set"
Self Drilling - Red Head
Hollow Wall Fasteners - Red Head Hollow well anchor or toggle
bolts
Anchor Bolts - to be Stainless Steel, ASTM 316
H. SHOP PAINT
All ferrous metals shall receive one coat of rust-inhibitive
primer as specified in Section 09905, PLANT PAINTING,
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL FABRICATION
Steel components shall be shop fabricated of standard struc-
tural shapes, or bent plates to the designs shown on the drawings.
Frames shalt be shop assembled by welding or bolting. Set frames
in place plumb, level and square in all directions and securely j
brace to prevent displacement until built into construction.
i
3.02 MISCELLANEOUS FABRICATION f
Fabricate all miscellaneous steel components, rack, stands,
supports, or other items to the design noted on the drawings and
05710-2
I
fi .
f utilizing structural shapes, bent plates, sheet steel or other
material as required to construct the item. Generally, assembly
shall be by welding with all joints ground smooth. Provide
brackets, fillets, plates and anchor bolts as required and finish
with one coat of shop paint.
3.03 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMES
Fabricate frames as detailed by welding, bolting or fastener,
using best modern practice. Frames shall be true to dimension and
shall be set plumb and securely braced to prevent displacement
until built into construction.
3.04 STEEL STAIR FRAMING
Furnish steel stair framing for each stair as shown on the Plans
and as specified herein. Fabricate stair stringers to lengths and
pitches noted and shop weld all joints. Exposed welds to be
E welded and ground smooth. Provide closure plates for all open
ends exposed to view. Weld closure plates continuous and grind
all welds smooth.
I All splices and ,points shall be welded continuously with welds ground
smooth. Miter all corners. Provide clip angles and connection
plates for anchoring,
3.05 WELDED FIELD CONNECTION
Welds shall be made only by operators who are qualified to perform I
the type of work required. All field welds shall be of the type
indicated on the drawings or specified herein. All welding must be
approved.
3.06 STEEL PIPE HANDRAILS
Where shown on the Plans, fabricate steel handrails as indicated on
the drawings. Handrails shall be shop fabricated to design of i-112"
I.P.S. Schedule 40 steel pipe of all welded construction. Assemble
to stair stringers in field and weld each port completely around the
pipe. Grind welds smooth at all ,points. Provide wall brackets as
noted of malleable iron.
3.07 ACCESS LADDERS (ALUMINUM) f
f
Furnish and install access ladders to be mounted as noted on the
Plans. Side rails shall be aluminum channels, with mounting brackets
as detailed on the drawings. Rungs (steps) shall be fabricated of
aluminum with non-skid material. Rungs shall be bolted to side rails
o using stainless steel bolts.
05710-3
h.
S
r
• t
10
I} 3,08 ALUMINUM HATCHWAY •
Aluminum hatchways as shown on the Plans shall conform to Section
078?.0.
END OF SECTION j
1
n
1
I
I
,
I I
I
1
i ~
I
i
r
I .
05710-4
t
i
I
4
07830 HATCHES (DOORS) FOR ACCESS
•14
1.00 GENERAL i
The Contractor shall furnish and install roof, floor and/or sidewalk
413, hatches complete as shown on the plans and specified herein.
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete data
covering the equipment and suppliers instructions for installation in
accordance with Section 2.12 of the General Conditions. The data,
cuts, etc. shall be complete with descriptions, loading bearing
values and other engineering data for a complete evaluation of the
submittal.
I'
The purpose of the access doors (hatches) is to provide access
through concrete slab into a pit, vault, pipe trench, etc. The
access doors shall be reinforced for 300 pounds per square foot live
load, unless otherwise shown on the plans.
Access hatches, or doors, shall be free from defects in material and
workmanship and built to high standards with features described
herein and shown on the plans. Any trade name mentioned herein or
shown on the plans if for the purpose of establishing minimum quality
and typical installation details. Product so mentioned would
' expedite approval of the item; whereas, a product of other make or
manufacture would require approval by the Owner.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATERTIGHT ACCESS DOORS, SINGLE OR DOUBLELEAF
Door leaf shall be 1/4" aluminum diamond pattern plate. Channel
e• frame shall be 1/4" aluminum with on anchor flange around the
perimeter. Doors shall be equipped with heavy forged brass hinges,
stainless steel pins, spring operators for easy operation and an
automatic hold-open arm with release handle, A snaplock with
removable handle shall be provided. A 1-1/2" drainage coupling shall
be located in the right front corner of the channel frame. The
1 aluminum shall have mill finish with bituminous coating applied to
the exterior of the frame. Installation shall be in accordance with
manufacturer';; instructions.
2.02 ACCESS HATCH
Lid (cover) shall be 1/4" steel diamond pattern plate with
reinforcing underside. Typical details are shown on the plans.
Finish paint on top shall be Tnemec Series S39, silicone aluminum, or
equal.
ra
jff 07830-1
t
J{ 3.00 EXECUTION
! 3.01 GENERAL
! The access doors (hatches) are to be installed where shown on the
plans, The plans are not intended to show all features and details
of the doors. J
3.02 INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall carefully handle the doors and protect them from 1
damage until the project is accepted by the Owner. ! 1
END OF SECTION
f ~
i
,
~ j
i
07830-2
~ 7
,
09906 PLANT PAINTING
1,00 GENERAL
} 1,01 SCOPE
`i The work covered by this item of the Specifications includes
1 furnishing all paint, labor, and materials and performing all
operations in accordance with this section of the Specifications
and the applicable portion of the Plans,
s, The Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, equipment and
services for cleaning and painting of surfaces as follows;
A. All metal work, equipment and machinery (except stainless
steel, aluminum, and architectural work).
S. All exposed piping except PVC or copper piping.
C. All structural steel.
Finish field painting shall not be applied to machinery, equipment
or other piping until operational tests are completed.
1
1.02 STORAGE AND CLEAN-UP
The Contractor shall use one convenient location at each site for
keeping all materials and doing all mixing, etc. Floor of this
space shall be properly protected with drop cloths. Oily rags and
waste shall be frequently removed and under no circumstances shall
they be allowed to accumulate. At the completion of the vork, the
3 Contractor shall clean off all paint spots, oil and stain from all
surfaces and leave the entire project in a satisfactory condition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete data on
the paint in accordance with Article 6.21 of the General Conditions.
M All of the data shall be complete and shall include a complete
description of the paint system offered, including color codes and
all pertinent engineering data required for a complete evaluation of
the submittal. Submittal data shall be in such form and so presented
that the Engineer may readily review the data.
Colors shall be sky blue color for all exposed ferrous metal to be
painted, including the motors.
f'
I
i
ti~ 09905-1
,
,
2,00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. GENERAL
Coatings shall be delivered to the Job in original containers f
marked with the name of the manufacturer and the specifica-
tion number. The coating shall not show excessive settling
in a freshly opened full can and shall be easily redispursed
with a paddle to a smooth, homogenous state. It shall show
no curdling, livering, caking, or color separation and shall
3: X be free from lumps and skins,
r,
Only the highest grade paint of each manufacturer and that
which is suitable for the use intended will be approved.
Only those thinners and solvents specified in the paint
formulas shall be used. More than the prescribed amount of
thinner may be added only to the extent of maintaining the
minimum spreading rate designated in each individual formu-
lation.
The Contractor shall obtain for the Engineer a color code
which will show the various shades, colors, etc., necessary
for the respective surfaces indicated,
II
B. RUST PENETRATING PRIMER
j
This primer shall be the best grade primer recommended by the
finish coating manufacturer for use under the metal protec-
tive paint. Primer and finish coats must be the product of
one manufacturer.
C. EPOXY PAINT
1
Paint for exterior surfaces shall be Tnemec-Tufcoat, or approved
equal. The color shall be factory ml)ed and all paint for this I
project shall be from the same mixed batch. Chips shall be
submitted to the Owner for final color selection - sky blue.
Exposed ferrous metal surfaces shall be coated with the epoxy
paint at locations described as follows:
(1) Conduits for Electrical and Control Systems
(2) Electrical panels, Supports, Etc.
(3) Exposed ferrous metal items on interior and exterior of
Pump Station, except stainless steel
•i
a
09905.2
i
(4) AlI water handling exposed piping inside and outside the
Pump Station
3,00 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES
{ GENERAL
j All surfaces shall be suitable cleaned before applying
coatings. All mill scale, rust, and other foreign matter
shall be removed by sandblasting or pickling as specified
below.
B. FIELD PREPARATION OF SURFACES
All of the submerged and exposed ferrous water metal surfaces
shall be cleaned to near white metal by sandblasting in
accordance with SSPC SP10, using 16 to 35 mesh sand. Due
precaution shall be taken during sandblasting operations to
prevent gouging and channeling of the metal caused by excessive
localized sandblasting.
All metal surfaces exposed only to the elements and direct
sunlight shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mill scale, rust, 14 1
N and other foreign matter 4 sandblasting to a gray metal in
accordance with SSPC-SPb, 'Commercial Blast Cleaning". All
sandblasting shall be done after erection unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
Any surface that is sandblasted shall be thoroughly cleaned
' of sand and dust and the surface coated the same day it is
sandblasted. All sand used in sandblasting operations,
sediment in the clarification basin, rust, paint and scale
accumulating from cleaning operations, and all other material
in the basin, shall be removed by the Contractor. All
sandblasted surfaces shall be swept clean again after all
blasting is completed. In the event that sandblasted
surfaces are not coated immediately after cleaning and rust I
reforms on sandblasted surfaces, such rusty surface shall be
F re-cleaned by sandblasting again immediately before coating.
C. SHOP PREPARATION OF SURFACES
All exterior metal surfaces except in the clarifier and
chemical storage tanks may be shop cleaned by either pickling
or blasting as described below. Heavy deposits of oil,
grease, etc., shall be removed as required before pickling or
blasting. Prime and finish coats shall be as specified and
are the same for either cleaning method,
09905-3
ppw~ -7
✓ 1
1. Pickling: All steel shall be pickled in a suitable
solution of hot sulphuric, hydrochloric, or phosphoric
acid for the time required to remove all mill scale,
rust, and scale. The solution shall contain an inhibi-
tor to prevent base metal attack. After draining momen-
tarily, all steel shall be thoroughly rinsed with water.
Following water rinsing, the steel shall be immersed in
hot dilute phosphoric acid to further neutralize the
surface and to provide a rust inhibitive iron phosphate
paint base. The primer shall be applied while the steel
is still warm except for the case of large assemblies
where the separate parts must be pickled before assembl-
ing.
2. Blasting: All exterior steel surfaces shall be grit
blasted to remove all mill scale, rust and scale. To
insure proper cleaning, the metal surfaces shall be
blasted to a gray metal finish and the maximum particle
size shall be no larger than that passing a 16 inch
screen. The blasted surface shall be primed immediately
after cleaning and free of dust, oil or moisture at the
time of painting.
3.02 PAINTING
A. WORKMANSHIP
All paint and finishing materials shall be applied by skilled
workmen and shall be brushed or sprayed in even, thorough coats,
without runs, crazing, sags or other blemishes. All coats,
regardless of the material, shall be thoroughly dry before
applying succeeding coats. Full drying time as recommended by
the manufacturer of the particular paint involved shall be
allowed between coats. All products shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. EPOXY COATED METALS
All metal surfaces to be coated with epoxy shall have the epoxy
applied in a minimum of two (2) coats for finished dry
thicknesses not less than 16 mils. E
Storage mixing, straining, thinning, and application of the
epoxy paint shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
t
09905-4
.
r
1
i
i
11000 GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS
-
la 1.01 SCOPE
These General Equipment Stipulations apply, in general, to all
equipment. They supplement the detailed equipment specifications
but in case of conflict the detailed equipment specifications
shall govern.
1.02 COORDINATION
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for coordination
1 of the entire project, including verification that all structures,
piping, and equipment components to be furnished and installed by
him are compatible. For equipment to be furnished by Owner and
w - installed under this contract, the Contractor shall be responsible
for proper installation, startup and all necessary adjustments so
that the equipment is placed in proper operation condition. The
Contractor shall also be responsible for coordinating with other
separate contractors as required for complete installation and
operation of equipment.
1.03 ADAPTATION OF EQUIPMENT
Equipment to be furnished and installed under this contract shall
N be readily adaptable for installation and operation in the
structures shown on the drawings. No responsibility for altera-
tion of a planned structure to accommodate other types of equip-
meet will be assumed by the Owner. Equipment which requires
alteration of the structures will be considered only if the
} Contractor assumes all responsibility for making and coordinating
all necessary alterations. All such alterations shall be made at
the Contractor's expense.
1.04 PATENT ROYALTIES
All royalties and fees for patents covering materials, articles,
( apparatus, devices, or equipment (as distinguished from processes)
} shall be included in prices quoted by equipment suppliers.
1.05 EQUIPMENT GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment furnished and
installed by him under this contract against (a) faulty or
inadequate design, (b) improper assembly or erection, (c)
defective workmanship or materials, and (d) leakage, breakage, or
other failure. For equipment furnished by Owner and installed
under this contract, the Contractor shall guarantee against
leakage, breakage or other failure due to improper assembly or
t 11000-1
.
f .
erection and against improper installation of the equipment. The
guarantee period shall be as defined in the General Requirements.
i
1.06 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS
All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in
accordance with the best modern engineering and shop practice.
Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gages
so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in i
the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be Interchange-
able. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior
to delivery, except as required by tests.
Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. Iron castings
} shall be tough, close-grained gray iron free from blowholes,
flaws, or excessive shrinkage and shall conform to ASTM A48.
Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous
fabricated steel used in items of equipment shall conform to the
Standards of the American Institute of Steel Construction. All
structural members shall be considered as subject to shock or
vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel which will
be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the
equipment shall be at least 1/4 inch thick.
1.06 LUBRICATION
Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require
attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous
operation. Lubrication systems shall not require attention
during startup or shutdown and shall not waste lubricants. i
1 lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer
J! cross referenced with major oil company lubricants, shall be
provided in sufficient quantity to fill all lubricant reservoirs f
and to replace all consumption during testing, startup, and
operation prior to acceptance of equipment by the Owner.
1.08 ELECTRIC MOTORS
Unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment specifi-
cations, motors furnished with equipment shall comply with the
following:
A. Motors shall be designed and applied in compliance with NEMA,
ANSI, IEEE, and AFBMA standards and the NEC for the specific
duty imposed by the driven equipment,
j B. Where frequent starting occurs, motors shall be designed for
frequent starting duty equivalent to the duty service F
required by the driven equipment.
i
11000-2
T ,
t
C. It is the intent of this general specification to allow the
manufacturer's standard motor on integrally constructed motor
driven equipment such as appliances, hand tools, etc., that
Y is specified by model number in which a redesign of the
complete unit would be required for a motor with other
features as may be specified herein.
r
k 1.09 SAFETY GUARDS
d All exposed drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving or
rotating parts shall be covered on all sides by safety guard meeting
OSHA requirements. Each guard shall be designed for easy installa-
tion and removal. All necessary supports and accessories shall be
provided for each guard. Supports and accessories, including bolts,
shall be galvanized. All safety guards in outdoor locations shall be
designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water.
1.10 ANCHOR BOLTS 1
Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts for each
item of equipment. Anchor bolts, together with templates or
setting drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently early to permit
setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. ~
Two nuts shall be furnished for each bolt.
Unless otherwise shown or specified, anchor bolts for items of
equipment mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to permit J
i 1-1/2 inches of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide
adequate anchorage into structural concrete.
Unless otherwise shown, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be
hot-dip galvanized in conformity with ASTM A153 and A385, or zinc
plated in conformity with ASTM A165, Type GS.
1.11 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be
furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and
accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring
special devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished
complete with those devices.
1.12 PROTECTION
All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely
enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage.
All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements and
shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times. Pumps, motors,
electrical equipment, and other equipment having antifriction or
sleeve bearings shall be stored in weathertight warehouses which
are maintained at a temperature at least 60° F.
;r
11000-3
x.
yr
i
Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion,
J discoloration, and other damage. All painted surfaces which are
damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Electrical equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected
against moisture or water damage, All space heaters provided in
the equipment shall be kept connected and operating at all times
until equipment is placed in service.
1.13 INSTALLATION CHECK
Where specified, an experienced, competent, and authorized
representative of the manufacturer or supplier of each item of ;
equipment to be furnished and installed under this contract shall
visit the site of the work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary,
and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the equipment
supplier's representative shall be present when the equipment is 1
placed in operation. The equipment suppliers representative shall ry
revisit the fob site as often as necessary until all trouble is
corrected and the equipment installation and operation are
satisfactory in the opinion of the Engineer.
Each equipment supplier's representative shall furnish to the
Owner, through the Engineer, a written report certifying that the
equipment (1) has been properly installed and lubricated, (2) is
in accurate alignment, (3) is free from any undue stress imposed
by connecting piping or anchor bolts, and (4) has been operated
under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily.
All costs for this work shall be included in the prices quoted by i ,
equipment suppliers.
Manufacturer's representative requirements for equipment furnished
by Owner are outlined in Appendix 1 for each item of equipment.
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with each
manufacturer concerning dates and times for installation of
equipment to insure proper scheduling of representatives visits.
}
1.14 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
For each type of equipment to be furnished and installed under
this contract, the Contractor shall prepare an operation and
1 maintenance manual covering:
j A. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and
I limiting conditions.
i
B. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking
instructions,
1
1 '
11000-4
i
j
C. Operating instructions for startup, routine and normal
operation, regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency
+f conditions.
D. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
E. Guide to "troubleshooting".
i.
4 F. Parts lists, and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
G, outline) cross-section, and assembly drawings; engineering
data; and wiring diagrams.
H. Test data and performance curves, where applicable. rt
1. Manufacturer's guarantee,
a
The above information, as applicable, shall be provided for the
following equipment;
s
Pumping Unit
Electrical Controls
Supervisory Equipment
Pump Control Valves
Motor Operator Valves
The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any
instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to
equipment when delivered.
Manuals shall be printed on heavy, first quality paper, B-1/2 x 11
inch size with standard 3-hole punching. Drawings and diagrams
Where
shall be reduced to 8-1/2 x 11 inches or 11 x 17 inches.
reduction is not practicable, larger drawings shall be folded
separately, and placed in envelopes which are bound into the
manuals. Each envelope shall bear suitable identification on the
outside.
Two preliminary copies of each manual, temporarily bound in heavy
paper covers bearing suitable identification, shall be submitted
to the Engineer at the time of submittal of the shop drawings.
After review by the Engineer, four final copies of each operation
and maintenance manual shall be prepared and delivered to the
Engineer not later than 90 days prior to placing the equipment
into operation, The final manuals shall be bound in stiff
artificial black leather, metal hinged binders, equivalent to
Pilgram Self-Expanding Fastlock Binders, 3-post style. Operations
and maintenance manuals for equipment furnished by the Owner will
be provided by the equipment supplier and will not be part of this
contract,
¢ END OF SECTION
si
11000-5
1,
i
Y
l
r
11426 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
1.00 GENERAL
i
The Contractor shall furnish and install two submersible sump pumps
as specified at the locations shown in the Plans. The pump and motor d
.d shall have a standard manufacturer's nameplate securely affixed in a
conspicuous place showing the serial number, model number, manu-
facturer, ratings, and other pertinent nameplate data.
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete data in
accordance with Article 6.12 of the General conditions, SHOP
DRAWINGS. Data shall include a complete description of all equipment
offered, including catalogs, cuts, and all pertinent engineering data
required to fully evaluate the equipment.
The Equipment Manufacturer shall submit with the shop drawings a list
of similar installations in the general area which have been in
satisfactory operation for at least one year.
Four (4) sets of Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted
to the owner prior to final acceptance of the equipment.
2.00 PRODUCTS
The sump pumps shall have cast iron motor housing and volute, bronze
impellers, and stainless steel shaft. Operation shall he as specs -
fled in the Electrical Sections. Each pump shall have a capacity of
not less than 20 gpm at a total dynamic head of 20 feet. Dual sump
pump installation shall have electrical connections and controls as
specified in Electrical Sections.
The motors shall be totally-encased, sealed, and non-ventilating and
shall have automatic thermal overload protection. The motors shall
be 1/3 HP, 115 Volt, 1750 RPM and shall be suitable for continuous
duty.
The sump pumps shall be similar and equal to ;eel No. 2P53025 j
furnished by W. W. Grainger, Inc.
3.00 EXECUTION '
Upon completion of installation of equipment, an acceptance test to
E verify the satisfactory operation of each unit shall be conducted.
w
e1
11426-1
1 .
The test shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the j
presence of the Engineer. Units shall be checked for excessive
noise, vibration, general operations, etc. The units must perform
in a manner arceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will
be made by the Owner.
END Of Sl ION
4k
3. v r• i' f I
1 ♦ 1
t
E
1
.t
1 I t
ti
, ( p
j
I
t
,
11426-2
i
j 15061 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
1,00 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install all steel pipe and
fittings, including taps, connections, and appurtenances com-
pletely as shown on the Plans and specified herein,
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop
drawings on the steel pipe and fabricated items in accordance with
Article 6.21 of the General Conditions. All of the drawings and data
shall be complete and shall include a complete description of the
pipe offered, including protective coatings and all pertinent
engineering data required for a complete evaluation of the submittal.
Submittal data shall be in such form and so presented that the
Engineer may readily review the data.
2.00 PRODUCTS i
Steel pipe shall be in accordance with American Petroleum Institute
Specifications 5L or A-53 or the following specifications of the
r American Water Works Association as applicable: 1
Tentative Standard Specifications for Fabricated Electrically Welded
Steel Water Pipe, Designation C201,
Tentative Standard Specifications for Mill-Type Steel Water Pipe,
' Designation C202.
Standard Specifications for Coal-Tar Enamel Protective Coatings
for Steel Water Pipe, Designation C203.
I
Steel pipe shall be designed for a working pressure of 150 psi with a +
minimum wall thickness of 1/4". Pipe diameters shall be nominal
diameter as listed in the applicable Standard,
3,00 EXECUTION
3.f', INSTALLATION f
Steel pipe shall be installed with flanged ends, couplings, welded
connections, etc., all as indicated on the Plans and provided in
these specifications. All piping shall be thoroughly cleaned to
s remove dirt, dust, rust, grease, and other foreign matter prior to
l
held aying. Pipe shall be brought to the required line and grade and
securely in displacementofthepipe position which while woall uld connections tundue are non made.
joint
will be permitted.
15061-1
~f
Flanged connections shall be made by means of erection bolts and
drift pins, without undue "forcinand with no restraint on the
ends of the pipe or fitting which would prevent pressure from be-
ing evenly and uniformly applied on the gasket. The pipe or fitt-
ing must be free to move in any direction while bolting. Bolts
shall be gradually tightened, each in turn, at a uniform rate f
around the entire flange. Flange bolts shall be installed with
bolt heads in one direction.
All steel pipe connected by screwed fittings shall have all burrs
removed by reaming prior to threading. Screw joints shall be made
with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound, applied to
male thread only. Threads shall be full cut, and not more than
` three threads on the pipe shall remain exposed. Caulking of
threaded Joints to prevent leaks will not be permitted. Unions
shall be provided where required for disconnection, Changes in ~I
pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings; the use of long 1
screws and bushings is prohibited. All piping shall be supported
from concrete structures as indicated on the plans or as required
for proper installation.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
Pipe shall be connected by butt welding, screwed flanges, Dresser
Style Couplings, as indicated on the plans. Ends shall be prepared
for the particular type of connection to be us,>d.
Flanges for pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI Standard for
Steel Pipe Flanges, drilled to ANSI Class 125, unless otherwise
shown.
Dresser Style Couplings shall be as specified in Section 15078,
r MISCELLANEOUS PIPE AND FITTINGS.
1 3.03 PIPE COATING
j The interior surfaces of all steel water-handling pipe and specials
shall be cleaned in the shop by sandblasting to a gray metal in
accordance with AWWA C203. After cleaning, the interior surfaces
shall be primed and painted in accordance with AWWA C203.
The exterior of all steel pipe and fittings shall be cleaned and
shop primed with one coat of rust inhibitive primer as specified
in Section 09905, PLANT PAINTING.
l 3.04 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
j All tests shall be made as directed arj in the presence of, and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. All steel pipe shall be tested
in accordance with Section 02618.
{ 15061-2
E
y
T T .
ppllpqpr.
3.05 DISINFECTION /
All 150191pe shall be disinfected in accordance with Section
r END OF SECTION
a
u
1
, k
' Y
r
1
,
r
{
l
` 15061-3
i
f .
r
}J 15062 CAST IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS i
r 1.00 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install all cast iron pipe and
fittings, including taps, connections, and appurtenances either
x in trenches or supported completely as shown on the Plans and
specified herein.
The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and complete shop
drawings on the cast iron pipe in accordance with Article 6,21 of the
General Conditions. All of the drawings and data shall be complete
and shall include a complete description of the pipe offered, includ-
ing all pertinent engineering data required for a complete evalua-
tion of the submittal. Submittal data shall be in such form and so
presented that the Engineer may readily review the data.
2,00 PRODUCTS
r
All cast iron pipe shall be cast from Ductile Iron in accordance with
ANSI Specification A21,51 (AWWA C-151). Pipe shall have push-on
joints in accordance with ANSI Specification A21,11 (AWWA C-111) and
shall be flanged as shown on the Plans. Outside coating shall be
i'. Standard 3ituminous Outside Coating, ANSI A21.4, "Standard Thickness
Lining". A bituminous seal coat shall be applied over the mortar 7 ~ll
y lining,
All ductile iron pipe 6 inches in diameter and larger shall be a
minimum of Thickness Class 50, and shall be designed for 250 psi
in accordance with ANSI Standard A21.50 (AWWA C-150) for laying
Condition "2" and with twelve (12') feet of cover. Pipe smaller
r than 6 inches in diameter shall be Class 51,
Fittings shall have mechanical or flanged joints as indicated, in
accordance with ANSI Standard A21,11 (AWWA C-111),
Fittings for pipe, 12 inches in diameter and smaller may be
Class 250 gray iron castings, and fittings for pipe larger than 12
Inches in diameter shall be Class 250 ductile iron castings, all
conforming to ANSI Standard A21.10 (AWWA C-110). Coating for
fittings shall be as specified above for cast iron pipe.
3.00 EXECUTION
a
3,01 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
All cast iron pipe, fittings, specials, valves, and hydrants
shall be installed in accordance with the Plans and these
Specifications,
in
~i •
15062-1
s:
,
1
Unless otherwise indicated, pipe in trenches shall be laid to
the grade shown on an even grade from point to point for
which elevations are furnished.
Trenching and Backfilling shall be in accordance with Section
02201 or 02225.
Trench bottom shall be excavated below the pipe grade for
installation of pipe bedding or support as shown on the Plans.
Pipe shall be laid or supported such that it is supported
uniformly for its full length,
B. PIPE HANDLING
All pipe, fittings, and special castings shall be lowered
into trench by crane or other suitable method and shall not
be rolled in or "dumped" into the trench. Pipe, fittings
shall be handled in such a manner as not to damage the
coating. All dirt and trash that may be in the barrel of the I
pipe, on the spigot or in the bell shall be removed while the
pipe is suspended. All pipe and fittings shall be handled
with slings. The use of hooks for handling pipe will not be
permitted,
The pipe is to be kept clean during the laying operation and
free of all sticks, dirt, and trash and at the close of each
operating day the open end of the pipe shall be effectively
sealed against the entrance of water or obstructions.
C. JOINT MAKING
1. Jointing Mechanical Joint Pipe: This type of pipe shall
be jointed in full accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and shall be done in a neat and workman-
like manner. Care shall be taken to prevent shearing
the bolts,
After carefully cleaning both spigot and bell and after
slipping the follower ring and the gasket over the
spigot end, the spigot shall be slipped into the bell.
If necessary to get satisfactory installation, a
lubricant shall be applied to the spigot to assist in
I assembly.
The gaskets shall be carefully seated by hand so as to '
be even in the bell at all points.
After drawing up the follower ring to uniform bearing
I against the gasket, the bolts are to be inserted and
tightened by hand in pairs using bolts opposite each
( other,
Ii
15062-2
1
ki The nuts are to be tightened amply to hold the required
pressure. Extension wrenches, or pipes over wrench
handles, will not be permitted, Ten (10") inch ratchet
wrenches shall be used to tighten the nuts, unless other
type wrenches are approved by the Engineer,
The finished joint shall be neat and uniform and shall
be watertight.
a 2. Making Flanged Joints: Flanged pipe shall be erected in
accordance with the controlling dimension shown on the
Plans. Each piece of flanged pipe shall be thoroughly
cleaned to remove dirt, rust, grease, and other foreign
matter, and flanged faces shall be thoroughly wire brushed
to insure even bearing for gaskets and mating flanges.
Flange gaskets shall be 1/16" full faced, fabric reinforced ,
rubber gaskets. Flange bolts shall be tightened, each in
turn, at a uniform rate around the joint. Finished joint
k shall be watertight, and where buried, the exposed parts of
nuts and bolts shall be coated with a heavy layer of
Tapecoat TC Mastic.
0. BLOCKING
Concrete blocking in accordance with Section 03300, shall be f
1 placed at bends, tees, crosses, and plugs, in buried lines not
flanged. The concrete blocking shall be placed so as to rest
against firm undisturbed trench walls, normal to the thrust.
The supporting area for each block shall be sufficient to
withstand the thrust which may develop at the pipe design
pressure. Each block shall rest on a firm, undisturbed
foundation or trench bottom)
3.02 HYDROSTATIC TEST
A. GENERAL
After the pipe has been laid and backfilled, each section of
newly laid pipe shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure
test in accordance with Section 02618.
3.03 DISINFECTION
j J
All pipe shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 15079.
t 1
4
' END OF SECTION
el
ii
y,
'i 15062-3
1
f
11
( 1
15065 GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE
1.00 GENERM1L
The Contractor shall furnish and install all galvanized steel pipe
and fittings, connections, and appurtenances, completely as shown
sa on the Plans and specified herein.
t'.
When requested the Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and
complete data and description of the pipe offered, including all
pertinent engineering data required for a complete evaluation of the
submittal. Submittal data shall be in such form and so presented
that the Engineor may readily review the data.
2.00 PRODUCTS
~ Unless otherwise indicated, all pipe to be ASTM A120 for "Hot
Dipped Galvanized Buttweld Steel Pipe, Standard Weight."
Fittings shall be ANSI B16C, 150# malleable screwed fittings
galvanized to meet requirements of ASTM A153-61.
Flanges shall be ANSI Class 125 for bolting to cast iron flanged
pipe, fittings, or valves. Bolts and nuts ANSU 818.2 hexagon nuts
for 125# flanges.
Unions shall be of 150 lb, malleable galvanized iron, brass seat, y
ground ,joint, equal to Crane #1280.
3.00 EXECUTION
I
3.01 INSTALLATION
Piping shall be supported at intervals as required to give proper
support to prevent sagging. All runs of piping, together with sizes
and outlets, shall be as indicated on the Plans. All pipes shall be
cut accurately to measurements established in the field and shall be
worked into place without springing or forcing. All piping, after
cutting and before threading, shall be reamed to remove burrs. All
screw joints shall be made with graphite and oil or an approved
graphite compound applied to male thread only. Threads shall be full
cut, and not more than three threads on the pipe shall remain
exposed. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks will
not be permitted. Unions shall be provided where required for
disconnection. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing
fittings. The use of long screws and bushing is prohibited.
V
t
15065-1
i
I ~ 1
3.02 TESTINU
All water- handling piping shall be tested under supervision of the
Engineer under the available heads or pressures under which the
particular line is to serve.
3.03 DISINFECTION i
All water-handling pipe shall be disinfected as included for other
piping, of which this is a small part.
i
END OF SECTION
I
i 3
I ~
}
I
i
r #
!,5Ob5-2
1
V_
15078 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING AND FITTINGS
s
1.00 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish and install all miscellaneous piping,
fitting, and appurtenances as located on the plans and specified
herein, Six (6) sets of full and complete shop drawings shall be
submitted for all fabricated items in accordance with Article 6.21 of
the General Conditions. All of the data shall be complete and shall
include a complete description of all the fabricated piping equipment
including all pertinent engineering data required for a complete
evaluation of the submittal. Submittal data shall be in such form
and so presented that the Engineer may readily review the data.
2.00 PRODUCTS
'
2,01 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS 1
Copper pipe for water service shall be Type "K" hard-drawn copper
tubing. Connections shall be made using cast brass or copper
sweat fittings and Sil-Fos or equal hard solder. Union adaptors
shall be used at ends of copper lines and at connections to
s equipment so that piping can be disconnected without unsoldering {
the ,points.
Joints in copper piping shall be "sweated" with 50-50 solder,
Before making up ,points, all copper shall be cleared to bright
metal with emery cloth and treated with "No-kerrode" or equal
'i flux,
2.02 PIPE COUPLINGS
Dresser style pipe couplings where shown on the Plans shall be
Dresser Industries, Style 38, or equal, for same pressure rating
as adjoining pipe. Couplings shall comprise a steel center band,
steel gland rings, gaskets and bolts. Provide thrust harness as
detailed where shown on the Plans.
2.03 PVC PIPE SMALLER THAN 4" SIZE
All PVC pipe and fittings for diameters smaller than 4" shall meet
the requirements of ASTM D 1764, and ASTM D 2241 for SDR 21. All
pipe shall meet the requirements of SDR 21 and Class 200. Joints
shall preferably be slip-on rubber gasket type; however, where rubber
I gasket Joints are not available, solvent Joints will be acceptable.
2,04 PIPE SUPPORTS
r
Adjustable pipe supports under and piping shall be Grinnell
Figure 264 or approved equal, comprised of a cast iron saddle,
~t
15078-1
I
I r
1 4
threaded nipple, and reducer assembly with extra strength steel
pipe and floor flange,
3.00 EXECUTION
All piping shall be carefully handled and installed to prevent
damage to the pipes. Water lines shall be disinfected in accor-
dance with Section 15079.
All water lines shall be tested for leaks. All leaks and defects
shall be repaired or replaced and the test conducted until no
leaks or defects are discovered. The Contractor shall furnish
sleeves for all lines passing through walls, floors, etc.
ENO Of SECTION
i I
J
i
I 1
I
15078-2
r
r,
7- T
,
v
?t
• i, 15079 DISINFECTION OF WATER LINES
1.00 GENERAL
The Contractor shall disinfect all new water lines, furnishing all
labor, equipment and material necessary to complete the disinfection
of the pipe as herein provided and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
The Owner will furnish water for sterilizing at a convenient point
near where pipe line is installed.
2.00 PRODUCTS
1
Chlorinating agent used for disinfection shall be a calcium hypochlo-
rite dr powder such as NTH or
y other chlorinating agent approved by
the Engineer.
3.00 EXECUTION
Pipe shall be disinfected by the application of a chlorinating agent
into the water used for the initial filling for pipe sections that 111
can be feasibly isolated. The chlorinating agent shall be applied at
' or near the Leginning point from which the line is being filled. The
water being used to fill the line shall be controlled by flow into
the section to be disinfected very slowly and the application of the
chlorinating agent shall be in such proportion to the rate of flow
entering the pipe that the chlorine dose applied to the water shall
be at least 50 parts per million. The chlorine-treated water shall
be retained in the main at least twenty-four (24) hours. After the
chlorine-treated water has been retained for the required time, the +
chlorine residual at the pipe extremities and at other representative {
points shall be at least 25 parts per million.
z, Following chlorination, all treated water shall be flushed from the
10
system until the remaining water shall have a chlorine content not in
excess of 1.0 parts per million.
Where it is not feasible to isolate a pipe section, the Contractor
f shall clean and rinse the interior of the pipe, wash the interior
with chlorine solution of 50 p.p.m., and then protect the interior
t carefully during, and after installation. ( lJ
END OF SECTION
3 1
Y~
7
i I
~J
fi 15079-1
1
4 15103 BUTTERFLY VALVES
1.00 GENERAL
r '
1.01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish and install butterfly valves com-
pletely, as shown on Plans and specified herein.
l'
N All butterfly valves supplied under this Contract shall be of the
I
tightclosing, rubber-seated type with rubber seats that are securely
fastened to the valve body. No metal-to-metal seating surfaces shall
k be permitted. Valves shall be bubble-tight at rated pressures with
" flow in either direction and shall be satisfactory for applications
involving valve operation after long periods of inactivity. All
butterfly valves shall strictly conform to the design strength,
testing, and performance requirements of AWWA C504-80; except some
individual requirements specified herein may exceed the performance, '
r hydrostatic, leakage, and proof-of-design tests specified in AWWA
C504-80, Any variations from AWWA C504; however, shall be listed in
the the Shop Dra ngs. The manufacturer shall provide certification
and test data requested by the Engineer as ne!ded to assure the Owner
that the valves will perform properly.
The manufacturer shall have manufactured tightclosing, rubber seat
butterfly valves for the type service outlined herein for a period of
at least five (5) years.
1,02 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit six (5) sets of full and complete shop
drawings on the butterfly valves in accordance with Article 6,21 of
the General Conditions. The data shall include catalogues, cuts, and
any other pertinent engineering data required for a complete
and so presented that the Engineer may readily rdata eview the data.
The valve manufacturer shall submit a list of ten (10) similar
at
4 installations which have Ssatisfactory this required
least three (3) years. .
Information will not be accepted.
k 2.00 PRODUCTS
1 2.01 VALVE BODIES
Valve bodies shall be constructed of cast iron AST14 A-126 ClassB or
ASTM A-48 Class B. Valve Bodies shall be of the short body type with
ANSI 816.1 Class 125 cast iron flanges. Valves shall have a retained
seat and shall provide tight shut-off up to the full valve rating,
I
ti
15103-1
Two trunnions for shaft bearings shall be integral with each valve
body,
2.02 VALVE DISCS
Valve discs shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM A-439, Type D2,
Class 40 or kSTM A126, Class B; of alloy cast iron, conforming to
ASTM A436, Type 1 or 2 or ASTM A-4390 Type D2; There shall be no
external ribs cast transverse to the flow path. The design of the
valve disc shall be such as to sustain full differential pressures
across a closed valve without exceeding a working stress of one-fifth
(1/5) of the tensile strength of the material used.
2.03 VALVE SHAFTS
Valve shafts shall be turned, ground and polished wrought stainless
steel, and shall be constructed of materials and diameters as
required in Table 4 of AWWA C504-80.
All valve shafts may consist of a one-puce unit extending
completely through the valve disc, or may be of the "stub shaft"
the valve
type, which comprises two separate shafts inserted into
disc hubs. If of the "stud shaft" construction, each stub shaft
shall be inserted into the valve disc hubs for a distance of at
least 1-1/2 shaft diameters and design shall be such that free
play is taken up in assembly by tapered, wedged, or keying
devices, or by close fit shrink techniques; however, construction
shall also allow easy disassembly for maintenance service.
2.04 VALVE SEATS
All valves shall have new natural or synthetic Bursa N rubber
resilient seats to provide tight shut off at the pressure specified.
The resilient seats must be capable of replacement in the field
without grinding or burning, The resilient seat shall be installed
in the body of the valve. Sprayed or plated mating seat surfaces are
not acceptable.
2.05 VALVE BEARINGS
Valves shall be fitted with sleeve-type bearings. Bearings shall
be of corrosion resistant and "self-lubricated" materials that
will not deteriorate natural or synthetic rubber. Bearings shall
be designed for a pressure not exceeding one-fifth (1/5) of the
compressive strength of the bearing or shaft material.
2.06 VALVE SHAFT SEALS
Where shafts project through the valve bodies for operator s
connection, a shaft seal shall be provided. J'
r
E J
r {
I
15103-2
' S
I
r
2.08 ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATOR FOR PUMP DISCHARGE BUTTERFLY VALVE
y A. GENERAL
Operators shall be E-I-M Type EB, Limitorque Type SMB, or equal.
The operators shall include the motor, reversing starter,
relays, power gearing, limit switch gearing, limit switches,
torque switches, heaters, local mechanical position indication,
stem nut, auxiliary handwheel, local control station, switch
f, housing, circuit breaker, and floor stand, if required, all as a
self-contained unit.
The manufacturer of the valve shall be responsible for the
proper sizing of motor operators.
Motor operator for 90° rotation valves shall move valve through
90° rotation in approximately three (3) minutes.
B. CONSTRUCTION
1. POWER GEARING
' All gearing shall be of the generated type, preferably a
combination of spur and worm gearing or helical and worm
gearing as inc.icated by the specific application. All
gearing shall be of alloy steel, heat treated, except for
worm gears which shal'! be of gear bronze suitable for the
j specific rubbing velocity. Gearing shall be mounted on
anti-friction bearings throughout. Worms shall be alloy
steel, heat treated.
Valve operators for 90° turn valves shall have a gearhead
it with mechanical stops internally located capable of
withstanding full torque requirements of the valve in both
a open and closed position. The stops shall be externally
I adjustable for exact position. The stops shall be
externally adjustable for exact position. The mechanical
stops shall be visible from top of unit without removing
cover.
Ratio combinations shall be such to simplify changes in
the field if required. Power gearing and power gearing
enclosure shall be such to permit use of year around
lubricant in ambient temperature of -44°F. to 140°F.
r
r 2. HANDWHEEL
Operators shall be equipped with an auxiliary handwheel of
the declutching type to provide for actuation of the valve
t in the event of power failure. Handwheel mechanism must be
of the noncolncidental type. The handwheel shall not
15103-3
r
i
rotate when the operator is in use. The handwheel and
gearing shall be sized such that not more than 80 lbs.
shall be required on the handwheel to move the valve with
full differential pressure against the valve.
3. LOST MOTION SERVICE
Operators for open-close service shall have a built-in lost
motion device to permit motor to attain full speed before
load is encountered, thus permitting a hanner-blow to be
i imparted to start valve in motion in either the closing or
open direct.
4. MOTOR
Motor shall be designed for operation on 208 volt, 3 phase,
60 hertz power and shall be specifically designed for valve
operated service. Rotors shall be mounted on anti-friction
bearings.
# Motor shall have NEMA Class 8 insulation and shall be
capable of developing 150% of the maximum running torque
wequired under conditions of maximum flow and maximum
1 differential head across the valve, without exceeding a
E maximum permissible tempperature rise of 75°C above a 40°C
ambient. Motors sha11 be capable of producing 200; of the
regwired valve breakaway torque under conditions of maximum 1
differential across the valve. Motor shall have a duty 1
rating of not less than 15 minutes and shall be capable of
operating the valve through two (2) cycles against full
f unbalance pressure without exceeding the rermissible
temperature rise specified. Motors shall be suitable for
operation of valve under maximum differential oressure with
standard deviations of voltage and frequency defined by
NEMA
Motor enclosure shall be NEMA 4.
6. LIMIT SWITCHES
,
Limit switches shall be an integral part of the valve
operator. They shalt be of the adjustable type capable of
being set to trip at any point between fully open and full
closed. Limit switch gearing shall be of the immediate
type of stainless steel or high tensile bronze. Gears
shall be grease lubricated. Each valve operator shall be
provided with open and closed geared limit switches having
open and closed contacts as shown on the Plans.
Limit switches shall be geared to driving mechanism and in
stop at all tinies whether in power operation or manual
operation.
15103-4
I
l
E 6, TORQUE SWITCHES
i Each valve operator shall be equipped with two torque
switches, one for protection in the opening direction, the
as other for control of seating the valve.
~a
Torque switches shall be responsive to load encountered in
r opening or closing direction and shall be adjustable to
desired operating characteristics to permit protection
y should an obstruction be met in either direction of valve
travel.
Closing torque switch shall be employed to control prede-
termined seating thrust. Travel and thrust shall be inde-
pendent of wear in disc or seat rings.
7, SWITCH HOUSING
Limit switches and torque switches shall be housed in a
f NEMA 4 enclosure, integral with power compartment of valve
4 control,
fE '
i A terminal strip shall be provided in the switch compart-
ment. Controls and switch compartments shall be shop wired 1
a ' to terminal strip complete and ready for field Installa-
tion, At least 4 spare terminals shall be supplied. All
wires to terminal strip shall be identified as specified in
the electrical specifications.
For power and control conduits to the operator, there shall
I be two 1-1/V conduit openings, one for power and one for
j control,
Space heaters shall be provided in the switch and motor I
a compartments of wattage suitable for keeping the compart-
ments dry at all times, There shall be installed also a
suitable breather and drain. A schematic wiring diagram
U shall be attached and protected from the environment, for
ts' maintenance use.
8. LOCAL CONTROL STATION
For total control, there shall be provided in the limit
r switch housing cover as shown in control schematics,
seloctor switches, push buttons and indicating lights,
Switches and push buttons shall be NEMA 4X rated,
y
9. FLOOR STAND
Where shown on the Plans, operators shall he equipped with
floor stands, The motor operator shall he mounted on a
15103-5
1
i
pedestal of cast iron or fabricated steel or substantial
proportions with ample base area to distribute load evenly
to the supporting structure,
10, FULL VOLTAGE REVERSING CONTACT
J Each operator shall have an integral three phase, full
! voltage, reversing contactor with electrical and mechanical
interlocks and three over-load sensing relays as shown in
the schematic. The contactor shall operate on 120 VAC and
shall have a control transformer to transform 208 VAC to
120 VAC, The control transformer shall be sized with
a sufficient capacity to operate the contactor and the motor
y switch compartment heaters, with 2E" extra capacity for
external devices. The shop drawings shall indicate the
control transformer sizing and volt-amps of extra capacity
provided. Each contactor shall be equipped with a phase
failure relay, Turner Controls TC-338 or approved equal.
11, CARE OF MOTOR OPERATORS DURING CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor's attention is directed to the necessity for
proper care of motor operators during the construction
a period. When devices equipped with motor operators are
received at the project site, provisions shall be made for
housing such devices in a dry place and provision shall
be made for the electrical connections to the devices so
that space heaters will function,
s
12, FACTORY SERVICE MAN
The supplier of motor operators shall furnish the services
of a factory trained service man to assist the Contractor
as may be required in the installation of new operators,
13, PAINTING
} The operator mechanism shall be supplied with a factory +
finish consisting of thoroughly cleaning all surfaces and a
pprime coat, 9 mils dry thickness primer; and second coat of
5 to b mils thickness; and a finish coat, 2 mils dry
thickness in the color designated by the Engineer, Field
painting shall be in accordance with Section 099054
2,09 MANUAL OPERATOR
All manually operated valves shall be provided with a fully enclosed
1 gear reducer operated completely immersed in oil and shall be
equipped with a handwheel where valve is exposed and a 2-inch
t; operating nut for buried service as shown on the Plans or specified
herein. Each exposed valve shall be provided with a valve disc
s position indicator, All manually operated valves shall be of the
P1
'
'N 15103-G
F
li 1
A
1
traveling nut, self-locking type and shall be designed to hold the
valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully
1 closed without creeping or fluttering,
Each valve operator shall require an input force on the handwheel
of not more than 80 pounds pull to develop specified minimum
operator torque. The direction of rotation of each handwheel to
{ open valve shall be counterclockwise. Each handwheel shall have
an arrow and the word "Open" cast on it to indicate the direction
% ki of turn to open the valve,
Valves for buried service shall have a 2" square nut operator and
s+ shall be installed with extension stems where required to extend the
r. operating nut to within 12" of the finished grade. Valves for buried
service shall be supplied with cast iron valve boxes similar and
equal to Clow F2454 or Mueller No. 10380, The Contractor shall be
responsible for furnishing extension stems of the proper length and
p valve boxes of proper size and length for all buried valves. 4
71
2.10 VALVES REQUIRED
' The required valves and certain pertinent data is given helow.
Butterfly valves shall be as manufactured by Clow,
Henry Pratt Company, Allis-Chalmers, Mueller, Crane,
Centerline, Dexurik, or approved equal.
l Size Max.
Number and AWWA Diff. Type
I Service Reg'd Ends Class PSI _ Operator
"ts Low Pressure,Suctian Side of
Pumps 3 36 75A 25 Manual 1
i
Discharge Side of Pumps 1 36" 1508 75 Manual
r Discharge Side of Pumps 1 24" 1508 100 Manual 1
Pump Discharge Valve 1 20" 150E 100 Motor
2.11 HIGH SERVICE PUMP CONTROL
The High Service Pump control butterfly is to function as an auto-
matic pump discharge valve, designed to operate in such a manner
that surges due to starting and stopping the high service pumps will
be minimized as shown on the Plans.
! When the pump control switch is turned to RUN, before the pump starts
the pump control, butterfly valve is to start opening at a predeter-
mined rate, manually adjustable from 15 seconds to 3 minutes,
15103-7
4
1
i
When the pump control is switched to STOP, the pump control butterfly
valve closes at a predetermined manually adjustable rate, When the
valve reaches a nearly closed position, a valve limit switch shall
stop the pump motor. On loss of power the valve shall hold its
position and when power is resumed it shall close. For manual t
operation the valve control shall have provisions to manually
override the normal control. The valve shall be equipped with a
heavy duty oiltight limit switch with a SPOT contact rated 10 amps at
120 VAC. All controls and switches shalt be for operation on 120
volts, single phase, 60 cycle.
3.00 EXECUTION
The equipment manufacturer shall provide the services of a
competent manufacturer's representative for whatever period of
time is required to insure proper installation and operation of
the equipment, a minimum of one (1) day for four hours duration.
Upon completion of installation of the butterfly valves an
acceptance test will be conducted to verify the satisfactory
operation of the valves. The valves must perform in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by
the Owner,
END OF SECTION
l
15103-8
a
t
a
1
16117 AIR RELEASE VALVES
1,00 GENERAL
r The contractor shall furnish and install air release valves of the
sizes and types shown on the Plans and specified herein comprising
al air valve, gate valve and pipe nipple. Six (6) sets of full and
complete shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Article
6.21 of the General Conditions, The drawings and data shall includn
a complete description of the valves offered, including catalogues,
cuts, and all pertinent engineering data required for a complete
evaluation of the submittal, Submittal data shall be in such form
and so presented that the Engineer may readily review the data.
} 2,00 PRODUCTS
4 Air Release Valves shall have a cast iron body, bronze or stain-
less steel trim, and stainless steel float. Float shall be
baffled to prevent air from blowing valve closed and shall have
threaded inlet and outlet,
Air valve located as shown on the Plans shall be APCO Model 144 WD,
2" size, air and vacuum type, as manufactured by the Valve and Primer
Corporation, or approved equal.
1
3.00 EXECUTION
t
Valves shall be carefully handled and installed in such manner as
to prevent damage to any part of the valves.
I
END OF SECTION
s
A
.
1
1511, -1
f~
l
I
?a 15133 SLANTING DISC PUMP CONTROL VALVES
1.00 GENERAL
z The Contractor shall furnish and install pump control valves as
located on the Plans and specified herein. The pump control valves
shall be slanting disc check valves with a top mounted oil dashpot
system for controlled opening and closing of the valve,
Six (6) sots of full and complete shop drawings shall be submitted in
accordance with Article 6.21 of the General Conditions, All of the
drawings and data shall be complete and shall include a complete ,
description of the valves offered, including catalogues, cuts, and
all pertinent engineering data required for a complete evaluation of
the submittal. Submittal data shall be in such form and so presented
# that the Engineer may readily review the data.
! The valve manufacturer shall submit with the s
of ten (10) similar installations which have been Ina satisfactory
operation for at least one (1) year. Shop drawings not containing
! } this required information will not be accepted.
si Four sots of Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted
to the Owner prior to final acceptance of the equipment in actor-
s dance with Section 11000, Item 1,14.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN
t The valve shall be a slanting disc check valve. The body shall be
two (2) piece construction of ASTM A48 cast iron, bolted together
through the center section in a manner to capture the seat on a
65° angle. The seat ring and disc ring shall be ASTM 86841
centrifugally cast bronze, and must be hand replaceable in the
field. The area throughout the valve body shall be equal to or
greater than the full pipe area. The valve shall have sufficient
clearance around the pivot pins to permit free seating. Pivot
pins shall be constructed of ASTM A582 Stainless Steel and
Bushings of ASTM A269 Stainless Steel. For control opening and
closing, a top mounted hydraulic dashpot shall be provided to
control the opening and closing cycles of the valve to prevent
surge and water hammer, The dashpot shall have a minimum of two
(2) control flow rates; One (1) 90% rapid rate and one (1) 10%
slow rate during start up and shut down, Each rate shall be
f' independently and infinitely adjustable. The dashpot shall be a
,n self contained oil system, separate and independent from the water
line media, The oil reservoir for the closing cycle shall be
j stainless steel open to the atmosphere with an air breather cap to
15133-1
I
i
prevent oil spillage. The oil reservoir for the opening cycle
shall be stainless steel and hermetically sealed to contain
pressure (air over oil) and be equipped with a pressure gauge and
pneumatic fill valve.
Pump Control Valves shall be APCO Series 800-T Slanting Disc Check
Valve as manufactured by the Valve and Primer Corporation, or
approved equal, with adjustable control time to open and close up
to 7 minutes. J
J •
3.00 EXECUTION
The equipment manufacturer shall provide the services of a competent
manufacturer's representative for whatever period of time is required
to insure proper installation and operation of the equipment, a
minimum of two (2) days of four hours duration each day.
i
Upon completion of installation of the pump control valves, an
acceptance test will be conducted to verify the satisfactory `
operation of the valves. The valves must perform in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance will be made by
the owner.
{
END OF SECTION
f ~
I
i
't
i
a
I ,
15133-2
is
i9
15136 MISCELLANEOUS VALUES
k 1.00 GENERAL
4
7s The Contractor shall furnish and install miscellaneous valves
completely as shown on the Plans and specified herein, Six (6) sets
of full and complete data shall be submitted in accordance with
4 Article 6.21 of the General Conditions. The data shall include
M complete descriptions of the valves offered, including catalogues,
cuts, and all pertinent engineering data required for a complete
evaluation of the submittal. Submittal data shall be in such form
and so presented that the Engineer can readily review the data.
2.00 PRODUCTS
"E A. BRONZE CHECK VALVES
Check valves 2" and smaller shall be bronze similar and equal to
Crane No. 34, Swing Check.
1 B. CORPORATION fiOPS
Corporation stops shall be all bronze with tapered plug and flat
key operator. Unless otherwise indicated stns shall be e
to Mueller H-15025 of size shown. p equal
r
C. HOSE FAUCET
Hose faucet shall be bronze sediment faucet with 112" pipe I
i
thread and standard garden hose thread outlet with wheel i
handle equal to Mueller H-8260.
D. SOLENOID VALVE
The solenoid valve on piping between suction and discharge sides
U of pump shall be as specified in electrical sections.
3.00 EXECUTION
Valves shall be carefully handled end installed in such a manner
as to prevent damage to any part of the valves,
i
END OF SECTION
r
15136-1
16172 PRESSURE GAGES i
a
1.00 GENERAL
f; This specification covers dial ~ pressure gages which indicate pressure
4 (or vacuum) on a graduated dial by means of a pointer, utilizing an J
elastic element (Bourdon tube or coil), and actuating linkage, as
required for measuring pressure or vacuum. In general, the gages
shah conform to Federal Specification GG-G-760 (12/4/76), for Class
11 2 and 3, Style X, Type I, designed for use with air, steam, oil
and water. The Contractor shall submit six (6) sets of full and
compete data, cuts, descriptions, etc. in accordance with Article
6.21 of the GENERAL CONDITIONS. The submittal data shall Indicate
th3 location for each gage to be furnished and the data shall be in
such form so that the Engineer may readily review the data.
2.00 PRODUCTS
' i 2.01 STANDARD PRODUCT
}t
The gages, as a minimum, shall be in accordance with the requirements
of the basic specification and shall be manufacturer's standard
commercial product. The gages shall be new and shall embody the
design characteristics stated for the respective class, size, type,
otc. listed herein. In the event the Plans indicate pressure gages
iT not listed herein, the Contractor shall request the Engineer furnish
description for gages not listed which shall be assumed to have
i 3-1/2" dial, The gage cases shall be phenol or ABS plastic or steel
zinc-coated or phosphate treated and finished with black enamel.
} Inlet shall be 1/4-inch size. Gages are to be supported by
)r connecting pipe.
Class I gages shall be pressure-indicating. Class 2 shall be vacuum
j gage designed for vacuum indications. Class 3 gages, Type 1, shall
indicate pressure or vacuum. Type 1 gages for use with air, steam,
oil and water are to be furnished under this specification, Style X
incorporates a single Bourdon tube (or coil) for standard applica-
tions for pressure indications.
Cj 2.02 PRESSURE GAGES TO BE FURNISHED
Locations and descriptions of pressure gages to be furnished are
is lists' below, and are to be furnished and installed regardless of any
omir ns of the plans. Gages are to be Type I and Style X.
r
e
r .
15172-1
~i
.
Pressure
Range
Gee Location Class Size (PSI)
Pump No. 5 Discharge 1 3-1/2" 0-300
Pump No, 5 Section Barrel 1 3-1/2" 0-30" Hg
to 60 PSI
3.00 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall provide tap and connecting piping to install the
pressure gages. Connection immediately adjacent to pressure gage
shall comprise brass, or bronze, nipples and 1/4-inch tee head bronze
gage cock and shall be equipped with Mid-West Model 150 Vari-Damp
Pulsotion dampener. The gages shall be installed in neat and
workmanlike manner and protected until project acceptance by the
Owner. „
END OF SECTION
15172-2 `
a; r,
V
1
' 15188 PIPING INSULATION
1.00 GENERAL
ThP Contractor shall provide piping insulation for the exterior
exposed piping and pump discharge head subject to damage by freezing.
The work shall be complete, neatly performed and esthetically
acceptable. Electrical heat tope shall he installed ahead of
insulation in accordance with Electrical Sections,
1
The pump discharge head shall be insulated where the interior is
wetted by the wi ter handled by the pump, The discharge piping is to
be insulated from the pump discharge head to a point at least one
foot below finish ground. The insulation for these items shall be
"Foamglas" as manufactured by Pittsburgh Corning, or approved equal,
with aluminum jacket as specified herein.
it The inlet and outlet pipes and the air valve body shall be insulated
using urethane foam as specified, The vent pipe with solenoid valve
ti shall be treated same.
The Insulation and Jacket shall not extend outward from piping to
include operator mechanisms,
r
2,00 PRODUCTS
The Foamglas insulation system shall consist of cellular glass
s insulation, flexible Pittwrap Jacket and sheet aluminum cover
Jacket, The sheet aluminum shall be mill finish not less than 0.020
Inch thickness and of alloy to provide adequate rigidity,
ttt The urethane foam and water barrier shall conform to recommendations
of suppliers so as to provide insulation ..ntirely suited for the
purpose intended. The urethane shall be similar and equal to CPR
Urethane Rigid Foam as furnished by CPR Division of the Upjohn
company,
3.00 EXECUTION
3,01 GENERAL
The Foamglas insulation shall be of such thickness that the aluminum
Jacket will pass over the flanges of the 20
` piping and the main line
' items and above ground it inay be supported vertically by the 24"
flange of the elbow, Bel%)w the 24" elbow the insulating Jacket may
r t be supported vertically by straps passing over the 24" flange of
sl elbow.
J ,
"Y
15188-I
s /
3.02 INSTALLATION
The insulation and jackets shall be installed by persons, or firm,
well experienced in performing such work. The Foamglas shall be
jacketed using Pittsburgh Corning Pittwrap moisture barrier and seal i
and then the sheet aluminum jacket shall be installed. The
insulating material shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations, after piping is completed and
acceptable.
The aluminum Jacket shall be lapped at least 2" and fastened with
stainles3 steel screws placed 2' c/c. The horizontal seam shall be
placed on north side of pipe center line at 7 o'clock position
looking east. The jacket for elbow shall be factory, or field, gored
so as to present neat appearance.
The items to be insulated with spray-on urethane foam shall be s
applied to thickness of about 1-1/4' and then wrapped with glass
r cloth, Then two coats of vapor barrier sealant, approved by urethane
manufacturer, shall be applied to prevent entrance of moisture. The
foam shall be applied after heat tapes are installed. ^
Drainage from pump packing gland shall be piped through the 1nsula-
tion so as to prevent that water from entering the insulation
In order for operators to observe the check valve indicator, an
aluminum cylinder shall be installed from outside of jacket to the
indicator so as to allow view of indicator position,
f
END OF SECTION
E
i
t
s
15198-2
r
i
16100 WIRE AND CONDUIT SYSTEM
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
s' The work covered by this item of the Specification includes
' furnishing all labor and material and performing the necessary
{ operations to provide a complete wire and conduit system.
2.00 PRODUCTS
E
2.01 MATERIALS
A. LOW VOLTAGE WIRE (60OV)
All conductors shall be 600 ~a t thermoplastic insulated single
r conductor copper, 75°C, Type THHN/THWN for sizes #8 AWG and
i" smaller, Type THW for sizes N6 AWG and larger, wet or dry, The
wire shall be water tank tested and approved as machine tool
wire in accordance with the National Machine Tool Builders
Association. The wire shall be Collyer Specification No. P-400
for Type THHN/THWN and No. P-142 for for Type THW, Anaconda, or
approved equal,
B. MEDIUM VOLTAGE WIRE (50000V)
All conductors shall be 5KV, single conductor, tinned coated,
copper stranding, extruded semi-conducting strand shielding,
firmly bonded to the overlying insulation. Insulation shall be
ethylenepropylene, meeting the requirements of IPCEA S-68-516
and tested to AEIC No. 6 latest edition, as it applies.
Shielding over the insulation shall consist of either embedded
l~ formed drain wires laid parallel to the axis of the conductor
4 in a flame resisting semi-conductor Jacket, or semi-conducting
tape, coated shielding tape and PVC Jacket. Cable shall be
Anaconda Unishield, Collyer Shielded Power Cable No. P-191-5,
r or approved equal. 4
C. MULTI-PAIRED SHIELDED CABLE
All paired shielead cables shall be l118AWG stranded copper
conductors with an extruded thermoplastic insulation consisting
of 16 mils PVC, 3 mils nylon, listed for 90°C, 600 volt
`j operation.
Each pair shall have one insulated conductor color coded black
it and the other white. In addition the insulation on each
ti conductor shall be printed with its group number at one inch
intervals for easy identification.
16100-1
t~
l
. 1
II
The insulated conductors shall be twisted together utilizing a
staggered lay to reduce magnetic noise and crosstalk in
balanced systems, The lay construction shall be a 2" median
lay for 20 & 18 AWG.
An aluminum-polyester shield tape shall be applied over the
cable core to provide electrostatic noise rejection. The
shielding tape shall have a 25% overlap which maintains 100%
shield coverage even when the cable is flexed. A tinned copper
M drain wire shall be provided for ease in determining the
cable shield.
i Cable shall be Alpha No, 5616/18 or equivalent.
0, PLASTIC CONDUIT
All plastic conduit shall be schedule 40, rigid, high impact
polyvinylchloride, conforming to Federal Specification W-C-1094
and Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL-651. Plastic
conduit shall be Certainteed, or approved equal.
E. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
All rigid steel galvanized conduit shall be hot-dipped galva-
nized inside and out and shall conform in all respects to
Federal Specification WW-C-661d, ASA 080.1 and Under- writers'
Laboratories specifications. The conduit shall be protected by
. Conduit shall be Triangle PWC, or
a chromic acid rinse
approved equal,
F. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
,I
` All flexible conduit shall be American Metal Hose with a
I neoprene Jacket and Appleton Sealtite fittings, or other i
approved equal.
G. CONCRETE ENCASEMENT OF CONDUITS
F Service conductor conduits shall be completely encased the full f
length in concrete, to the lines and dimensions shown on the
detail in the Plans. Also, 7 lineal feet of encasement shall be
provided for feeder conduits to the pump house at the 36 inch
pipe crossing, 18 inches of minimum cover over the top of
encasement shall be provided exceppt where absolut~ely i~mpo._~s-,
encasement,
slble, due to other utilities:rior o pouring
con3uits shall be spaced vertically and horizontally with PVC
plastic chairs and spacers rated 90°C "Certainteed" or
equivalent. Concrete encasement shall be 3000# red concrete,
placed in accordance with concrete specs.
16100-2
3.00 INSTALLATION
'r 3.01 WIRE
G'
r ,R
A. GENERAL
All electrical wiring systems shall be color coded in accor-
dance with the National Electrical Code. In conduits or runs
r containing from two to seven conductors, no two conductors
31 shall be of the same color. In conduits or runs containing
r from eight to fourteen conductors, the same color shall not
appear more than twice. For runs of more than fourteethree
conductors, the same color shall not app
times Unless necessary for pulling purposes, conductors shall
be continuous from terminal block to terminal block without
splice. Under no condition shall conductors of a different
color be spliced together. All circuits shall be tagged at
11 terminals.
All wire and cable #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. The i
minimum size conductors permitted is N12 AWG, except as
` specifically indicated on the Plans. All wire shall bear the
approval of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
B. LOW VOLTAGE
All conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no
l
splices shall be made except at outlets. Sufficient wire be left at all outlets to make connections to equipment without '
straining.
All splices and taps shall be made with mechanical type,
compression type or spring connectors. Splices and taps shall
then be thickness of s 1l-1/2 d tiwith mes thetconductor o and 3inshalf ulationsed, to a
0 thi thickness.
C. MEDIUM VOLTAGE
Where 6KV shielded cable is used indoors, a stress cone shall
be applied as recommended by the cable manufacturer. On i
outdoor applications, a preformed stress cone with weather-
resistant tape shall be installed as recommended by the cable
manufacturer.
D. PAIRED SHIELDED CABLE
'r Paired shielded cables shall be grounded at the Instrument
Panel end only and shall be insulated from ground elsewhere.
The shield shall I,e made continuous for the entire run. The
r 300 volt cable shall not be laced with or placed in the same
conduit with cable rated at 600 volts or greater.
~I
t r
16100-3
L; r
E. GROUNDING
All conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets, and other equipment
shill be properly grounded in accordance with National Electric
Code requirements. The ground wire shall be bare stranded
copper, sized as shown on the Plans. Where ground wire is
exposed to mechanical damage, it shall be installed in thick
wall conduit. Connections shall be made to equipment with
solderless connections. Wire connections to the ground
conductor shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld
process.
The metal surface under the grounding lug shall be cleaned to
bright metal. Connections to motors shall be to the ground-
ing stud which shall be threaded into the stationary frame and
not an end bell, and the ground wire shall not be lugged to a
mounting bolt. Equipment not specifically shown connected to a
grounding conductor shall be grounded by means of a conduit
supplying the equipment. Where direct metallic connections
cannot be made, bonding jumpers shall be used.
Grounding mats shall be constructed and installed es indi-
cated on the Plans.
Y
3.02 CONDUIT {
A. GENERAL J
All conduit buried in earth or in concrete shall be rigid PVC.
Unless otherwise indicated, all other conduit shalt be rigid
steel. At the transition from underground or from concrete,
PVC conduit shall be protected from mechanical damage by
extending rigid steel conduit a maximum of twelve inches and a
minimum of four inches into earth or concrete at the
transition. Conduit sizes shall be as shown on the Plans,
except that in no case shall a conduit size be less than that ,
required by the National Electric.Code. The minimum size
permitted shall be 3/4 inch.
B. UNDERGROUND
All underground conduits shall be buried a minimum of 18 inches
deepp and as shown on the Plans. Buried conduit bank shall be JI
backfilled with material free from large rock, paving material, i
or large angular substance which may damage the conduits.
C. ROUTING AND SUPPORT
Conduits buildings
plans. unfinished Conduits shall ceilings
as shown on exposed
and basement
16100-4
I
. rigidly supported to the building structure by means of straps
f or clamps, bolted or screwed to the structure. The straps
shall be of the two-hole pipe strap type and clamps shall be of
j the one-hole pipe strap type.
D. TERMINATIONS
Double locknut construction shall be used on all conduit
terminating in stamped metal motor terminal, motor starter,
safety switch, outlet, junction or pull box, etc., with
approved type of bushing over end of conduit. Length of
" conduit threads shall be increased at outlets, Junction and
J' pull boxes where necessary to accommodate double locknuts and
bushings. All bushings shall be fully seated against end of
conduit.
E. BUSHINGS
Bushings shall be composed of an outer threaded metal ring with
an inner insulated compound ring molded into the metal ring, or
shall be of the threaded type, composed entirely of an approved
insulating material.
F. NIPPLES i
Conduit nipples shalt have two independent sets of threads.
Running threads shall not be used. Where conditions require
joining two fixed conduits into a continuous run, a conduit
union shall be used,
G. PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
"Condulet" type fittings shall not be used on conduits
containing wire N4 AWG or longer, Pull boxes shall be provided
and installed where necessary to facilitate the installation of
cable and wires. The pull boxes shall be N.E.C. size.
Junction or pull boxes installed in concrete slabs shall be
cast iron. All other boxes and outlets shall be 304 stainless
steel or cast iron with watertight covers. All pull boxes and
junction boxes shall be accessible and not buried.
H. EXPANSION JOINTS
Expansion Joints shall be installed in all conduits crossing
concrete expansion Joints. Provisions shall be made to prevent
shear strain at crossings.
16100-5
a .
i
1. MOTOR CONNECTIONS
Connections to motors shall be flexible metal conduit for a
distance not to exceed thirty (30) inches. ,
r:
ENO OF SECTION
k 1c
i
r
I
II -
~ €E€
f
i
k
s
v
16100-6
a r....
1
"'12
16150 ELECTRICAL. EQUIPMENT
7 1,00 GENERAL. I
1.01 SCOPE
F
The Currtractor shall make all electrical connectiuns to equipment
furnished by the Owner and other contracts, and furnish wiring,
S conduit, outlet boxes, etc., as required. He shall check the Plans
and Specifications and inform himself as to the amount and type of
such wiring that may be required and include same in his bid.
POWER PANELS
A. PANEL "A-1"
Power Panel "A-1" (service panell shall be suitable for
120/208, 3-phase, 4W, service. Panel shall have a 225A, 3 pole
r, main breaker, and a 60A, 3 pole branch breaker. Breakers shall
have internal common trip, and be of the bolt-on type. Panel
shall be of NEMA 1A construction. Panel shall have a solid
neutral buss bonded to the enclosure. Panel and circuit
breakers shall have an interrupting rating of 22,000 amps
symmetrical, Panel shall be Square D TY NQOB or equivalent.
Main breaker shall be Type KA, and branch breaker shall be
Q18-VH, "Square D" of equivalent. Panel shall have 42 poles.
B. PANEL "A-2"
Power Panel "A-2" (branch panel) shall be suitable for
120/208V, 3-phase, 4W use. Panel shall have a 60 Amp main with
branches as shown on the Plans. Panel shall be of NEMA 3R j
j constructlo,i Panel shall have a detailed typed directory of
all loads, Panel shall be "Square 0" TY NQOB, and breakers
r QOB, or equivalent. Panel shall have 12 poles.
r SURGE ARRESTOR
Power Panel "A-1" shall have a surge arrestor.
Surge arrestor shall be three phase, rated 650 volts maximum
line-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltage, Delta Pt. No, LA803,
GE, or approved equal.
r'
.
SURGE CAPACITOR
' Surge capacitor shall be three-phase suitable for use on
three-phase grounded or ungrounded system, rated 0-400 volts
RMS, phase-to-phase, Westinghouse Type DV or approved equal,
I ,
a 16150-1
3
;fir
T,
1
. 1
CONTROL. RELAYS
Control relays shall be industrial type, 600 volt, with
contacts rated 10 amps at 120 VAC, General Electrical CR 120
Line, Square 0 Class 8501, or approved equal.
INDICATING LIGHTS, SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS
Selector switches, pushbuttons, and indicating lights shall be
heavy duty, oil tight General Electric Series CR2940,
Westinghouse, or approved equal.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
The medium voltage motor control equipmen-` has been prepur-
chased, The Contractor shall install and make all necessasry
connections to this equipment as shown on the Plans.
ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACING
Electrical heat tracing shall be of a strip of self limiting,
parallel circuit construction consisting of a continuous inner
core of conductive material between two parallel copper bus
wires. Weatherproof thermostats
Chemelex Cat. No. AMC-1B
shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations
to supply power to the heating tape circuits when the ambient
temperature falls below 40°F. Heating tape for installation on
outdoor piping shall be Chemelex Cat, No. 3BTV, or approved
equal.
f
SUMP PUMP CONTROL
A system for alternatin5 two sump pumps shall be provided as ,
shown on the Plans. System shalt include two float switches.
Float switch A shall be activated on normal rising level of
water in sump, Float Switch B shall be activated by a high
level of water, indicating a need for both sump pumps to run.
Ball on Limit Switch A shall extend into vault sump. Ball on
limit Switch B shall extend to 2" above vault floor. Float
switches shall be wired to an alternator to provide alternate
use of pumps and use of both pumps on emergency demand basis.
Float switches and float kits shall be "Square D" Cl. 9035,
wall mount, N£MA 4 with N316SS chains and floats, or an
approved equivalent. Alternator shall be Square 0 Type HO.: or €
an approved equivalent. Alternator shall be mounted in a NEMA
4 enclosure with suitable room for making connections. l
y
END OF SECTION
f
16150-2
16500 LIGHTING SYSTEM
l 1,00 GENERAL
i
~ 1.01 SCOPE
The Contractor shall furnish and install all lighting fixtures,
M switches, receptacles, contactors, controls, and other accessories
as required to provide the system as shown on the Plans and des-
cribed in these specifications.
1.02 LOCATION OF OUTLETS
The approximate locations of cabinets, panelboards, switches,
power outlets, etc., are indirated on the Plans. Unless otherwise
indicated, convenience outlets shall be located I'-6" above floor,
wail switches shall be located 4'-6" above floor, and thermostats
shall be located 5'-0" above floor.
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES
Type Ao High pressure sodium wide beam floodlight with 150 watt high
pressure sodium lamp, Appleton Areamaster 100 or equivalent,
Type B; Ceiling mounted globe and guard with 100 watt incandescent
descent lamp, Appleton OBUWIOG, or approved equal.
2.02 LIGHTING CONTROL/DISTRIBUTION HARDWARE
A WALL SWITCHES
Wall switches for general use shall be of the totally en-
closed industrial type, specification grade, Arrow Hart,
Hubbell, or equal, as shown below.
t
Type Arrow-Hart No. Hubbell No.
Single Pole, 20 a. 1991 - 1991-1 1221 - 1221-1
Install wall switches to accomplish the control as shown on the
Plans, using single pole, as required. Use gang mounting where
two or more switches occur at the same location.
B. Weatherproof switches shall be cast boxes fitted with a single
switch and Type DS spring door cover, Switches shall be as
specified.
V 16500-1
.4
r;
T
Imp
3
r C, CONVENIENCE OUTLETS ~J
I Conveni,;n.e outlots for general use shale b 15 U ameereit125s
~ approved heavy duty duplex grounding typ P
volts, Leviton Spec-Master No. 5262-HG, General Electric
hospital grade equal, or equal. Outlet shall have heavy
phosphor
D, WEATHERPilOOF CONVENIENCE OUTLETS
Weatherproof convenien
with a single recepticle,ouReceptaclelshallabe CrousefHinds
CC71, Leviton 5261 HG, or equal with Type DS threaded cap.
E. SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE PLATES
Switch and receptacle plates shall be Leviton Spec-Master,
General Electric hospital grade or equal, and shall be
specification grade, higabuse4nylonth;ou514ut and shall
meet Federal Specification
END OF SECTION
l
r ~
f
I
s
f
1
7
I~
4
16500-2
f;
I
i
r
r
s'
A,
' APPENDIX A
FURNISHING PUMPING EQUIPMENT
r
fff
""iillll
r
f
f~ 1
f:
r
R•
i!
Yf
I
i
Ir
f~
;tii
1
A
tl
jl
CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ONE PUMPIN
G UNIT
r AND
~ MOT
g OR CONTROLLER
HIGH SERVICE PUMP NO, 5
JANUARY
1984 { "i"" ;,pF17425 u Sr"
,I / • x 3-89-
FREE8E AND NICNOLS, INC.
CONSULTING ENOINEERs
T -
i ~ J
I_
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
INVITATION FOR BIDS B-1
1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS IB-1
PROPOSAL P-1
l CONTRACT AGREEMENT CA-1
PERFORMANCE BOND PB-1
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SC-1 General SC-1
SC-2 Definition of Terms SC-1
$C-3 Interpretation of Phrases SC-1
SC-4 Addenda SC-2
t SC-5 Form of Proposal SC-2
SC-6 Qualification of Bidders SC-2
.4
SC-7 Rejection of Bids SC-3
SC-8 Notice of Award SC-3
SC-9 Review and Approval of Proposals SC-3
SC-10 Shop and Installation Drawings SC-4
SC-11 Delivery and Liquidated Damages SC-5 i
k SC-12 Manufacturer's Services SC-5
SC-13 Manufacturing Standards SC-6
SC-14 Patented Devices SC-6
SC-15 Equipment Warranty SC-6
a' SC-16 Acceptance SC-6
SC-17 Responsible Parties SC-7
SC-18 Payment SC-7
SC-19 Operation and Maintenance Manuals SC-7
SC-20 Guaranteed Efficiencies SC-8
TECHNICAL SPECIFCATIONS
y
SECTION I VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPING UNIT '
1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ,1-1
1.01 Scope 1-1
1.02 Submittals 1-1
1.03 Factory Inspection and Tests 1-2
1.04 Assembly 1-3
1.05 Marking 1-3
f 1,06 Pump Performance Requirements 1-3
1.07 Pump Setting Requirements 1-4
r
1
r
Table of Contents (Continued) PAGE
I' 2.00 PRODUCTS 1-4
2.01 Pump 1-4
2.02 Motor 1-7
3.00 INSTALLATION AND ACCEPTANCE
E " 3.01 General 1-9
3,02 Manufacturer's Representative 1-9
3.03 Acceptance Test 1-10
SECTION 2 MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT f
1.00 GENERAL 2-1
1,01 Scope 2-1
# 1.02 Standards 2-1 i
1.03 Manufacturer 2-1
1,04 Operating Voltage 2-1
1.05 Control Power 2-1
1.06 Insulation Levels 2-1
1.07 Motor Horsepower Rating 2-1 !
' 1.08 Enclosures 2-2 ~i
la 2.00 PRODUCTS 2-2
2.01 Materials 2-2
2.02 Fabrication 2-5
2.03 Finish 2-6
' 2.04 Factory Tests and Assembly 2-6
2.05 Small Wiring 2-6
2.06 Power Entry 2-6
2.07 Drawings 2-6
3.00 INSTALLATION 2-7
3.01 General 2-7
3.02 Tests and Operation 2-7
3.03 Painting 2-7
ATTACHMENTS
SYSTEM CURVES PLATE I
PUMP SETTING AND INSTALLATION PLATE 2 '
MOTOR CONTROLLER ELPIATION PLATE 3
MOTOR CONTROLLER SCHEMATIC PLATE 4
i
.~1.
I
T
INVI'fAT10N FOR BIDS
Sealed proposals addressed to the City of Denton, Texas, Purchasing Depart- i
ment, 9018 Texas St., will be received at the office of the Purchasing
Agent until ?.;00 p.m. April 10, 1984 for furnishing the following items:
BID NUMBER 9267 ONE VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP AND MOTOR CONTROLLER
1-1A Copies of plans, specifications, and Contract Documents are on file and
~rl may be examined without charge in the office of the Purchasing Agent or the
Utilities Department, 901 Texas Street, Denton, Texas. Copies of plans,
specifications and Contract Documents may be procured from Freese and
Nichols, Inc., Consulting Engineers, 811 Lamar Street, Fort Worth, Texas,
without deposit, by bona fide bidders.
A cashier's check, certified check or acceptable bidder's bond, payable
to the City of Denton, Texas, in an amount not less that five (5Y) per- J ,
cent of the bid submitted, must accompany each bid as a guarantee that,
if awarded the contract, the Bidder, will, within ten (10) days of award "
h of contract, enter into a contract and execute bonds on the forms pro-
vided in the Contract Documents.
In case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating proposal prices, the
City of Denton, Texas, reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous
construction thereof, or to reject any or all bids, and waive formali-
ties. No bid may be withdrawn within forty-five (45) days after date on
4rhi..h bids are opened.
} OF NTON, TEXAS
ohn Marshall, C.P.M.
Purchasing Agent
This advertisement to run March 23 and March 30, 1984.
r'
,i
I
B-1
~Z1
,
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
.v
U1 - PREPARATION OF BID
j Bidders shall use the proposal forms included in the documents.
i
fi Proposal forms are to be left attached to documents in same manner
as received by Bidders. Supplemental data to be furnished, as shown
s in the Specifications, shall be included in same sealed envelope
with Proposal,
02 - DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL
It shall be the Bidder's responsibility for the delivery of his
proposal at the proper place by the time stated in the Notice to
Bidders. The mere fact that a proposal was dispatched will not be
considered. Each proposal shall be in a sealed envelope plainly
hx marked with the word "PROPOSAL" and the name or description of the
i project.
"5
Q TTION OF BIDDERS
03 - UALFICA
Pre-qualification of Bidders is not required; however, at the re- j
quest of the Owner, after receipt of bids, each Bidder requested to
do so shall furnish complete information pertaining to his facil-
ities and experience and such other references and evidence deemed
necessary to show the Bidder's ability to perform satisfactorily the
work on which he has bid.
No materials or equipment shall be offered from any manufacturer who
has not been regularly engaged in the production of materials or
'i equipment of the size and character herein specified for a period of
five years or more.
a 04 - INTERPRETATION AND ADDENDA
If any person contemplating submitting a bid for the proposed work
is in doubt as to the meaning of any part o" the Specifications or
Bid Forms, he may submit to the engineer a written request for an
interpretation thereof prior to 48 hours of the time for receiving
bids. The person submitting the request, will be responsible for its
prompt delivery. Any interpretation or modification of these docu-
ments will be made only by Addendum duly issued and a copy of such
i Addendum will be mailed or delivered to each person receiving a set
of such Documents. The Owner will not be responsible for any other
explanations or interpretations. Such Addenda will become a part of
the Specifications,
05 - ALTERNATE BIDS AND OPTIONAL_ MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
The bidder may submit a Proposal for Alternate Materials or Equip-
ment in addition to his Base Bid, for the Owner's consideration, if
iB-1
3
~i
1
he feels the Alternate may have certain advantages to the Owner in
its intended use. Materials or Equipment differing from that speci-
fied may be submitted, provided the Bidder clearly states such
differences, and provided all essential requirements of the speci-
fications are strictly adhered to. If the Materials or Equipment
offered under this provision is, in the opinion of the engineer or
the Owner, equal to or better than that specified, or satisfies the
06 requirements of the protect, it will, at the engineer's option, be l
given consideration Where a statement of such departure is not
made, it will be understood that equipment or materials in strict
accordance with specifications is being offered.
06 - AWARD OF CONTRACT
The Owner will evaluate the bids and award Contract based upon
Owner's decision for most valuable award. By separate Contract, the
Owner will provide for installation of the equipment in new pump i
station extension. The Contractor for furnishing the equipment
G described herein shall fully cooperate with the Owner and instal-
lation Contractor so as to provide first class equipment and in-
stallation, entirely suited for the conditions in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
The Owner presently plans to award pump station construction Con-
tract, which will include installation of the equipment included
herein, some time in September, 1984.
07 - BID ON ALL ITEMS
Bidders shall submit bid on each item in the Proposal, The Owner
reserves the right to evaluate all items of the Proposal for pur-
chase. Such selection is considered to be for the Owner's
benefit so as to purchase all items through one Contract.
i 08 - PUMP STATION SITE 1
Bidders are expected to be familiar with the pump station in-
stallation and to have a thorough knowledge of all conditions under I
which the new equipment will be installed and operated. I
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
G
i
s'
a
IB-2
PROPOSAL
FOR FURNISHING EQUIPMENT
DATE: IV-10 $41
PROPOSAL OF: -7°EA BOD
TO: John J. Marshall, CPO
Purchasing Agent
Denton, Texas
PROPOSAL FOR FURNISHING: 1 - Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit
1 - Motor Controller
The undersigned bidder, pursuant to the foregoing Notice to Bidders, has
carefully examined this Proposal, the Special Conditions of Agreement,
the Technical Specifications and Drawings and will furnish and deliver
equipment on which he bids, in complete accordance with these Documents,
and binds himself upon acceptance of his Proposal, to execute a Contract
to be issued by the Owner, for the following prices to wit:
Item Total
No. Description and Unit Price Amount
1. Furnishing One (1) Vertical Turbine Pumping
Unit, with a rated capacity of 6,400 GPM I
at 250 feet total head, and a guaranteed +
overall wire-to-water field efficiency of
ac)at 250 feet head, for the total price
f N/RI.~~AJC ouSAU
wq,
OT_ Dollars $d 017.
2. Furnishing One (1) Motor Controller as des- {
cribed in the Specifications, for the total i
amount of
?~..Ti•~~~R~re Tom, ~Ne,~ i
OtlG loo _ Dollars $z3/ 00
V
SUB-TOTAL
3. For additional optional cost for witnessing
the pump test by a representative of the
Owner, the total amount of:
Dollars f'761
TOTAL AMOUNT BID f ut-a o0
P-1
;I
•t _
The undersigned bidder agrees to start work as soon as possible after
notification of an award and immediately enter into contract to deliver
all equipment covered herein within the number of consecwtive calendar
days shown, after notification of the award. It is desired to have
r delivery at early date; therefore consideration will be given to delivery
...J dates which will benefit the Owner and installation Contractor.
item Description Delivery Date I
1 Vertical Turbine Pumping Unit 1jp
2 Motor Controller
3 Additional time, if any,
f
for witness test of pump 7 JS
Enclosed with this Proposal is a cashier's check, certified check, or
Proposal Bond in the amount of r
u 5% of greatest amount bid SS )
as proposal security to be collected and retained by the Owner as liqui-
f dated damages in the event a Contract Award is made by the Owner based on
this proposal within forty-five (45) days after receiving bids, and the
undersigned fails to execute the Contract and required bonds within ten
(10) days after being notified and receiving the conformed documents.
t Otherwise, the said bid security will be returned to the undersigned upon
demand.
The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda.
F
Respectfully submitted,
B
r
ar
11 e
.__.YayL'►~dy C/~ Q3 707
-"Addre"ss
. /~Cr ~ F~CTUer~vG Ti~''rE A~r~R. Pecr~P7- DF
a „ZLtA ArNaiAAi*iRC,v lJi4C r kG
E 3a Ds Prcre P-2~
.a
DATA SHEET AND SUBMITTAL INFORMATION
1 Submit the following data and information with Proposal for each size unit. i
Pump Data
Pd~ ~y FcowA y
(1) Make and Type Letter of Pump Zq L4 e" _
(2) Speed -RPM Z
"'444777 {3) Diameter of impellers bMaterial /S 00 -SAC 40 8RZ,
(4) Maximum Diameter Impellers for Bowls sus "
(5) Size of Bowls 2-V
(6) Number of Bowls
(7) Impeller Shaft Diameter S Material ~I( 5
(e) Line Shaft Diameter A Material
(9) Column Diameter and Wall Thickness '~O4'A04 ,
(10) Maximum Horsepower Reg. for Pump
Including Thrust Bearing Loss ~7L~ BNP ti
i Motor Data u$, 6(&CTZrC
(1) Make and Type Letter of Motor fdU soa N.P
(2) Brake Horsepower of Motor at 70° Rise by SGO
Embedded Detector
(3) Locked Rotor KYA 60he F
(4) Motor Efficiency at Full Load O
{ (5) Motor Efficiency at 3/4 Load
(6) Power Factor at Full Load 7, S
(7) Power Factor at 3/4 Load
G` (8) Method of Insulating and Impregnating
Motor Coils
(9) Recommended Minimum Time Between Starts 90 /t m,
Weights '
(1) Weight of Pump S'Sq p
(2) Weight of Motor
I ~ (3) Weight of Motor Stand
(4) Weight of Complete Unit dip 96 ,
(5) Thrust on Foundation, Up or Down
Motor Control Data
(1) Make and Type of Motor Controller S, A ccr
(2) Outside Dimensions (Starter A Transition) b
(3) WO ght b~R
f
l' p_3
r~
t
2494 S. Railroad Avenue I P.U. dox 164 Fresno, 021110 nli 93101
Telephone 209 442.4000 1 Telex 355.483 1 Cable Address Floway f
ra April 10, 1984
x~
j 'CITY OF DENTON, TEXAS
s Purchasing Department /
901 B Texas Street
ATTN: John J Marshall
Purchasing Agent
Peabody Floway
SUBJECT Bid #9267 - One Vertical Turbine Pump and Motor
We are pleased to offer our proposal on the above-subject bid #9267.
Please find enclosed the required bid bond, the required curves
r
drawings and literature, and the wear ring installation procedure.
The following are several points of clarifications
1. We will accept the 12 month warranty after final acceptance as
noted in the specification as long as the final acceptance does
not exceed 6 months after shipment. The maximum that we will pay
g for any labor for removal and reinstallation of equipment for any
defective parts will be $1,000.00 net total, The motor control
manufacturer, Siemane-Allis, takes exception to section SC-IS,
2nd paragraph. After the word "replace", insert the words "or
repair" and also delete the words "with new components". Also,
the motor egntrol center includes no transition section as this
Y motor control center does not fit against an existing older
controller.
2. We will accept 90X not 30 days from invoice date of the proposal
amount, and the remaining 10% not to exceed 6 months from invoice
date or final acceptance, whichever comes first,
3. The specifications require that the bowls be enamel lined. Due
to the size of the particular bowls, we are unable to furnish
enamel lined bowls. We propose to substitute Scotch Kote brand
134, which is acceptable for pottabin water. (See attached letter
r from U.S. Environmental Protection Agency).
F u
4. Extra for premium efficiency motor which will, make Bid Item #1
wire-to-water efficiency 81.3%, is $1382.00, All else remains as
offered. <e er 4e rt C'4&T tbetA
PEABODY FLOWAY, INC. 1" ' C~)' N n . G ? rg 3
Steve Pfeifa
{p Southern District Manager
qi
P.F. /J4
n
CITY OF DE:NTON, TUAS
(1) 500 IIP CLOSE; COUPLED PUMP
s0a
~2) 1 lei
400
70%A v
z
i w { 1 i IT j Lu
LL 00,
3
44 GO% t }t t;, _v
a i I, LL I
I ca 200}~ w
14 100
1 }1
o t } }3 } :,t
I1
It I
~ n
600
goo } { ~ ~ l tl
r ,
O 1600 ~2b0 48a® f400
200, GALLONS PER MINUTE~M~~^
ENGINEER: PREE;SE b NICktUL5, INC, TYPE 24 MKM~ _TI
hh L NO. OF STAGES _ 3
ab'6 ,,y ffay R.P.M.
rE'
' PUMP SERIAL NO.-_
DWO. No, .8- 12 2 -1
G 8~ 'i
'There's a Difference... " AWN. RY - DATE
Nu t
Peat «dy F way -
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP,
TYPE VF
' V NPT
DRAIN TAP
i
67-3 8"±
r x" N" 'DISCHARGE BASE
f t YAP _ 1
DRAIN TAP 20u150# -R•FANSI FLG 30u_1500 -F. F.
i (20)-1=1/4" DTA. HOLES (28)-1-3/8" UTA.
i - gir
25" _ nIA BOLT CIRCLE. 36"
18" M10 FLANGE O.D. 38-3/4"
'BOLT HOLES STRADDLE VERTICAL !
MOTOR (WP-1)
c.E WEST. OR EQUAL 2oX24~K30" „
_ r MAKE VF STL. DISCH HD
TYPE -9--NRR SEAL-MECH.0 PACKED-Ca
3 HP 500 RPM 1180 2-7 16" LINE SHAFT 16" COL
i PHASE 3 HZ. 60 6400 -GPM _50'_TDH
,gl 81-8" VWAGE__._.- 2300 TYPE 24~ RITAGE 3
f
IMPELLER
FRAME NO.
rH a
t TYPE COUPLING FLG. TYPE CPLG, y STRAINER
- - MATERIAL
ii to MIN. iHp COL PIPE SCH, 30 STL, * PUMP BOWL-AA-814 30
SUBM. LINE SHAFT A582-416 S.S. IMPELLER. 8584-838 B"
REQUIRED LINE WAFT BEARINGS BOWL BEARINGS 8505-844 BRZ
'y `1~4'VMECH.SEAL STRAINER S S.
_
ix--- I BOWL SHAFT. A582-416 S.S. DISCH. HEAD FAB. STL. I
RE J.C. #100-tt *S.C. - SCOTCItKOTX
27SHAFT PACKING-
1 Fif.RK5 CUSTOMER - CITY OF DENTON. Tgg_•
NO. UNITS REQ'D. 1 FLUID POTABLE WATER
CLOSE COUPLED PUMP'
f SPEC. GRAVITY, 1~ ORDER NO.
_ VISCOSITY,_...._~:..
• TEMPERATURE Anarn SUPPLIER EtiGItiEER: FAEESC fi NTCFtOLS, IN
PH
DWG. NO._ _ Q0~ 31 2 2 - _2
NOT TO HE USED SERIAL -
SB 4/5/84 FOR CONSTRUCTION
i
1
Product Data 3RI
Scotc:hkote' 134
Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coaling
Dated, May 1979
1. Product Description 3. General Application 4. Cure Specifications
SCUTCHKOTE 134 may be applied
a 9COTCHKOTE Brand 134 Fusion Steps to metal articles which have been pre'
+i Bonded Epoxy Cating is a onspart, a. Remove oil, grease, and loosely heated between 3004F 11491C) a.td
the
therheatmosetcurable,ting Seml•rigid, powdered epamineoxy cured, coac• adheringdeposrts. 4606F 1232°C).F 134 After coatin application, must be
} g
ins dais wi to provide umcor- . b. Abrasive blast clean the SCOTCHKOT surface r- cured according to one of the follow-
rosionproceMiononmetalsurfaceewhite. 0 or MACE No. 2 near- Ing to achieve mammum performance
r , Features) c. Apply mechanical masks or mask properties:
- Noprimerrequirwt. with SCOTCH Brand Glass Cloth Telnparatunefthe
ArlkleatT,jof Trpied
} SCOTCH Brand Alu•
- Particularly suitable for electro• Tape 381 or PorehApplkatlen Gel Time Cur.'[1me
static or air-spray application on mimum Foil Tape 426 as required. 415'F(24$ C) 40aeeonda t minutae
±A preheatedmateiartfeles, d. Preheat aY.icle to the desired W A6o•P(23m) eo►etond• lominuue
lly ` :1rti' t0 lication temperature per Section 4. +oo'F(204'C) 120 secondc IS minutes
-Canb electroatparts app p 3604F(I7TC) 330 "condo 6minutes
unheated red natal by bpartsakinpi, and subas e, Deposit SCOTCHKOT£ 134 by
4 powder apny.to a minimum thick- If SCO''CHKOTE 134 Is electro•
powder 1
uently cur
- Long gel time allows ap Ilcation on nest of 10 mils (254 rnirrons) • statiuUy appplied to unheated parts
4 large or complex arties without f. Cure according to Section 4, the cure Cigna should be measurer
f j fear of runs, sags. laminations, or from the time the coated part reacies
"1 uasighdyoverspray, g, Visually and electrically inspect the cure temperature. After cure, the
Es {gay useful for coatiug the In- for coating flaws after the coating coating may be force cooW using y
i side of pipe or other fabrications has cooled to 200417 MOM or lower, air or water to facilitate inspection
j where a smooth, corroaion•resistant h, Repair all defects. and handling. +
coating is required. _ - I
-Con be machined by grinding or
cutting to meet close tolerance re '1{
gtlirementa. Test Data Coating
-Allows easy visual inspection of T«tl9eeeriptl°~ Results
coated articles. '„Y
Can be painted with alkyd paint Adhesbn Ekomew 2 >so3000psi
kg/tm+ ~
acrylilacquer, or acrylic ename~ ; A"~ _ sMss ASTM D•1002 4300 pet
for color coding. 10md126/Micron IglubUN 302kg/cm'
- Will not sag, cold flow, or become Impact 6ardwr-6leln.ll,ecmindlwtup t501n•lb
Light AInX31at3In(0,32cm.r•eem 1.6kgsm I
soft In ght storage.
U
- weight for lower shipping 17.6cml staelpanel
COete, Hudnees Ruco4ASTM D4683 113
r)
fl g tote
>
L4 term storage under most Cii• AbrlResistseim ace CS 11, ASTM D1000D-1044 0,07
weight x• 000 cycles
=conditions. 'S7tV"Shodt P09 Fto- 1004 r 1154 IC to -73' C1 10 cyc Ito va offect
-Protects over wide temperature 4 in g 4 in 110,2 cm a 10,2 cm)
range. ooeadpasel
peaoustion ASTM O.11 0
4o'IF to 240•F1-4o•cto lle•cl
i - Reeistsdirect burial soil stress.
- High adhesion and toughness. Tetullestrargth ASTMD-2370 73ropat
bl3kg/cm+
- Excellsntchemlcalresistance,
Elongetbe AsrMD237o 4,2'x
- Resists cathodkdfabondnleuc Compressive ASTM0496 12" psi
- Long-term performance history in St»ngth 900 kg/.^1t
0.26
water, sewage, and other service CesHkkntot sudlna
environments. FrVtaw mil
.,yy ElecuicStrtneb ASTMD•149 Ip00 1000 lu/valu/
G. Properties Het Water 120-day inmosvion it160'F171'CI Oood adhesion
Vol" II No blistering
,t
may FuntUrern Elettriul ASTMD•267 I.2°10 ohln°cm
Cekr
Specific Gravity 1.51 Rae4thlty 7:111-'Cj/sae/cm /C'cm
Coverage 1271t'Ah/mil Thermal MIL119923E
0,60mIAN/mm Conductivity e,6g/tn',relghlgain
Hold boddenslty 33lbe/ht Frm Fllm ASTM D•670
SSOkr/m+ Waterlmmarsion Funglnen
Shelf bieat80•F121•Cl 12 months FungusRaslatancs MILSTD910•1) Method 506 No effect
M14E•6212C stAtim4st ' Av M 120204 &CI CI 120 eeeonda W Salt est Foghtromrtar ASTM-42 6000hows Suriscechdk
400'F
- HoeHoet
Edgecovstage 12'4.18% Soil Street - Burial Flwwu of Raclemuion 26 c)clu Noofflment diameter
EeploelWUty l minhnum ,03 of/ft' Salt bock Ndsy..SVolt DIsbon
Yrai~_._
6. Chemical Resistance Isopropyl Alcohol Dernkneralized
Kerosene Distilled
No effect after two years' exposure at Salt
T3•F i23oCl, Linseed Oil Sea
Acetic Add up to 25% Lubricating Oil Xylol
Acetone i Softened) Magnesium Carbonate Zinc Chloride
AluminurnChloride Magnesium Chloride Zinc Nitrate
r Aluminum Hyydroxide Mae turn Hydroxide Zinc Sulfate
y Aluminum Nltrata Magneakum Nitrate
Aluminura Sulfate Maggnnesium Sulfate 10•l0•lU Fertilizer, Saturated
Aly AkohoI MEK ISoftenod.l
sl Ammon It Carbonate Mercuric Chlonde 7, Handling Precautions
' AromoalumChloride Methanol ISoftenedl SCOTCHKOTE 134 is a finely ground
AmmonlumF}ydroxideupto 10096 M1~AarK~i thyl•Iso•Butyl Ketone! ppoowder. It does not contain solvents. oil Ammonkizi Nitrate Pr; ,uct may become
unusable if
~I Ammonium Phosphate Mineral Spirits stored above 800F 127°C1.
Ammonium Sulfate MMolastme
otootorOil
Amyl A lcohol Mr c Acid sdety Precautions;
Barium Carbonate SCOTCHKOTE 134 Is a finely ground
Barium Chloride Naphtha Lowder containing a bisphenal A
Barium Hydroxida Nblrel Chloride epichlorohydrin type epoxy reain, and
Barium Nitrate Nickel Nitrate an amine curative. The powder is
Barium Sulfate Nickel Sulfate irritating to the eyes and may cause
Benzene Nitric Acid up to 30% akin irritation and sensitization, The
Boric Add Nonane duet is irritating to the respiratory
Borax Octane system,
Butyl Alcohol Oxalic Add As with any finely divided organic ma*
CadmiumCbloride Pentane terlal, dust clouds of powder can be 1
Cadmium Nitrate Perchloroethylens ignited b open flames or electrical
Ca" Mium Sulfate Phosphoric Add up to 00% sparks. Resin duet collection equip,
cawnm Carbonate Phosphorous Trichloride meat should be provided with ode-
C1ciumtChloride Potasalum. Aluminum Sulfate quateesplosionrelease,Possible
. CalciuamHydroxide potassium Bicarbonate sources of Ignition should be elimi•
Caldnm Nitrate Potassium Borate nattid. To avoid buildup of static elec-
Calcium Sulfate Potassium Carbonate tricity, equipment should be grounded,
't! Carbon Disulfide Potassium Chloride Use only in well ventilated areas with
Carbon Tetrachloride Potassium Dichromate up to 1096
sufficient air movement to maintain
Caustic Potash Potassium Hydroxide sir cotimtration of material at reeo
Caustic Soda Potassium Nitrate nizzed health and safety levels. Avoid
Chlorine 2% Potassium Sulfate prolonged breathln of dust and
Citric Acid up to 25% Propylene Glycol g
. vappoonet local ezhauet is recommended.
~y Copper Chloride Sewage when dust and/or vapor is present,
Copper Nitrate
f",o Sulfate Silver Nitrate the use of respiratory protection is
}r p Soap Solution recommended. Avoid eye contact and
4 Cru eOll. Soaps or repeated akin contact.
Cyclahexane Sodium Bicarbonate
r I
Cyclohexens iSodlum Bisulfate Wearing es Is eve protection recommended, "under tan eder
Cydopentane Sodium Carbonnsto five gloves
contaminated clothing before reuse.
Detergent Sodium Chlorate
0 Dlessl Fuot Sodium Chloride Suggated First AidI
Dlethyleoe Glycol. Soditun Hydroxide In case of eye contact, immed!ately
Dipropylene Glycol Sodium Mots Silicate up to 69'o flush eyes with pkaty of water for at
Ethanol SSoftenadl Sodium Nitrate last ten minutes, Calla physician. For
Ethylbermoo sodium Sulfate skin contact, immediately wash ex-
EthyWnsotycol Sodium Thlosulfits up to 60% posod areas, with mild soap and water,
Ferric Chloride up to 8096 Stannic Chloride For inhalation, provide fresh air. i
SW1ur
Ferric Nitrate Sulfuric Acid up to 60% tHpORTANT NOTiCS TO PURCHASER,
Ferrous ForrieSullato Synthetic Sea Fuel 18096 Naphtha, art nurw.ntr, aeh" ak~ba aAd "c^^r•
if 2096 Toluene, lti% Xylene, S% m#6&jko,+~e+udndArrvinambes#dontomwo
Ferrous 9U ace boueve to b4 PoW44r but tAc mewwY or com•
S' to i00% Benzen par.Mrr rA.,e,f to we na,anfooa and Ma M-
Frrou9 SuIlato
to 1 Synthetice)Usage 14x4na to owd4 in uqu ofok ganenNtr, /'tP"toot
Formic Add a to
Freon, Gas 8t Liquid Tetrapropylene ImpU4d
Toluene "&4Wturoi only obugatl04
l I Mfg,) SrWr'r sad
Gae
' Gee i Natural) Triethylene Glycol b4 eo r, rucA ew,utly of t Prods p
diUs,l Phosphate to b4 w/.rtivr. N.17AI+ 1e11.r nor n o„n(xlvrrr
Gasollnel.oaded Tr~isodium rAou b, u4U4 /or o gtury, to.m or domdjo.
GneaklnO Unleaded m - dlr4ct orrouegtNnrlM. ufrG.r ow aJ lM wrolor
Glycerin IAo Imbutty to w4 thr product Srlor4 wing, urn
U nd ecanol
U A4 ,trnntne tAs rullobUfty of IM pt 'ish /or
ree it nri sad
Ifoptane bit 1ntrnd4d we, au! W4r nlrunrr s,
Urine
Hexane u,•Wllly whatrorwrin cainkrion lArnadlA
1}exa ens Glycol .116 ttdl.a44nt or rvrommmdalloa not ronta(nrd
Hydrochloric Add up to 26% Vinegar AsMA 444 Aew or,y fore s,+4 //«I untrrr In an
Hydrofluoric Add up to 40°',0 Water arr« anal dgnd by olitcrrr o/ r4wr and maRU•
Hydrogen Sulfide Chlorinated fmnwr.
eronsr.zrtraln t0ro r u s~
Pipeline Coatings dr Services
Electro•Producis DIvlslon13M
t'.
i '
• ~een~p~ 4
A t UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
WASHINGTON, O.C. 20460
5 JAa a
n
A Pry 2 8?.
P.W. Willard, Ph.D.
Manager, Product Regulatory
Toxicology I
Medical Department
3M Center u' f's li 1___---~--
St. Paul, Minnesota 55144 •
RE: File Number 06-038.OOAEB83 i
Dear Dr. Willard:
Based on information submitted, the product listed below is
acceptable for use as a coating for potable water applications
when used within the conditions stated below: j
Product; Scotchkote Brand 134 t
Conditions: 1. The product is properiy applied according
to the manufacturer's specifications.
2, The product continues to meet the
specifications of good manufacturing
practices.
3. After complete curing, the coating 1s
thoroughly rinsed with potable water prior
to being placed in service.
We would not anticipate any adverse health effects resulting from
such use of this product assuming the product continues to meet
the supplied specifications.
We are currently in the process of revising our evaluation
procedures as outlined in the federal Re ister Vol. 44 No, 141
42776.8 Frida Jul 201_1 en these rer s on$ are
Complete an t e TeF'm procedures are in place, alt existing
advisories will be periodically reviewed.
t,
y
i
" Our opinion concerning the safety of the product does not
constitute an endorsement, nor does 1t relate to its
effectiveness for the intended use, if this letter is to be used
in any way, we require that it be quoted in its entirety. ,
SiIterely yours,
U Hanson, P.E „ Chief
" Sci a and Technology Branch
Criteria and Standards Division
Office of Drinking Water (WH•550) ;
cc: Regional Drinking Water Representatives
Holders of the Water Supply Guidance Series
Yr. John Trax, State Programs Division, ODW 1
z
t.
.
c'1
s ~
F
4
1
i'.
;t
1
a
t
r?
its h i
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
STATE Of TEXAS I
COUNTY OF DENTON _ - )
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 9th_ day of May
A.D., 19 84, by and between the CitV of Denton
of the County of Denton and State of Texas, acting through its
purchasing agent - thereunto duly authorized so to do,
Party of the First Part, hereinafter termed the OWNER, and- 1
Peabody Floway,.Inc. -
of the City of Fresno County of Fresno
and State of California Party of the Second Part, hereinafter
termed CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and
agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the Party of
the First Part (OWNER), and under the conditions expressed in the bonds
bearing even date herewith, the said Party of the Second Part (CONTRACTOR)
hereby agrees with the said Party of the First Part (OWNER) to commence
and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows,
Furnishing One Pumping Unit
and Motor Controllerit Per ium Efficiency Motor and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in
the General Conditions of the Agreement; and at his (or their) own proper
cost and expense to furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery, equip-
ment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and other accessories and
services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with
the conditions and prices stated in the Proposal attached hereto, end in
accordance with all the General Conditions of the Agreement, the Special
Conditions, the Notice to Bidders (Advertisement for Bids), Instructions
,i
i
`7 10-15-71
to Bidders, and the Performance and Payment Bonds, all attached hereto,
and in accordance with the plans, which includes all maps, plats, blue-
prints, and other drawings and printed or written expianatoryomatter
thereof, and the Specifications therefor, as prepared by FREESE AND
NICHOLS, INC., herein entitled the ENGINEER, each of which has been identi-
fied by the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER, all of which are made a part
hereof and collectively evidence and constitute the entire contract.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work on or after the
date established for the start of work as set forth in a written notice
to commence work and to substantially complete all work within the time
stated in the Proposal, subject to such extensions of time as are
pro- vided by the General and Special Conditions.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds the
price or prices shown in the Proposal, which forms a part of this Con-
1V tract, such payments to be subject to the General and Special Conditions
of the Contract,
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed
this Agreement in the year and day first above written.
ATTEST;
Purchase Order 63583
for Bid No, 9267
City of Denton, Texas
Party of the F1r'st Part, OWNER
BY
E u John J, Marshall, C.P.M. )
Purchasing Agent
f
t
(SEAL) i
ATTEST;
Party of the Seco_n_ Part, CONTRACTOR
T 3
Y
^T~t -'fe
(SEAL)
2
10/22/73
PERFORMANCE BOND
{i
Yrj STATE OF TEXAS '
COUNTY OF DENTON I
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS; That Peabody ,F.loway, Inc.
of the City of _
County of Fresno and State of California ,
as PRINCIPAL, and
as SURETY, 1
i
authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as of on bonds
for principals, are held and firml bound unto the City f
Denton, Texas as OWNER, in the penal sum of Fifty-One
Thousand Three Hundred Ninety-Three--------------Dollars 51,393.00 )
for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and
their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, Jointly
and severally, by these presents;
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract +
with the OWNER, dated the 9th day of May 19 84 for the con-
struction of
Furnishing One Pumping Unit
and Motor Controller _
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to
the same extent as if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such, that if
the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract and shall in all
respects duly a+id faithfully observe and perform all and singular the cove-
nants, Hants, conditions and agreements in and by said contract agreed and cove- ,
nanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to the
true intent and meaning of said Contract and the Plans and Specifications
hereto annexed, then this obligation shall be void: otherwise to remain
in full farce and effect;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the
provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended
;r 3
n 10-15-71
178
,iii` -
by acts of the 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and all liabilities
on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said
Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length hdrein.
# PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed upon this
bond, venue shall lie in _ Denton Country, State of Texas.
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change,
A extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or
s to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings
accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on this bond,
} and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alter-
ation or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be per-
formed thereunder.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and
sealed this instrument this 9th day of May 3984
Peabody Elowa Inc.
----surety
Principal
BY _ By_ _
Title Title
F Address P. 0, Box 164 Address
Fresno, California 93707
(SEAL) (SEAL)
The name and address of the Resident Agent of Surety is:
-10
"i
f'
NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract.
i ~
I
d
4
~a i0-i5-'71
,
1
i
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SC-1_ __-GENERAL
f A. The work to be performed consists of the furnishing of all
materials, machinery, equipment, superintendence and labor and
performing all work necessary for furnishing and delivering
I the equipment specified.
r 8, It is the intention of the owner to evaluate and select the
`c'• equipment from the bids received and award a Contract for
furnishing such equipment, which will be transferred by the
item o SC-18 herein}ation. Payment
owner to a hall be in Construction With Contractor
s
SC-2 DEFINITION OF TERMS
A. City. Whenever the word "City" is used in the Specifications 4
and Contract Documents, it shall be understood as referring to
the City of Denton, Texas.
B, Owner. Whenever the word "Owner" is used in the Specifics-
of Document, be understood as
e Contract
referring to the ,
C, Engineer, Whenever the word "Engineer" Is used In the Speci-
fications and Contract Docrments, i shall be understood as
referring to Freese and Nichols, Inc,, Consulting Engineers,
811 Lamar Street, Fort Worth, Texas 76102, Engineer of the
Owner, or such other engineer, Supervisor, or Inspector as may
be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular posi-
tions,
r
D. Vendor. Whenever the word "Vendor" or "Equipment Manu-
facturer" is used in the specifications and contract docu-
ments, it shall be understood as referring to the successful
equipment supplier for this project, his legal representative
or his agent, signing this Proposal and the Contract.
E. General Contractor, Whenever the word "General Contractor" is
used in the specifications and contract documents, it shall be
7 understood as referring to the Construction Contractor who
will install the equipment specified herein at the City of
Denton Water Treatment Plant.
SC-3 INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
A. Whenever the word^ "Directed", "RequirePrescrermitted",words
y "Designated", "Considered Necessary ,
of like import are used in the specifications, it shall be
l understood that they are intended as a preronative of the
z
si
s:
Engineer; and similarly, the words "Approval", "Acceptable",
"Satisfactory", or words of like import, shall mean approval,
etc., by the Owner.
B. Wherever in these specifications for the work the terms or
descriptions of various qualities relative to finish, work- ,
manship, and/or other qualities of similar kind cannot, be-
cause of their nature, be specifically and briefly described
in general terms, the Engineer shall be the final judge as to
whether or not the workmanship as described is being performed
in accordance with the intent of the plans and specifications
therefore, and the work shall be completed in accordance with
his interpretation of the meaning of such words, terms or
clauses.
SC-4 ADDENDA
The Owner reserves the right to issue additions to these specifications
prior to accepting bids for the equipment. Such addenda shall be made a
part of these specifications.
To properly qualify his proposal, each bidder shall acknowledge receipt
of such on the outer envelope containing his bid proposal and in the
space provided in the Proposal,
SC-5 FORM OF PROPOSAL
Forms of Proposal, Special Conditions, and Technical Specifications may
be obtained at the office of Freese and Nichols, Inc., Consulting Engi-
neers, 811 Lamar Street, Fort Worth, Texas 76102, without charge, by bona
i'ide bidders.
Bidders shall bid all items in the Proposal. It is the intent of the
Owner to award a purchase order for the best combination of bids sub-
mitted, based on Owner's decision,
The bid price as stated in the proposal shall be a lump sun price for
fabricating and furnishing the equipment and materials, f.o.b job site,
including all applicable taxes, and all costs for each of the items as
hereinafter specified. The bid prices shall be written in ink, both in
words and in figures, In case of discrepancy between the price written
in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words
shall govern.
Prospective bidders shall make a careful examination of the specifi-
cations and shall become fully informed of the overall requirements.
SC-6 UALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
A. After the bids have been opened and tabulated, the Owner
reserves the right to require the low and/or best bidder to
j furnish a "bidder's Statement of Manufacturing Experience,
I
SC-2
i
. VW,
I
I
l
1
Equipment and Financial ConditioOwner a may make conditiouchreceden _to
issue of a purchase order, The investi
pto the
gations as may be considered necessary with erespethe ct
urchase
responsibility of the bidder to whom it app
order will be issued.
B. The pump manufacturer shall have not less than ten (10) years
experience in the United States in the design and manufacture
of pumping units of similar deign, ancomparable in size,
head and capacity of the type specified be furnished.
C. The motor and switchgear manufacturer shall have not less than
s ten (10) years of experience in the design and construction of
equipment of the type specified to be furnished,
s SC-7 REJECTION OF BIDS
The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted
by the bidder, or if the Owner's investigations of seen bidder, faile, to
satisfy the Owner as to his qualifications to carry out tiie obligations
' of the purchase order and complete the work contemplated therein in a
skilled, workmanlike manner,
ered ar be re, If the
ionsinot9callednfonr,,,yconditionseor unauthorized
` alteratioonwinlform,oaddit
Proposals i ter
alternates or irregularities of any kind. The Owner reserves the right ~
to reject any or all bids and to waive any informalities,
SC-8 NOTICE OF AWARD
The Owner will notify t days successful after thebdaterofbreceivinggbidsontract,
i
~ within n forty-five
SC-9 REVIEW AND APPROVAL OF PROPOSALS
t~
After proposals from equipment vendors are opened, the Owner reserves the I
right, in selecting the equipment to give full weight to type, construc- I
tion, weight, function, serviceability, efficiency, and other character-
:a istics that may in the opinion of the Engineer be material factors in the
choice of the equipment best suited to serve the Owner's Interests.
Each equipment vendor submitting a proposal shall furnish, as a part of
his bid, full specifications and dimensioned draweMe9saAp~ic~b ethallgasp-
where
meet offered, together with performance curve,
herein later described, and such data relating to the equipment selected
.1 by t contract for installingttheeequipmentations as it applies to
the separate
The Owner reserves the right to evaluate the bids utilizing a theoretical
operating schedule in conjunction with the pump and motor efficiencies
stated in the Bidders proposals in order to determine the best sub-
mittal. This evaluation may also extend the full expected operating life
SC-3
,
y
c
of the unit and may include the cost of power which will be consumed
during the unit's lifetime. The equipment vendor is hereby served notice
that the first cost of his unit may or may not be the decidi,ig factor in
the selection of the pumping unit.
The evaluation shall be made by the Engineer. The information for tine
evaluation of each proposal shall be obtained from the Proposal and the
information required as a part of the Proposal, and the d.eta sheet which
is contained 1n the Technical Specifications. Each bidder shall present
complete data on his equipment at the ti n,e proposals are submit,-6d and
additional information from manufacturers will not be accepted after
openingg of bids; however, where additional information on equipment and
costs is required by the Engineer in the process of evaluating the pro-
posals, an equal opportunity will be presented to all bidders, by letter,
'r to submit the same information.
SC-10 SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
The Vendor whose equipment is selected by the Owner shall, within 45 j
days, submit for review by the Engineer complete shop (fabrication) and i
erection drawings for the equipment and materials to be furnished. The
F Vendor shall proceed with shop drawings and manufacture of equipment
after notification of being selected.
The procedure for submission of working drawings for approval shall be as x
follows;
A. The Vendor shall submit six (6) prints of drawings; one (1) tc
the Owner and five (5) to the Engineer for his approval. The j
submission of drawings shall be accompanied by a letter of -I
transmittal. The vendor shall be responsible for maintaining
one (1) set of approved drawings to be furnished to the
General Contractor.
B. When a drawing is satisfactory to the Engineer or only re-
quiring minor corrections, three (3) prints will be returne-d
F to him stamped or marked ",Approved" or "approved as Cor-
rected", dated, and the copies thereof will be returned to the
Vendor by setter.
C. Should a drawing be unsatisfactory to the Engineer, he will
stamp thereon "Not Approved-Resubmit" and will return one or
more copies thereof to the Vendor with the necessary cor-
rections and changes indicated. TOP Vendor shall correct or
change the drawings as required by the Engineer and again
submit at least six (6) prints of the drawings for approval.
The Vendor shall revise and resubmit the working drawings as
required by the Engineer until approval thereof is obtained.
D. Approval by the Engineer indicates general compliance or
acceptability; however, it does not relieve the Equipment
Manufacturer of final responsibility for proper dimens'nos,
SC-4
i
f
• y
1.
1
J
JI
z character, quantity, qualitq, strength or sufficiency of the
items involved. Waivers or exceptions to the plans and speci-
fications may be validated only in writing by the Owner which
specifically identifies the feature and no such waiver or
exception shall be allowed as a result of omissions or over-
sights in examining and approving the above drawings or other
material.
SC-11 DELIVERY OF EQUIPMENT AND LiQU10ATED DAMAGES
R { ?he Owner will consider time of completion as a factor in selecting the
euiment and constrn of the
accordinyly. DelaysuInicompletionoofsdeliverylisiexpectedbtopinterfere
with the overall project progress and delay the completion.
The Supplier shall not be held liable for delays caused by:
e a. Any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by +
the Owner.
b. To unforeseen causes beyond the control and without the fault
or negligence of the Vendor, including but not restricted to,
acts of God, or of the public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires,
E floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes and
freight embargoes.
The Owner reserves the right to deduct for each day beyond proposed
delivery time an amount equal to 0.10 percent of contract amount. The
Owner reserves the right to deduct >.'iat amount for each day up to 50 days
for delays in complete delivery of equipment after approved delivery
time. For delivery time in excess of 50 calendar days after proposed
delivery time, the Owner reserves the right to delay final payment for
r the final ten (10%) percent to six months after actual delivery date,
1 regardless of installation and acceptance date, These amounts for
liquidated damages are set forth to help offset the costs and additional
work caused by late deliveries of equipment. Time of completion is to be
considered in making awards and construction schedules for other parts of
the project will be planned to agree with the completion times proposed
by the Vendor,
The Engineer's option regarding claims for delays shall be binding.
SC-12 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE
The Vendor shall prepare detailed instructions for proper handling and
installation of the equipment and ,hall submit at least two copies to the
installation Contractor and four copies to t"e Owner. In event of any
questions by the CuntracLor or Owner, the Vendor shall immediately submit
written clarificrtion to both the Contractor and the owner. The Vendor
shall, also, furnish the services of a competent factory representative
to assist in the installation and startup of the items furnished under
=a the Proposal.
1
rL ~
SC-5
;fr r UI
rw
The Vendor shall furnish to the Engineer four copies of detailed written
instructions for the proper care, maintenance and operation of the equip-
ment. The furnishing of the instructions for installation, care, main-
tenance and operation shall be considered as an integral part of the
specifications, as further detailed in Section SC-19, Manuals.
SC-13 MANUFACIURING STANDARDS
All equipment and materials to be furnished under these specifications
shall conform to the applicable provisions of the following standards of 1
` design, materials, and testing where appropriate. Such reference is made
f for expediency and the specifications referred to herein are hereby made
a part of these specifications.
A. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
B. American National Standards Institute
C. American Society for Testing and Materials r
D. American Welding Society 1
E. American Iron and Steel Institute ;
F. American Water Works Association
Other specific reterences are contained in the Technical Specifications.
r SC-14 PATENTED DEVICES
If bidders hereunder are required or desire to use any design, device,
material or process
cove.ied by letters, patent, or copyright, they shall
provide for such use by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or j
owner and the prices hid hereunder shall, without exception, include any
and all royalties or Uosts arising from such use. The bidder shall
indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any and all claim for in- ,
fringement by reason of the use of any such patented design, device,
material or process, or any trademark or copyright used in connection
with any equipment to be furnished hereunder.
SC-15 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
The Vendor shall guarantee that the equipment and materials furnished
hereunder will be of the kind and quality specified in his proposal, free
from defects in workmanship and materials, and that the equipment furn-
ished will perform in accordance with the parameters set forth in the
Technical Specifications.
If failure of components occurs during the twelve (12) montos following
final acceptance of the equipment, the Vendor shall replace thr defective '
components with new components at no charge to the Owner for parts,
shipping, labor, or installation.
SC-16 ACCEPTANCE
The Owner reserves the right to operate the equipment, after Instal-
lation, for period of thirty (30) days before final acceptance. During
SC-6 ,
I
I
l
r
°i such period, the equipment Vendor, or his representative, shall make such
adjustments as may be deemed necessary to improve the operating per-
formance of the unit.
Should the equipment fail to meet the guarantees set forth therefor in
a the bid proposal, such failure shall be deemed cause for the rejection of
the unit by the Owner and its removal and replacement with an acceptable
unit shall be done at the expense of the Vendor,
SC-17 RESPONSIBLE PARTIES
The Owner will award Contract to the Vendor for the equipment being
furnished in accordance with his accepted Proposal, and will be
responsible for payment in accordance with Item SC-18, Payment.
The General Contractor will have the responsibility of receiving,
inspecting, handling, protecting and installing the equipment, in
accordance with Vendor's Instructions, I
s,
The Vendor shall cooperate with the Owner in scheduling delivery of
equipment and dates that the marr+facturer's representatives should be
available to assist in installation, adjusting, and start-up of the
I equipment, making any corrections necessary to the equipment.
SC-18 PAYMENT
After the date of delivery of all of the specified equipment and mate-
rials, complete, to the job site in goo6 condition, the Owner will make
payment directly to Vendor for the delivered equipment, equal to ninety '
percent (90%) of the proposal amount therefor, less any late delivery
charges, due to late delivery of the equipment. Payment of the remaining
ten percent (10%) of the Contract amount will be due and payable after i
ui final acceptance of the project or within & months after delivery of the +
equipment, whichever comes first.
SC-19 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Prior to installation and operation of the equipment the Vendor shall
z, furnish to the Engineer four (A) copies of Manuals giving Installation
and Operation Instructions, Maintenance Procedures, Parts List and othar
pertinent information. Parts list to include bearing size and desig-
nation for rump and motor.
Manuals shall be prepared by the Equipment Manufacturer and shall also
incorporate appropriate final certified shop drawings, performance
curves, and test data as required by the specifications. Manuals may be
manufacturer's standard instructions, but shall be supplemented as
neces- sary to cover any special feature not included in standard material.
Si Manuals shall be hound in plastic ring or loose leaf binders, preferably
limited to 8-112 by 11 inch page size, with large drawings folded *o such
dimension inserted in an envelope attached to the back of the binder.
SC-7
l
SC-20 GUARANTEED EFFICIENCIES
A statement of the guaranteed over-all efficiency for the pumping unit
with electric motor drive at the specified rated head and capacity shall
be submitted with the pump quotes. 1,1 determining the pump efficiency,
there shall be included all Dump losses; i.e., entrance and bowl losses,
column losses, and discharge losses, etc. The efficiency of the pumpp
will be taken as the water horsepower developed by the pump fdividedtested
the horsepower input to the pump. Pump and motor r in accordance with this specification and certified test results shall be
If the pumping unit does not
approved by the Engineer prior to shipment.
meet the guaranteed efficiency after factory testing, it may be rejected,
or at the Owner's
evaluation option determind by c the e Engineer. price based on
efficiency
i
i
END OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS
r
a
E
• F
;
G
i
~ I
q
i
1
1
SC-8
1
•ri `
?k SECTION I~ VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPINa UNIT
1.00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.01 SCOPE
'i
The equipment to be furnished comprises one (1) vertical turbine
pumping unit consisting of a pump bowl assembly, OPEN line shaft,
column, above floor discharge, vertical hollow shaft motor, and all
other appurtenances specified or required for proper installation
and operation of the pump furnished.
1,02 SUBMITTALS
G.. A. SHOP DRAWINGS
Successful bidder shall submit six (6) sets of full and com-
plete shop and installation drawings to the Engineer for
approval in accordance with Section SC-10.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided prior t~
- installation and operation in accordance with Section SC-19.
C. BID SUBMITTALS
1. General: The Bidder shall furnish a complete description
of all equipment offered under these specifications,
y including catalogs, cuts and pertinent engineering data.
Where the Bidder's product differs from the specified
Y requirements and/or catalog description, each point of
difference shall be clearly stated, The requirment is
set forth to facilitate the review of bids and not to be
construed by the Bidder as waiving any of the require-
ments of the specifications,
: 2. ('haracteristic Curve: Characteristic curve for the pump
I offered shall be submitted with the bid. Curve shall
show the capacity, head, efficiency, required NPSH, and i
f brake horsepower throughout the range of the pump,
Characteristic curve for the pump shall have the capacity
plotted as abscissa and the operating head, brake horse-
power, efficiency and required NPSH plotted as ordinates,
Curve shall cover the full range of operation from shut-
off to maximum capacity. ti
` 3, Data Sheet: The Data Sheet included with the Proposal
shall s)iow the information required with the bid for
each unit, of equipment,
r;
i
kl'
fir
S
y,r
L
1
1
7 .
I
f
1,03 FACTORY INSPECTION AND TESTS
E A. PUMP
Equipment furnished under these specifications will be subject
to inspection during manufacture by a representative of the
Owner who shall be afforded proper facilities for determining
compliance with the specifications.
The Owner may elect to have the factory tests witnessed by 4
the Owner, or a designated representative of the Owner. If
their option is taken to witness the tests, then additional
payment will be made in accordance with the appropriate item
of the Proposal.
If tests are to be witnessed by the Owner or owner's repre-
sentative, the manufacturer shall notify the Owner suffi-
ciently in advance of the dates that tests will be made, so
that he can make arrangements for his representative to be
present.
Pump shall be shop tested and certified copies of test data
and test curve shall be furnished to the Engineer. The
efficiency, capacity, and horsepower requirements shall he
determined for not less than five points throughhout the
specified head range from shut-off to maximum capacity. Test
procedures, interpretation and conversion of data, shall
conform to the latest requirements of the Test Code of the
Hydraulic Institute.
Following completion of shop tests, the Vendor shall furnish
to the Engineer for review and approval four (4) certified
copies of all test data and test curves for the pump. The
Engineer will promptly review test data and, upon determi-
nation that the pump meets contract requirements, authori- i
zation will be given for shipment. Shipment shall not be
made without written approval of test data by the Engineer.
B. MOTOR
+ Motor shall be subjected to standard commercial tests and four
(4) certified copies of test data, together with a certified
statement of the motor's guaranteed efficiencies, power
factor, torque ratings, current ratings, service factor and
locked rotor KVA shall be furnished to the Engineer.
The Engineer will promptly review test data and, upon deter-
mining that the motor meets contract requirements, will indi-
cate his approval, authorizing shipment. Shipment shall not
be made without written approval of test data by the Engineer.
1-l
.
A
1.04 ASSEMBLY
It is anticipated that pump and motor may he shipped from separate ,
` points for assembly at the project site. Pump may be disassembled
1 ~1
s for shipment to the Owner but the Contractor shall certify that at
r the factory, prior to shipment, the unit has been completely assem-
bled, except for motor, each part to each ad,ioininq part. The pump
manufacturer shall be responsible for coordination O th motor
manufacturer to Insure that no undue difficulty in assembly will 'je
g occasioned when units are received at the project site.
F Y It is expected that the pumping unit, without motor, top shaft and
I`. strainer, will be shipped completely asembled with crating, or
skid, fabricated and prepared so as to prevent damage during ship-
ment and handling. Immediately after notification of award the
Vendor shall send to the Owner and the Engineer details regardinq
r 4? shipping assemblies with approximate weights of each shipment item,
which information is to be furnished to installation bidders and
the Co nstruction Contractor.
1.05 MARKING
Pump and motor shall each have a standard manufacturer's nameplate
securely affixed with tapping screws in a conspicuous place,
k , showing the ratings, serial number, model number, manufacturer,
l motor bearing data, and other pertinent nameplate data. I,
1.Ob PUMP PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ;
s Liquid to he pumped is treated and potable water.
{ 1
Pump shall be designed -to operate satisfactorily throughout the
total range of heads, from shirt off to lowest head indicated.
j
l It is desired that the pump have its best efficiency at the design
optimum head, and this efficiency as well as the efficiency at
other operating conditions will be considered in evaluating the
pump.
5.`Pump will be started and stopped with a controlled opening and
closing valve on the pump discharge, and pump bowls, column, and
pump discharge shall be designed for no less than shutoff pressure.
The complete pumping unit, including motor, shall be suitable for
reverse rotation without damage to any part at a speed of 126% of
k normal operating speed, or at the maximum speed, which would
develop due to water flowing from the system at dischargj pressure,
back through the pump upon failure of power to that pumn, whichever
is greater.
The spr.rified pump may be operated alone or parallel with other
existing, or future, pumps. The present system operates at higher
1-3
1
1
'I
i
i
~ i
t
heads than anticipated for the future. Plate 1, included herein
illustrates system curves for the existing pumps and two proposed
pumps, with assumption that Pump No. 5, to be furnished under this
agreement, will have system curve about as shown for Pump No, 4.
Plate I indicates all pump ratings at 250 feet TDH; however, the
present and future pumping ranges will vary considerably from the
rated head. The pump to be furnished shall be capable of operating
through the ranges shown on Plate 1.
Description
Rated Capacity 6,400 GPM
Rated Head 250 feet
Maximum Head 295 feet
Minimum Head 215 feet
Optimum Head (for desired peak eff.) 250 feet
Maximum Speed 1,180 RPM
Available Submergence at Suction Bell 2.8 ft. min
r 18 ft, max.
1.07 PUMP SETTING REQUIREMENTS
The pump is to be installed as shown on drawings included herein.
" The pumping unit is to be supported by a 30-inch flange with
r drilling as per ANSI 816.1, Class 126. The 20-inch butterfly valve
is to be motor-operated, slow opening and closing, so that the
pump will start and stop against shut-off head. I
2.00 PRODUCTS
2.01 PUMP
E
A. GENERAL i
Pump shall be multi-stage vertical turbine pump with enclosed 3
Impellers, for can type installation, with water lubricated t
line shaft bearings. Liquid to be pumped is treated and
potable water.
Pump shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the
applicable requirements of AWWA E101, Vertical Turbine Pumps-
Line Shaft Pumps, latest revision,
B. PUMP BOWLS
Castings shall be of cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35, or
other approved material and shall be free from blow holes,
sand holes or other detrimental defects. The bowls shall be
capable of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure equal to twice
the pressure of the rated head operating condition or 150% of
1 the pressure at shutoff head, whichever is greater, To the
I lower pump bowl there shall be provided a suitable suction
1-4
I
i
1
A
bell, preferably about 26-inches diameter, Bowls shall be
lined with vitreous enamel.
Stainless steel, basket-type, strainer shall be furnished for
1 attachment to bottom of suction bell. Inlieu of providing
bell of 26-inches diameter, the Vendor may furnish a basket
? type strainer with top part fabricated so as to suitably
extend the suction bell to 26-inches diameter,
C. IMPELLERS
The impellers shall be of the enclosed type of cast bronze,
dynamically and statically balanced. They shall be fastened
to the shafts with stainles steel keys, so that they will be
held securely for either normal pumping or reverse rotation.
F ,
y D. NEAR.NG RINGS
µ Each impeller eye and case shall be provided with wearing ring
at the running joint between the impeller and the case. The
rings shall be so designed that they are not dependent on
excessively close bottom setting clearances to prevent
j leakage,
The wearing rings shall be replaceable bronze type, attached
r to pump bowls, unless otherwise approved by the Owner,
Bidders shall furnish details for the proposed wearing rings
s with proposal. {
E. PUMP SHAFT
Pump shaft shall be of stainless steel of not less than 12
percent chrome and shall have water lubricated bronze hearings +
above and below each impeller. The minimum size of the shafts 1
shall be determined by means of formulas given in AWWA Speci-
fication E101 for Vertical Turbine Pumps. Lower pump bearing
shall be grease packed and sealed. Intermediate bear'ngs
shall be water lubricated,
F. LINE SHAFT
The line shaft shall be turned, ground and polished stainless
i steel, not less than 12 percent chrome, and of size that will
conform to stipulated requirements for pump shafts in AWWA
Specification E101. The line shaft shall be coupled, as
n^eded, with keyed couplings which shall be adequately de-
signed with a safety factor of 1-1/2 times the shaft safety
fa,:tor.
r
f~. r
r,
I-5
i
i,
G. DISCHARGE BOWL BEARING
9 A discharge bowl bearing shall be provided above the upper
impeller to assure shaft alignment and stabilization. The
bearing shall be bronze and lubricated by the pumped liquid.
H. STUFFING BOX ASSEMBLY
The stuffing box assembly shall contain graphited asbestos, or
other approved material, which is compressed around the shaft
by an adjustable gland, The pumped liquid shall lubricate the
packing rings. Drip basin, with provisions for draining off
' the packing lubricant shall be provided. A grease fitting
shall provide additional lubrication to a bronze upper shaft
bearing. The packing rings shall be adequate to resist the
pressures developed by the pump.
1. DISCHARGE COLUMN PIPE I
The column pipe, as needed, shall be such that the 'Friction
will not exceed 5 feet per 100 feet of column based on the
rated capacity of the pump and .375 inch thick. The pipe
shall be joined with flanged connections. Flanges shall be
machined for register fit to assure accurate alignment and
shall be connected with stainless steel bolts and nuts, using
anti-seize compound.
J. DISCHARGE HEAD
l The discharge heac+ shall be above-ground type of fabricated ,
I steel and/or cast iron. Discharge flange shad be ANSI IQ
pound class, 20-inch nominal diameter. I
Discharge head shall be designed for large strength safety
~y factor and shall have large hand holes so as to permit easy
access to all adjustable components. Maximum working limits
shall be not less than 1.5 times shut-off pressure of the
pumps. Discharge head shall be designed for minimizing
turbuleince and head loss, Discharge head shall support the
motor above and the pipe, column, shaft bowls, etc., below.
i There shall be provided a packing container assembly in the
discharge head. The packing container (packing gland assem-
bly) shall be designed to permit easy packing mainten.w,ce and
replacement, The assembly shall have space for adequate
t-. number of packing rings, long bronze bearing, bronze lantern
ring and shall be designed for keeping leakage to a minimum.
Grease lubrication shall be provided for packing lubrication.
r The discharge head shall be designed so that the water from
I packing shall have free flow to 3/4" tap that will allow
complete collection and drainage of the recess containing
packing assembly, without overflowing the access openings
i 1-6
1
r
(windows) . Any bolts securing the packing assembly shall be
c3 stainless steel installed with anti-freeze provisions. In-
stallation Contractor shall provide drain pipe from the dis-
charge head to point shown on construction plans.
K. SHOP PAINTING
Inside of column and discharge head outside of bowls and
column which is submerged or obscured from view, shall be
coated with Coal Tar Epoxy, AWWA C210, or similar approved
coating to give a minimum tU .jl dry film thickness of fifteen
(15) mils, Other exposed surfaces shall be cleaned, primed,
and painted with manufacturers standard, gray, machinery
enamel. Furnish extra touch-up paint for installation Con-
tractor's use,
2.02 MOTOR
X A. GENERAL
Electri^ motor for driving pumping unit shall be vertical, air
cooled, hollow shaft, squirrel cage induction type, 1180 RPM,
and shall be designed for full voltage starting. Approved
motors are Siemens-Allis, General Electric, Reliance, and U.
S. Motors, Motor shall be not less than 500 HP.
tit!
i Horsepower nameplate rating of motor, at the 1.0 service
factor, shall be equal to or greater than the total horsepower
requirement of the pump when operating at any head between
a shutoff and minimum heads, including power requirements for
bowl assembly, column and line shaft bearing loss, and motor
r thrust bearing loss from pump thrust. Motor shall have a
service factor of 1.15. Motor shall be designed in accordance
with aprlicable provisions of the latest NEMA Standard Publi-
cation for Motors and Generators, MG 1 with subsequent re-
visions thereto, all subject to modifications and additions as
herein set forth.
The motor nameplate shall indicate the rotation direction
consistent with the pump requirement and the phase rotation of
the power leads.
ff The locked rotor torque and breakdown torque shall not be less
4 than shown in NEMA MG1-12.37 and 12,38 for centrifugal pumps.
The locked rotor KVA/HP shall not exceed NEMA Code Letter F,
5.5 KVA/4IP.
.V
Motor shall have a sound level of no more than 85 dB-A average
at 5 feet distance as defined by ANSI standard method for an
P "A" network analysis.
,I 1-7
Rotor shall be balanced to within an amplitude peak to peak in
accordance with the requirement of NEMA MG-1
Motor terminal voltage shall be rated 2300 volts, 3 ph., 60
hz.
B. ENCLOSURE
Motor enclosure shall be Weather Protected NEMA Type for
ainted accordance with
outdoor installation
quality gray machineryior
shall be p t
enamel, or other approved coating.
C, INSULATION
Motor windings shall be full Class B or better insulated.
The motor Impre windings shall be forin wound and
stator
The entire completeda
,pith epoxy-- p 9
material. Theewindingsashalli comply owith
assembly hyg osocpic shall
the latest applicable provisions of NEMA MG 11 and end winding
coils shall be braced to limit displacement to no moreMthan
i
5.0 mils under any ccondition of ontinuously at rated voltage andnfre.uency at
shall operate continuously G not to
40°C ambient temperature, with a temperature
uwhenioperating at
exceed 10°C measured by embedded detector
full load.
D, BEARINGS
Motor bearings shall be designed for the maximum loads imposed
by the pump and motor, and shall be selected for a 5-year
minimum life, and a 25-year average life, in accordance with
A.F.B.M.A. life sand thrust values. Bearings shall not require
external oil.
E. CONDUIT BOX
Conduit boxes shall bL larger than minimum and adequate size
to accommodate stress cones to make up cable terminations for
5000 volt shielded cable, N1/0 AWG.
F. ACCESSORIES TERMINAL BOX
Motors having both space heaters & RTD's shall have accessory
leads terminated in a separate box on barrier type terminals.
All leads shall be suitably marked and identified.
i G. GROUNDING MEANS
provide
a ground acable. (Thelhole diameterrshallebeo1/4"mforaalln of
r a
1-q
f,,
inutors below 100 hp, 3/8" for all motors from 100 to 500 hp,
and 1/2" for all motors above 500 hp). The grounding means
shall be located on the same side of the motor as the motor
power lead conduit box.
H. APPURTENANCES
1. Bearing Temperature Monitors; Motor shall be equipped
j with two (21 Honeywell T-654 or Edison Omniguard Indi.-
eating Temperature Controllers for bearing temperature
indication and relay control in motor starter.
I 2. Space Heaters: Motor shall be equipped with space
heaters for operation on 230 volt, 60 hertz, single phase
power.
Al 3. Temperature Detectors; Motor shall have six (6) 10-ohm
F RTD's, spaced evenly around the stator windings with two
embedded in each phase.
3.00 INSTALLATION AND ACCEPTANCE
ray
3.01 GENERAL
Installation of equipment will be performed by a Construction
Contractor, who will be required to assemble the equipment where
required and install it in accordance with installation, Operation
and Maintenance instructions which shall be furnished by the Vendor
or Manufacturer.
3,02 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a com-
petent technical representative, or representatives, who shall have
had experience in the installation and operation of the equipment
which is being furnished under this contract. This service is for
the purpose of insuring proper installation and adjustment of the
equipment,, instructing operating personnel, as requested in proper
operation, maintenance and care of the equipment, for making check
tests of equipment and making recommendations for obtaining the
most efficient use thereof.
r
r a The service representative shall be at the site at any time the
Construction Contractor is assembling, setting, aligning, con-
necting or adjusting the pump and motor assembly, and shall direct
such work and certify that it has been properly installed.
3,03 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
Upon completion of installation of equipment, an acceptance test to
verify the satisfactory installation and operation of each unit
shall be conducted by the manufacturer's representative. The test
1-4
1
1
M
shall be conducted in a manner approved by and in the presence of
the Engineer and Owner. Unit shall be checked for excessive noise,
alignment, vibration, general operation, etc. The unit must per-
form in a manner acceptable to the Engineer before final acceptance
j will be made by the Owner.
The pumping unit shall be operated throughout its full range of
operating heads, recording pump discharge pressure and flow, motor
voltage and current, and motor bearing temperatures. Service
representative shall certify that the equipment is adequately
designed and operates satisfactorily.
END OF SECTION
E
i
I
1-10
i
E
I
f
T-
i
SECTION 2 - MEDIUM VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT
1.00 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
M The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall con-
sist of one (1) motor controller for control of one (1) 500 HP
squirrel cage induction motor. The equipment shall be approxi-
mately 90 inches in height, 30 inches deep, one-high construction
and completely front accessible. All primary parts of the equip-
ment, including the con'.actors, instrument transformer, busses,
connections, and insulators shall be coordinated to withstand
mechanical stress and to havr, sufficient thermal capacity for use
r on the proposed system i;ithout artificial cooling,
r 1,02 STANDARDS
The equipment shall comply with the latest rules and regulations of
i the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) and the
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) standards,
and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for full
voltaqe non-reversing Class E2 controllers and shall have an in-
terrupting capacity of 200,000 KVA,
iY
1,03 MANUFACTURER
The equipment shall be manufactured by General Electric, Limitamp
5KV, Westinghouse Ampguard 5000, Seimens-Allis, or approved equal,
1.04 OPERATING VOLTAGE
The equipment shall be designed and arranged for operation on 2400
t # volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz.
1.05 CONTROL POWER
Control power shall be 240 VAC from control transformers located in
each cubicle,
1,06 INSULATION LEVELS
The assembled equipment shall be designed for the following insu-
lation levels;
A. Standard Insulation Tests, 60 Hertz, 19 KV.
B. Standard Full Wave Impulse (withstand) Tests 60 KV.
2-1
y
Y
1.07 MOTOR CONTROL HORSEPOWER RATING 41
Horsepowers as indicated on the Plans are approximate. It shall
be the responsibility of the Vendor to furnish properly sized
motor control equipment when actual motor horsepowers are deter-
mined. If actual motor horsepowers differ from the Drawings, the 1
Vendor shall obtain assistance from the Engineer during submittal
preparation in determining whether or not hardware and wiring
changes are necessary. The Vendor shall be responsible for
providing all components and wire of the proper size.
a 1.08 ENCLOSURES
The equipment shall be installed in a NEMA 1-gasketed enclosure,
front accessible.
2,00 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. MOTOR CONTROLLER
Each motor controller shall consist of a stationary element
and a removable element. The stationary element to include
silver plated copper busses, copper connections, instrument
transformers, automatic shutters, steel barriers between
1 compartments, a manually or electrically operated mechanism
for moving the contactor carriage to and from the connected
position, mechnical interlocks, ground bus, terminal blocks
and wiring for control and secondary connections, control
fuses, and provisions for connecting cables. The stationary
i units shall be constructed of welded structural shaped steel
members together with formers sections of special 14 gauge
smooth panel steel approximately 0.079" thick. The units
shall be comnletely enclosed by a hinged panel door with
removable plates permitting access to all compartments, The f
i structures shall be rigid and self-supporting and so designed
that units can readily be added in the future.
s The removable element shall consist of the contactor, primary
fuses, mechanical interlocks and control transformer with
associated control wiring. A contactor of the size specified
shall be furnished with the motor controller as shown on the
drawings.
The contactor carriage shall be isolated from all other
E primary equipment and arranged so that it may be completely
disconnected from thF line and bus for rest and inspection,
The removable element shall be equipped with mechanical inter-
locks which prevent disconnecting the contactor from the
stationary structure without tripping open the contactor, It
I .
2-2
' V
y7J
iI
a
I
41
" shall not be possible to close the contactor either elec-
trically or mechanically when the removable element is at any
point between the operating and test positions. Isolation
shall be accomplished by moving to the disconnected position,
It shall be possible then to open the door and remove it from
! the structure. All removable elements of like rating and
having similar features shall be interchangeable. Provisions
shalt be made for padlocking the removable element in either
x the connected or test positions.
The controller shall have an interrupting capacity of 400,000
ks KVA and shall be a full height cubicle, Each cubicle shall
include the following:
1 - Draw out air break contactor assembly complete with
400-A, 50,000 KVA contactor, 3 current limiting power
fuses, control power transformer with fused primary and
secondary. A test switch shall be provided, isolating
t the transformer during the test.
h) 1 - AC Ammeter calibrated for single phase amperes
1 - AC Ammeter swltch
x 3 - Current transformers (ratio as required)
3 - overload Relays, ambient compensated
1 - Three phase 2000 amperes silver-plated copper bus
1 - Ground Bus (tin plated)
1 - Indicating Lamp, red
t 1 - Indicating Lamp, green
1 - Relay, control, for bearing temperature (BTR)
S - Relay, control for winding temperature (WTR)
' 1 - Relay, ten ohm type, inherent motor protection (OT)
g3 1 Elapsed time meter
1 - Terminal strip with 10 spare terminal points
1 - HAND-OFF-AUTO control switch
1 - Set single conductor terminal lugs for 5KV shielded
cable, #1/0 AWG
j 1 - Set, auxiliary control relays as required
1 1 - Set, Reset pushbuttons (as required)
2 - N.O. auxiliary M contacts
2 - N.C. auxiliary M contacts
if
ii B. INSTRUMENT CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
S Each instrument current transformer shall be substantial and
+ well built. Insulation shall be equal to that necessary to
meet the requirements of the IEEE standards. At normal rated
amperes, under usual service conditions, no part of the
transformer shall exceed the heating limits snecified in the
IEEE standards. Each current transformer shall be. capable of
carrying continuously, its rated primary amperes, under
2-3
op~
conditions of accidental open secondary circuit, without {J
damage to the primarly insulation.
C. INSTRUMENT POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS
Each potential transformer shall be substantial and well
built and shall meet the requirements of the applicable IEEE /
standards.
0. INDICATING INSTRUMENTS
In general, all indicating instruments shall be rectangular
type arranged for semi-flush mounting. They shall preferably
be provided with 240° anti-parallax scales and nonglare glass
faces. Scales shall be white with black markings. Moving
elements shall be provided with zero adjustment. Accuracy
shall he +1%. Movements shall be taut-band type. Scales
shall be calibrated for primary units.
E. CONTROL STITCHES, PUSHBUTTONS, AND INDICATING LAMPS
Control switches shall he of the rotary type and have posi-
tive means of maintaining contact. The contacts shall he
silver-to-silver and shall be provided with easily removable
protective covers. Indicating lamps shall be of the low
energy type with series resistors for use on the 240 volts
A.C. Control switches, pushbuttons, and indicating lamps
shall be of the heavy duty oiltight type. Indicator lamps
shall be easily removable from the front of the panel.
F. VOLTMETER AND AMMETER STITCHES
All voltmeter and ammeter instrument switches shall he of the
rotary type and have distinctive handles. Positive means of
maintaining contact shall be provided. The contacts shall be
silver-to-silver and shall he provided with easily removable
covers.
G. ELAPSED TIME METER
Where shown on the control schematics, each starter shall be
provided with an elapsed time meter. The meter shall be
General Electric Type KT11, or approved equal. The meter
shall be of a non-reset type, for totalizing of hours and
shall operate at 240 VAC, 60 Hertz.
H. NAME PLATES
Units of equipment, switches, and other pertinent devices on
the front of units shall be provided with engraved, laminated
plastic nameplates of similar size and style as existing
1 equipment, fixed with tapping screws, and bearing the appro-
I+ priate designations.
I
2-4
i
t
1
r
„r 1. EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
Equipment accessories shall be furnished as follows:
i
2 - spare fuse of each type and size
° 2 - spare lamps of each type and size
1 - set test cables
I - set special wrenches for primary disconnecting devices
r J. UNDERYOLTAGE AND PHASE SEQUENCE RELAY (47/27) 1
A three-phase undervoltage, overvoltage and negative phase
sequence relay (47/27) shall be furnished and installed as
shown on the drawings. The relay shall be factory wired with
contacts which open in the event of under-voltage, phase
failure or phase reversal. Trip points shall be adjustable
3
between low voltage levels of 90'i; and 95% and high voltage
levels of 105`G and 110%.
F
Ii
Relay shall automatically reset upon return to normal
operating conditions. The relay shall be Turner Controls
Model TC-33B, or approved equal.
I
. K. RTD TEMPERATURE MONITOR (49)
Thermal relay (RTD), as shown on the Plans for temperature
ti protection of large motors shall be sultable for monitoring
temperature of embedded 10-ohm resistors in the winding of
the machine. The device shall have "trip" contacts, ad-
justable set point for tripping and shall be provided with a
selector switch for sequential readout of each of the six
i sensing resistors. The device shall be suitable for being
powered by 230 volts, 60 Hz. This device shall be switch-
board type furnished by Westinqhouse Corporation, Model
2076A36-HO1, or approved equal.
2.02 FABRICATION
The unit shall be fabricated of sheet steel and completely en-
closed. Equipment, including instrument transformers, instru-
ments, switches, controls, etc., shall be furnished for each unit
as required and specified. Instruments, switches, etc., shall be
mounted on the front face of the door.
The buses, contactor, and instrument transformers shall be mounted
in separate grounded metal compartments. The buses shalt be
rigidly supported by insulatinq material of high mechanical and
dielectric strength. The contact surface of all bolted joints
shall be silver plated. The unit shall he equipped with a ground
bus, consisting of one 2-inch by 1/4-inch copper bar, which will
r be connected to the station ground by the installation Contractor.
c' 2-5
I
j ,
q
All control circuit relays, terminal blocks, etc,, shall be
mounted on a hinged metal plate in the upper half of the motor
controller cabinet, The plate shall be recessed not deeper than
necessary to permit closing of the upper door on the control
devices. All terminal blocks including those outgoing shall be
installed in the control compartment. All wires leaving the units
shall terminate at identified terminal strips in the control
compartment. All conductors shall be tagged and identified with
same numbers used on assembly drawings and terminal strips. All
current transformer leads shall he landed on shorting type
j terminal blocks.
2,03 FINISH
All metal structures, after fabrication, shall he thoroughly
cleaned, bonderized as a unit and then given a primary coat, a
coat of rust preventative and a finishing coat of gray ANSI-61
enamel. Instruments, relays, and meters shall have dull black
standard finish.
2.04 FACTORY TESTS AND ASSEMBLY
Equipment shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted, and
tested at the factory. After complete assembly, each unit shall
be tested for operating sequence to assure accuracy of wiring,
correctness of control scheme, and functioning of the equipment,
Factory tests shall include electrical tests as described by the
applicable ANSI Standards.
2,05 SMALL WIRING
All necessary small wiring, potential busses, and terminal blocks
within each unit shall he furnished installed, Provisions shall i
be made for purchasers control contact to the units. All secon-
dary and control wiring within the high tension compartment shall
be completely shielded in a protective metal covering, j
2,06 POWER ENTRY I
1
Power entry shall be from the top by means of cabling from the
existing switchgear line-up.
2.07 DRAWINGS
Complete shop drawings shall be. furnished, Drawings showing
physical construction and physical location of all components,
complete schematic, and point-to-point wiring diagrams showing
wire and terminal numbers shall be furnished.
Six sets of instruction manuals shall he furnished. The in-
struction manuals shall contain complete maintenance and trouble
1 2-6
1~
1
J
i
i~ .
shooting instructions and shall have a list of recommended renewal
parts for both hardware and electronic equipment,
r 3.00 INSTALLATION
3.01 GENERAL
3 The equipment shall be assembled and installed in accordance with
instructions and directions furnished by the manufacturer, and as
described in these Speciflcatinns and as shown on the Plans.
Manufacturer's representative shall be available to advise the
Construction Contractor in this work, and shall be at the site at
any time the Construction Contractor is setting, level inq, and
making line connections, and shall check wiring connections, relay
settings and contact closures. He shall certify that all con-
nections and calibrations are correct.
f s`= 3.02 TESTS AND OPERATION
r The manufacturer's representative shall be available to direct and
assist the Construction Contractor in checking the operation of
the Motor Control Equipment, Tests, as necessary, shall he
conducted to assure proper operation of all circuits and equip-
ment. The manufacturer's representative shall assist in cor-
recting any deficiences and shall certify that the equipment is
adequately designed and functions properly,
3.03 PAINTING
1
The manufacturer shall furnish sufficient touch-up paint. of the
t: same type and color used at the factory to repair damages incurred
0 in installation by the Construction Contractor,
I END OF SECTION
f
r
a
'a+
2-7
T
1
1
- O TQR -
- .l MPS . GPM - r E&JST/NGI PU-
NP
_7 NO' L. 500
P5o 1 i ' i
6400 V
e ! I ,Albs Chalmers 1[i l 250 + 250 NP ' _ l
2780 J-1-1
Ecoin ~
1-' + X50."_HP
v ~ Whe~l~r om ~
*
z y _ i4I67_ 1 ,T1 250,
' r whoel~r-.Ecomom _6400 , l z5Q~ - - 5j00HP _ -
~o'r'rbo--k Morse 0 500 HP -
7 L64 Q0 125 -1
r --4
0 1 . Z5Q I SHOO- HP
*5 Nsor.-.Fula +'640
1~ -
x6 . - Fufice A 1-
Lli
r r „
t` I rclimrnar Rolrngs i L
3501[-
_ L.L I. - r 1
i 1' }
I Y' I - r
I' I
1 i
e 1- r~ y-~ + 7.~ -
_iA
~ 1
} 300 i.
17
I,
l•l4f5f6~ 1[R'- -
i _,i.~ ' ;a~ ~ my 1::, 4 ~-t ~ - ' y1tOb , Jed _+~-4,
111 _ G
1 V
1 I _
Y I 1
1 1 a~ ~-t- 1[ I~ a ~ ~ _
s 250' i i - 1[ L 1[
t t
5f4
P t14_ A T-1
i _1 r-`1 1[t A!-1
~ t
200 I _ L
- 1[
-TEXAS
CI?Y pp...dIEN?AN.
SYSTEM
O
WAf1[ RWORKS
I _
- - V1CE_ PUSv1PS
HIGH SER
SYS?E,~N
ING i
FREE -
SE AND NICHOLS, I
p/ CpS
I I1It `CONSUl.1.1,NG'- ENG4NELR5
f THOUSAND G P M
20 25
0 --5._ /D /5 PLATE i
tl R
z1[,,;
I ~
PI P;
r
~srljSi /
ti,! ~ .'r}~t~Kl~{~I~y1 !1'v~,~,~rt~~ o~ w:N k eY•vt/ f`~`M.! ZIP!,
1 tr_ ly , 'rJ HIV
r it!
r _ ..l r~u•~v~c' 1
t ~~.yyy 1, m - i
r r@ ''p:~ 4 , fl l
lit
4k ~O
S '
try ,Iz;' - ---T--• - ~ t
~t
i
D/schwrye <v
jNA
,ta~y ,ti ~ By /~rarrr~a M' fir.
t ~
r '
-4. '1:)
s Iii
/
y k pCr f vrr7p O 1 (U~
Wy r• r
yi: V. ~ ~ m f
~ ,.~y i ~ I _J ♦~r
r _
~ ~ \ Sf, v ~ III ~~r
el MltV!
t
lyric 6V'ATION
1 p,
+t ,
r; IRM ASIA'' OL 3 , NQt
i,'f~,r _i,1~" ~4; IM ~ ~In., ) R!''••vlrl+ ',~w,i✓!;$'f; b n ~ t,, ~ r ,U
I
1
I
Ir.
v a
y q0
r
f
yS ~ 1 ~ nl
tY I
13 10 ro
~P ',~+r t
t
I
S t
t ~d, a
} TY !Cat~._, II TION
I
i ~
~1TY pPr DgNTON, rlXAS
S, T4NSlON
f~'1GN SE', ,LICE P> TA X ,
Alk
lY~r 4k.tG,~
Ary/wy, y
~ '-S h ~ S '~R~ ~~1 f ' : 1 J 4 ~ ~Q)11 f ~ /]7 C 1~ Srr 1
Y,
y.,
is
I
I!
r
O -
i
.
I '
l? C rn JV
r
High Fillu
' ~ervlC~ l~19i7
a pr,rnp No. ' S ervi~ e
~ r
i
i ~
f
Msk J
~ _ f'Vr} rl~lY - rf14.1'Dr~' GON TRQGL,.~ rS' _
r
Cr'It~ Of DonAon, reluaa
mjA CorvIce Pump &j. ;
pl' ¢a 3
iI
M J
iff
ghorling
7I TB
CA.S
AI..II
i ?O? CIO 561o," AMe,7 Va/va, C/osQd
u.x.~ OPP~ of sy; op~~
CP1 rPi cPr
?40 y -I l f
'i
/Cb»vr_ r 7'~A Vo/VC~ t
0 13) 97R o rx 47127x 4 ~
N f
h
n • . -Z,\
IW 1Ap
F
i
II
4 - i
~ f3esring /cmp, ESE {
Swi tc,hGS
I I ~
877R B6APIN6
OTX WlN C7IIVG
TEMP,
i
41
W 171r- -,*x Sc ,CA- L UPE
or
/lI
STOP
M
' N 97127x f~TR O T
Fulwe Remolc Alarm Or 51a1us
~a CoNrRol 5cl-1cMATIC
NI~N 5~ R V I CE 'CU/w'o IVO. 5
G~fy Of Usnfart, Texas .
` Nt.4h 5crvice PUM 6/s. E'xpv/7sldn
PIWC d ;
t 4..
1
I
3
-,1
~ ~ .
u~{ ~
~
~ ,
(~Y1~:
T~~ i
I tjj; ~
,}rll I~
1
.sa ~ f 1
t 111111~~~
Y
{E ~
is ~ t to
1 1. 'x
rA
1. I
y JI
i~f.~ r I
1
~I
' 1~
Y `fii. ~ I
S'~y -
~s~
~ ~ I
f
~ l]
3~
4
~i~
I
'
j
l